Today’s News 17th June 2018

  • Tesla Belonging To Mary McCormack Husband Spontaneously Combusts In LA Street

    Who knew that Teslas now come with Elon Musk’s famous “not a flamethrower” flamethrower included?

    The Tesla Model S belonging to the husband of actress Mary McCormack spontaneously combusted in Los Angeles. In a late Friday tweet, the West Wing actress said that flames burst out of the undercarriage – most likely the car’s battery compartment – while her husband was driving the car on Santa Monica boulevard in Los Angeles.

    “No accident,out of the blue, in traffic on Santa Monica Blvd.  Thank you to the kind couple who flagged him down and told him to pull over. And thank god my three little girls weren’t in the car with him”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In the 45-second clip, a police officer can be heard warning onlookers to “stand clear” of the car in case it blows. It was not immediately clear if McCormack recorded the footage, although police dispatch radio can be heard in the background.

    The latest Tesla fiasco comes amid growing criticism of Musk’s production methods and scrutiny for Tesla over the safety of its vehicles following multiple crashes in recent months, several of which deadly.

    A recent NTSB report found a Model X car running on autopilot was accelerating as it hit a barrier on a California highway, killing the driver. Regulators said that the lithium-ion battery in the electric car was breached following the crash, causing a fire to break out as the wreckage sat by the roadside, then proceeded to reignite several days later.

    It increasingly appears that the Tesla car battery is the car’s – and company’s – weakest link, prompting questions into the logic behind Musk’s investment of billions of dollars into battery production facilities.

    In a recent controversial outburst, Musk lashed out at reports scrutinising Tesla car safety, saying the media focuses on its accidents while ignoring more frequent crashes of conventional vehicles.

    Alas, incidents such as McCormack’s will not help the car’s track record, especially if the Hollywood elite, led by anti-Trump resistance leader, Chelsea Handler, make it “uncool” for celebs to be seen in the spontaneous combusting sarcophagus. This is what an outraged Handler said in response to the burning Model S:

    This happened to my bff today. Who drives 3 girls daily in this car. @elonmusk @Tesla I have the same model and make. So, how many of these are on the road?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • U.S. Disaster Zones: Are You Living In A Place Where Disasters Are Common?"

    Authored by Sara Tipton via ReadyNutrition.com,

    With constant media bombardment of fears of a nuclear war, many have begun to prepare for a disaster. But government uncertainty isn’t the only thing on the minds of the masses. Volcanic activity appears to be increasing and earthquakes seem to be getting more severe.

    That begs the question: do you live in a disaster zone?

    In just the past 16 years, parts of Louisiana have been struck by six hurricanes. Areas near San Diego were devastated by three particularly vicious wildfire seasons. And a town in eastern Kentucky has been pummeled by at least nine storms severe enough to warrant federal assistance. These are obvious red flag areas, but what about the rest of the country?

    The New York Times has put together a map showing which areas in the United States were subjected to the most disasters which caused monetary losses by ZIP code between 2002 – 2017.

    The statistics for living in the “red zones” in the above map are not comforting either. About 90 percent of the total losses across the United States occurred in ZIP codes that contain less than 20 percent of the national population, according to an analysis of data from the Small Business Administration.

    In the first three months of 2018, billion-dollar storms hit the United States three times. By contrast, in the first three months of an average year, just one disaster that causes more than a billion dollars in damages occurs,according to National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration records dating back to 1980.

    The National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) attempts to calculate the full cost of major disasters, namely those that cause more than a billion dollars in damages. It estimates that 2017 was the costliest year on record, with 16 billion-dollar disasters that together cost the United States more than $300 billion. While natural disasters are often unpredictable, the annual losses from billion-dollar disasters, which were adjusted for inflation, have increased over the last 40 years.

    Because the federal government continues to use taxpayer funds to subsidize the disaster zones, critics feel that the money is being wasted by continuing to help people live in places that they know will be hit by a hurricane or deadly storm. Christina DeConcini, the director of government affairs at the World Resources Institute, said that instead of just being responsive, the government should stress building for resilience against the disasters that continue to cost people money.

    About 4 percent of all hurricanes that make landfall globally hit the United States, said Robert Mendelsohn, an economist at Yale University who studies the damage caused by hurricanes. However, 60 percent of worldwide damage from hurricanes happens in the United States. Dr. Mendelsohn attributed this partly to federal government programs that discourage citizens and local governments from building walls to protect housing near the coast. Only in the United States do relief programs and subsidized insurance make it attractive for people to move toward disaster-prone areas, he told The New York Times.

    People continue to live in disaster areas mostly because of their financial situation, whether it be a lot or too little money. Phil Klotzbach, an atmospheric scientist at Colorado State University, said that the rise in population and wealth near the coasts was contributing to most of the increase in the destruction caused by hurricanes. Bigger and more expensive homes require more money to repair in the event of a natural disaster, and many even in the middle class are being squeezed out of coastal areas due to the cost of living. In 2016, there were more than 3.6 times as many homes in states that border the Gulf of Mexico and the Atlantic Ocean as in 1940, according to the Census Bureau.

    Others say that their family ties and lack of funds to support a move are keeping them in areas prone to natural disasters. Linda Lowe, the president of a historical society in flood-prone Olive Hill, Kentucky said that rather than move the town, “it’s easier to throw your hands up and say, ‘Forget it.’” Dr. Irwin Redlener, the director of the National Center for Disaster Preparedness at Columbia University said rationality often goes out the window when discussing things like disasters and their destructive potential on a person’s life.

    “Abandoning a location and moving a city makes sense from a scientific, risk point of view, but the fact is that to get to a place culturally and psychologically where that conversation can be tolerated is a difficult thing to imagine,” said Redlener.

    “It’s not all that rational — but I guess a lot of these things are not really rational,” he added according to The New York Times.

    But some residents have decided to stay in disaster zones and use their time between hurricanes to prepare themselves for the next storm. It’s often the best way to protect against monetary and life losses, said one Louisiana resident. Susan McClamroch, who works at a museum in Slidell, Louisiana, said that locals joke that they “start eating everything in the freezer” this time of year because of the likelihood of a power failure after a hurricane.

    If you cannot relocate, or do not wish to relocate, consider storing some food and water in a safe place just in case disaster strikes.

  • The Sources Of Tax Revenue For Every US State, In One Chart

    In the aftermath of Trump’s tax reform, which many mostly coastal states complained would cripple state income tax receipts and hurt property prices, S&P offered some good news: in a May 30 report, the rating agency said that “[s]tate policymakers have a lot to cheer,” noting the current slowdown in Medicaid signups and dramatically higher revenue collections, to the tune of 9.4%, are significantly boosting state fiscal positions.

    Still, the agency’s view is that current conditions are “most likely only a temporary respite” (very much the same as what is going on at the federal level) means that the agency is likely to focus on “a state’s financial management and budgetary performance during these ‘good’ times” to determine its “resilience to stress when the economy eventually softens” according to BofA.

    To that end, S&P warns that:

    “[f]or those [states] that either stumble into political dysfunction or – out of expedience – assume recent trends will persist, this moment of fiscal quiescence could prove to be a mirage.”

    For now, however, let the good times roll, and with real GDP growth tracking at 3.8% for 2Q18, state tax receipts should grow at a rate of over 10% based on historical correlation patterns, with the growth continuing at 9% and 8% in Q3 and Q4.

    This is gpod news for states that had expected a sharp decline in receipts, and is especially important for states heavily skewed to the personal income tax since revenue from that source should rise by over 14%, according to BofA calculations.

    Finally, the BofA chart below is useful for two reasons, first, it shows the states most reliant on individual income taxes from the Census Bureau’s most recent annual survey of tax statistics. Oregon – at 69.4% of total tax collections – is most reliant on individual income taxes, followed by Virginia (57.7%), New York (57.2%), Massachusetts (52.9%) and California (52.0%). More notably, it shows the full relative breakdown of how states collect revenues, from the Individual income tax-free states such as Florida, Texas, Washington, Tennessee, and Nevada, to the sales tax-free Alaska, Vermont and Oregon, to the severance-tax heavy Wyoming, North Dakota and Alaska, and everyone inbetween: this is how America’s states fund themselves.

    Collections by tax type as a percentage of total state tax revenue collections (as of 2016); Source: Bank of America

  • The Biggest Misconceptions About Working For A Hedge Fund

    Authored by Dan Butcher via eFinancialCareers.com,

    Of all the misconceived stereotypes about working for a hedge fund, the biggest one is around pay. Many people underestimate how long and hard you’ll have to work to achieve the eye-popping salaries and bonuses that make headlines.

    For every Chris Rokos, who earned around $900m over a decade working for Brevan Howard, there are plenty making decidedly less. Those who start out earn an average of $90-125k.

    “One of the biggest misconceptions people have is if you work at a hedge fund then you don’t really have to do a lot and you make a lot of money and you have a great life forever, but that’s not reality,” says Afroz Qadeer, the CEO of Kettle Hill Capital Management and a member of the Mid-Atlantic Hedge Fund Association. 

    “People think you’re essentially a master of the universe, but in reality, you put in a lot of hard work, a lot of long hours.”

    1. You will not earn millions working for a hedge fund unless you’re very lucky 

    David Kochanek, the publisher of the HedgeFundCompensationReport.com, agrees that it is common to overestimate how much a typical hedge fund professional makes. The owners of large hedge funds regularly make the rich lists, but it’s only the lucky few that earn over seven figures. “About half of the respondents in our study reported making between $100k and $300k,” Kochanek says.

    Less than 10% reported earning more than $1m in cash compensation. For those making north of a million dollars, more than 70% of their cash compensation was from their bonus, a portion of which they typically have to invest back into the fund.

    The Fund Compensation Report by SumZero suggests that hedge funds with between $5-10bn in assets under management are likely to pay you the most.

    2. You will work incredibly hard, often outside of your job description 

    When you start out at a hedge fund, expect your daily routine to involve long hours and a wide range of tasks. The smaller the firm, the wider the range of responsibilities employees are required to take on. “It is difficult to get a good job working for a hedge fund,” says George Schultze, the CEO of Schultze Asset Management and a member of the Hedge Fund Association’s board of directors. “Most hedge funds are small businesses and therefore their employee needs may include jobs that are not that glamorous.

    “Expect to work hard and wear lots of hats as you break into this industry,” he adds. “Know that there are limited openings so that competition can be extreme. Be prepared to work more for experience than for high levels of pay – that’s the best way to enter this business if you really want in.”

    Qadeer agrees that hedge funds tend to have a challenging working environment, which is exacerbated at smaller and medium-sized firms that don’t have a big support structure. “You’ll be doing more than one thing and you have to be prepared to get your hands dirty,” he says.

    3. All hedge funds are not the same 

    There’s a misconception that hedge funds represent a monolithic industry, says Victoria Hart, a portfolio manager at Pinnacle View Capital Management, a long/short equity hedge fund.

    Depending on the type, focus or investment style of the fund, the AUM, the turnover, the level of interaction with the co-founders or partners and various other characteristics, the experience of working at one hedge fund can be radically different from that of another. “They get lumped together, and then many stereotypes get drawn and associated to all [hedge] funds, without understanding that there are important distinctions between funds,” Hart says.

    4. Making it takes a lot of time 

    Some aspiring and early-career-stage hedge fund professionals underestimate how long it takes to master the skills and acquire the expertise required to succeed over the long term. On the investment side, you need to have real-life experience through many market cycles to appreciate how markets turn, Hart says. Sales/marketing requires time to cultivate relationships and learn the art of persuasion and selling techniques. And operations is riddled with many important details to learn, she noted.

    “[Another] misperception is that you need to be a rock star at just one thing,” Hart says. “All of these roles require multiple skills; you can’t just be good at only one thing.”

    You need analytical skills for an investment role, but you also need good communication skills to get your ideas across, she says. “Sales and marketing requires solid verbal and written communication skills, but also someone who is facile enough with math to understand the product.”

    5. It doesn’t pay off to be known as a jerk who loses his temper

    People who have the ability to perform well under pressure and possess the full range of skills, including emotional intelligence or “people skills,” are more successful over the long haul, says one hedge fund portfolio manager. In contrast, someone who flies off the handle and has a temperament that’s more volatile most of the time it means that individual’s emotional IQ is lower. That can limit some people’s career progression if they don’t compensate for those shortcomings with other factors.

    Short tempers won’t be tolerated in someone who can’t deliver, whereas for someone who delivers consistently strong performance, there’s tolerance for such behavior, even though it is not welcomed. Softer skills come into play more once a hedge fund manager becomes a bit more senior – dealing with conflicts and stress well is an important leadership skill.

  • The End Of Merkel? CDU Lawmaker Admits Germany Could Have A New Chancellor "By The End Of Next Week"

    It’s looking increasingly likely that German Chancellor Angela Merkel may have attended her last G-7 conference.

    A day after the euro whipsawed on conflicting reports touting the collapse of Merkel’s governing coalition, a lawmaker from Merkel’s own party said the Chancellor could be out by the end of next week during an appearance on BBC World at One (via Express). On Friday, German media reported that Merkel’s junior coalition partner, the CSU, had announced the end of its alliance with Merkel’s CDU – though that report was quickly denied.

    While the German public’s anger over Merkel’s “open door” policy has been simmering for years, the instability within the ruling coalition – which features a decades-old political alliance between the CDU and CSU – intensified when Merkel decided over the weekend to veto a plan by Interior Minister Horst Seehofer aimed at controlling and reducing illegal migration. The minister’s refusal to back down has already shattered an uneasy truce between conservative backers and opponents of her liberal asylum policy.

    Whittaker

    Kai Whittaker

    German MP Kai Whittaker, a CDU member, said Merkel’s clashes with Seehofer – who is demanding that German border police be given the right to turn back migrants without identity papers or who are already registered elsewhere in the European Union – are threatening to bring about “a new political situation. And probably a new chancellor.

    As Whittaker astutely points out, the political crisis stems from the fact that the issue of immigration has become “a power question”.  The AfD, which outperformed expectations during Germany’s fall elections, owes its rise largely to its anti-asylum stance. And as the chaos builds, Whittaker explained that German lawmakers are largely in the dark about what is happening with the leadership.

    We are in a serious situation because the question of the migration crisis evolved into a power question…the question is who is leading the Government? Is it Angela Merkel or is it Horst Seehofer? Everybody seems to be standing firm and that’s the problem.”

    […]

    There is a master plan to solve the migration crisis, which consists of 63 ideas of Horst Seehofer.

    Wittaker also pointed out that Seehofer’s clashes with Merkel could be linked to upcoming local elections in Bavaria, where the conservative party is concerned about retaining a majority.

    “This must have to do with the coming election in Bavaria because it is vital for the Conservatives to win an overall majority because that’s why they have a national importance.”

    “This kind of has the potential to diminish the authority of her and Horst Seehofer and it could well be that at the end of next week we have a new situation. Probably a new Chancellor.

    Merkel has opposed what she sees as Seehofer’s heavy handed approach toward immigration, and has held meetings with members of her party seeking support for her failing asylum policies, which brought more than 1 million migrants to Germany in 2015, leading to a spike in violent assaults. However, many of Merkel’s allies are even demanding changes to her “open door” policy regarding migrants. Seehofer’s plan would replace an existing EU rule, which would allow Germany to send the asylum-seekers back to the first EU state they entered. For now, the coalition agreement is still in place. But if the German government collapses, or looks to be headed that way, expect even more volatility in the euro – and by extension, more strength for the US dollar (and pain for emerging markets).

  • Affordability Crisis: Low-Income Workers Can't Afford A 2-Bedroom Rental Anywhere In America

    The National Low Income Housing Coalition’s (NLIHC) annual report, Out of Reach, reveals the striking gap between wages and the price of housing across the United States. The report’s ‘Housing Wage’ is an estimate of what a full-time worker on a state by state basis must make to afford a one or two-bedroom rental home at the Housing and Urban Development’s (HUD) fair market rent without exceeding 30 percent of income on housing expenses.

    With decades of declining wages and widening wealth inequality via the financialization of corporate America, and thanks to the Federal Reserve’s disastrous policies (whose direct outcome is the ascent of Trump), the recent insignificant countertrend in wage growth for low-income workers has not been enough to boost their standard of living.

    The report finds that a full-time minimum wage worker, or the average American stuck in the gig economy, cannot afford to rent a two-bedroom apartment anywhere in the U.S.

    According to the report, the 2018 national Housing Wage is $22.10 for a two-bedroom rental home and $17.90 for a one-bedroom rental. Across the country, the two-bedroom Housing Wage ranges from $13.84 in Arkansas to $36.13 in Hawaii.

    The five cities with the highest two-bedroom Housing Wages are Stamford-Norwalk, CT ($38.19), Honolulu, HI ($39.06), Oakland-Fremont, CA ($44.79), San Jose-Sunnyvale-Santa Clara, CA ($48.50), and San Francisco, CA ($60.02).

    For people earning minimum wage, which could be most millennials stuck in the gig economy, the situation is beyond dire. At $7.25 per hour, these hopeless souls would need to work 122 hours per week, or approximately three full-time jobs, to afford a two-bedroom rental at HUD’s fair market rent; for a one-bedroom, these individuals would need to work 99 hours per week, or hold at least two full-time jobs.

    The disturbing reality is that many will work until they die to only rent a roof over their head.

    The report warns: “in no state, metropolitan area, or county can a worker earning the federal minimum wage or prevailing state minimum wage afford a two-bedroom rental home at fair market rent by working a standard 40-hour week.”

    The quest to afford rental homes is not limited to minimum-wage workers. NLIHC calculates that the average renter’s hourly wage is $16.88. The average renter in each county across the U.S. makes enough to afford a two-bedroom in only 11 percent of counties, and a one-bedroom, in just 43% .

    FIGURE 1: States With The Largest Shortfall Between Average Renter Wage And Two-Bedroom Housing Wage

    Low wages and widespread wage inequality contribute to the widening gap between what people earn and mandatory outlays, in the price of their housing. The national Housing Wage in 2018 is $22.10 for a two-bedroom rental home and $17.90 for a one-bedroom, the report found.

    FIGURE 3: Hourly Wages By Percentile VS. One And Two-Bedroom Housing Wages 

    Here is how much it costs to rent a two-bedroom in your state:

    Case Shiller House Prices have continued to surge to bubble levels with growing demand for rental housing in the decade post the Great Recession.

    The report indicates that new rental construction has shifted toward the luxury market because it is more profitable for homebuilders. The number of rentals for $2000 or more per month has more than doubled between 2005 and 2015.

    Here are the Most Expensive Jurisdictions for Housing Wage for Two-Bedroom Rentals

    Here is how your state’s ranks regarding Housing Wage: 

    “While the housing market may have recovered for many, we are nonetheless experiencing an affordable housing crisis, especially for very low-income families,” said Bernie Sanders quoted in the report.

    The fact is, the low-wage workforce is projected to soar over the next decade, particularly in unproductive service-sector jobs and odd jobs in the gig economy, as increasingly more menial jobs are replaced by automation/robots. This is not sustainable for a fragile economy where many are heavily indebted with limited savings; this should be a warning, as many Americans do not understand their living standards are in decline. American exceptionalism is dying.

    Housing Wage And Median Wages For Occupations With Highest Projected Growth 

    The bad news is that for the government to combat the unaffordability crisis, deficits would have to explode because even more Americans would demand housing subsidies, setting the US debt on an even more unsustainable trajectory. Even though Congress marginally increased the 2018 HUD budget, the change in funding levels for some housing programs have declined.

    Changes In Funding Levels For Key HUD Programs (FY10 Enacted To F18 Enacted) 

    But wait a minute, something does not quite add up: consider President Trump’s cheerleading on Twitter calling today’s economy the “greatest economy in History of America and the best time EVER to look for a job.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He may be right, of course, if you are looking for a low skill/wage job in the gig economy as there are plenty (from which you will be promptly fired), but even if you keep it, you will not be able to cover even the cost of rent.

  • Jatras: It's Time For America To Cut Loose Our Useless So-Called "Allies"

    Authored by James George Jatras via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    US President Donald J. Trump spent the last week or so churning out initiatives that seemed deliberately calculated to set his critics’ hair on fire:

    • He met as an equal with North Korea’s Kim Jong-un – who is a very bad man!
    • He stated again his willingness to meet with Russian President Vladimir Putin – an even worse man!
    • He mocked and threatened our trading partners – and slapped tariffs on them!
    • He suggested that an impenitent Russia (a very bad country!) should be let back into the genteel company of the Group of Seven!
    • He topped everything off by suggesting that Russian-speaking Crimea should be part of – Russia!

    As summed up by vulgar Republican, Never-Trump apparatchik Rick Wilson:

    ‘After the last week, Trump is clearly a man who puts the dick in dictator. He’s a fanboy of Putin, Kim, Duterte, and a dog’s breakfast of the worst examples of oppression, thuggery, and anti-Western values the globe has to offer. [ . . . ]

    ‘[T]his week, Trump’s love of authoritarians, dictatorships and his actions and words came together.  Donald Trump first went to the G-7 to wreck the proceedings with a combination of insult-comic schtick, diplomatic demolition derby, Putin cheerleading, and giant-toddler petulance.

    ‘He followed that with the Singapore Shitshow. It was a monstrous reality TV event, as was intended. But it left our putative allies wondering at the new Axis of Assholes Trump has joined—the CRANK: China, Russia, America and North Korea. By the end, it didn’t feel like he was after denuclearization but management tips from the portly little thug Kim.

    ‘For the American president to normalize, excuse, and ally himself with the worst of the world’s bad actors while insulting, degrading, and destroying our allies and alliances would be appalling in any circumstance. The fact that Trump acts like a bumbling, eager fraternity pledge, desperate to join Phi Sigma Dictator makes it all the worse.’

    For the moment, let’s put aside Trump’s alleged sympathy for authoritarianism and focus on the accusation that Trump is “insulting, degrading, and destroying our allies and alliances,” a view held across the Establishment spectrum, from neoconservatives like Max Boot to far-Left Democratic California Congresswoman Maxine Waters (famed for her concern about Russian aggression in nonexistent Limpopo). How dare Trump threaten such valuable relationships!

    Except these so-called ‘allies and alliances’ aren’t valuable to the United States. They’re a positive danger and a detriment.

    Let’s get one thing straight: the United States has no real allies. There are countries we dominate and control, more properly termed client states or even satellites. (True, given Israel’s and Saudi Arabia’s lock-stock-and-barrel ownership of the American political class, it seems rather that we are their clients, not the other way around…) Conversely, on an almost one-to-one correspondence, countries that are not satellites are our enemies, either currently (Russia, North Korea, Iran, Syria) or prospectively (China).

    But do we have any actual allies – that is, countries that provide mutual security for the United States, and whose contributions actually make us Americans safer and more secure in our own country?

    Try to name one.

    Let’s start with the granddaddy of our alliances, NATO. How does having a mutual defense pact with, say, virulently anti-Russian Poland and the Baltic States make America more secure? How does, say, tiny corrupt Montenegro, contribute to US security? Are these countries going to defend America in any conceivable way? Even if they wanted to, how could they possibly?

    For that matter, against what ‘threat’ would they defend us? Is Latvia going to help build Trump’s Wall on the Mexican border?

    ‘Our NATO allies help out in Afghanistan,’ we are told.  NATO-Schmato – it’s Americans who do almost all the fighting and dying. It’s our treasure being wasted there. Maybe without the fig leaf of an alliance mission, we might long since have reevaluated what we still are doing there after 17 years.

    But comes the answer, ‘Russia!’ Except that Russia isn’t a threat to the United States. Despite their hype even the most antagonistic Russophobic countries in NATO themselves don’t really believe they’re about to be invaded. And even if they were, that still doesn’t make Russia a threat to us – or wouldn’t except for the very existence of NATO and a forward American presence on Russia’s borders and in the Black and Baltic seas littorals. How does gratuitously risking conflict with the one country on the planet whose strategic arsenal can annihilate us make Americans safer?

    As Professor Richard Sakwa has observed, ‘NATO exists to manage the risks created by its existence.’

    Let’s look at other supposedly valuable alliances.

    Why do we need South Korea and Japan? ‘China!’ But except for a nuclear stockpile much smaller than our intercontinental deterrent China doesn’t present a military threat to us. ‘Yes, but Beijing poses a danger to South Korea and Japan.’ Maybe, maybe not. But even if that is so why is it our problem?

    Why do we need Israel, Saudi Arabia, UAE, and bunch of other Middle Eastern countries? We aren’t dependent on energy from the region as we arguably were when Jimmy Carter proclaimed a vital national interest there four decades ago. ‘Well then, Iran!’ But the Iranians can’t do anything to us. ‘Yes, but they hate Israel, Saudi Arabia, etc., etc.’ Again, what’s that got to do with us?

    In each case the argument of a US interest is a tautology.

    The US ‘needs’ allies for the sole purpose of defense against purported threats not to us but to those very same allies. It’s a self-licking ice cream cone.

    It would be bad enough if these faux alliance relationships were only detrimental in terms of getting embroiled in quarrels in which we have no interest, wasting money and manpower in areas of the world where our security is not at stake. But there’s also a direct economic cost right here at home.

    Based on the claimed need for “allies” US trade policy since World War II could almost have been designed to undermine the economic interests of American workers and American producers. Starting with Germany and Japan, our defeated enemies, we offered them virtually tariff-free, nonreciprocal access to our huge domestic market to assist with their economies’ recovery from wartime destruction; in return, we would take their sovereignty: control of their foreign and security policies, as well as their military and intelligence establishments, plus permanent bases on their territory.

    This arrangement became the standard with other countries in non-communist Europe, as well as some in the Far East, notably South Korea. As much or more than puffed-up claims of military threats (and companies that benefit from inflated military spending) lopsided trade is the glue that keeps the satellites in place. In effect, our “allies” cede geostrategic control of their own countries and are rewarded at the expense of domestic American economic interests. Already of questionable value in its heyday, this pattern not only survived the end of Cold War 1 but continued to grow, contributing to the rise of Cold War 2.

    Put into that context, this is where Trump’s tariffs dovetail with his other blasphemies, like expecting the deadbeats to pony up for their own defense. He challenges them to reduce tariffs and barriers to zero on a reciprocal bilateral basis – knowing full well they won’t do so because it would spoil their cozy arrangement at the expense of American workers. He threatens the sanctity of the North Atlantic Treaty’s vaunted Article 5 obligation of mutual defense on whether countries meet a two percent of GDP level of military spending – knowing that few of them will since they don’t in fact face any external military threat and would rather keep the money.

    In his own unvarnished, zigzaggy way, Trump is doing what he said he would: putting America and Americans first. As he has said, that does not mean hostility towards other countries, whose leaders have aduty to put their countries and peoples first as well. It means both stopping our allies’ sandbagging us, while restoring to them their unsought-for – and for many of them, undesirable – sovereignty and independence.

    In the final analysis, what the likes of Rick Wilson are really afraid of is disruption of a decades-old, crooked racket that has been so lucrative for countless hangers-on and profiteers. As James P. Pinkerton, former aide to Ronald Reagan and George H.W. Bush, describes it:

    ‘[T]he basic geopolitical foundations of the last seven decades are being challenged and shifted – or, as critics would prefer to say, being subverted and betrayed. Yet in the meantime, even as his myriad foes prepare their next political, legal, and punditical attacks, Trump is the man astride the world stage, smiling, shaking hands, signing deals – and unmistakably remaking the old order.

    Let’s get on with it.

  • Epidemic Of New York Cab Driver Suicides Continues With 6th Death Since November

    It looks as though Uber’s skirting of taxi medallion regulations has once again unfortunately claimed the life of a New York taxi cab driver. In what can only be described as the latest in an epidemic of suicides by cab drivers in New York, the Post reported over the weekend that Abdul Saleh, a 59 year old cabbie, hanged himself in his Brooklyn apartment.

    Like many other New York taxi cab drivers, Saleh was having trouble paying for the cost of his medallion – the value of which has likely collapsed in recent years. His business partner, who had reportedly ditched him to drive for Uber, stated that though he had been short in his weekly medallion payments in the past, one of his latest payments fell much shorter than the others. The New York Post reported:

    Saleh drove a yellow cab for 30 years, Chaudhary, 36, said.

    Chaudhary said that they leased a taxi and medallion together, splitting the night and day shifts, but that within the past several months, Saleh couldn’t make the weekly lease payment.

    Saleh — whom Chaudhary described as single but with family in his native Yemen — sometimes would be short by as little as $60, but for the last payment, he was $300 short.

    The article continued, stating that Saleh was recently depressed and noting that many cab drivers have seen their retirement plans go up in smoke as a result of Uber:

    Making finances even tighter, Chaudhary began driving for Uber, leaving Saleh without a partner.

    Chaudhary said he last spoke to Saleh three or four days ago.

    “He sounded upset and depressed,” Chaudhary recalled. “He said he didn’t feel good.”

    “I know he wasn’t making enough money to pay his lease,” he said. “He was short here and there, and I used to have to help him out. He said he didn’t know how to survive.”

    New York Taxi Workers Alliance director Bhairavi Desai lamented the plight of Saleh and others facing rising competition from ride-hailing services.

    “These drivers can no longer see retirement in sight and can’t imagine continuing to work such a grueling job until their last day on earth,” she said.

    As the Post stated, this is only the most recent of such incidents. Alarmingly, it is the sixth such suicide by a New York taxi driver since November. It is becoming an epidemic.

    In the past eight months, five other cab and livery drivers have killed themselves in the face of financial strain.

    In May, cabby Yu Mein “Kenny” Chow flung himself in the East River off the Upper East Side.

    In March, cabby Nicanor Ochisor, 65, hanged himself in his garage in Maspeth, Queens.

    In the most dramatic case, livery driver Douglas Schifter killed himself with a shotgun outside City Hall on Feb. 5.

    He left a Facebook post reading, “I don’t know how else to make a difference other than a public display of a most private affair.”

    It was only 2 weeks ago when we reported about the last NY cab driver suicide.

    May saw the fifth NYC taxi driver commit suicide in five months, an alarming trend which is gaining momentum. Yu Mein Chow, a 56-year-old immigrant, living in Queens, was found dead in late May, floating down the East River near the Brooklyn Bridge.

    Seven years ago, Chow financed a $700,000 taxi medallion that allowed him to operate a cab throughout the city. Shortly after, he realized with the introduction of ridesharing apps that his ability to service the debt was unsustainable; only instead of declaring bankruptcy, he chose to end his life.

    For some time we have followed the unusual developments of taxi driver suicides throughout New York City, as the dark side of the ‘gig economy’ rears its ugly head, consuming these financially vulnerable folks who have become massively overleveraged through poor financial decision-making in a time of pervasive money-losing alternatives.

    Saleh is just another example of the turmoil created by an unlevel playing field. While taxi cab drivers still have strict medallion rules that they must uphold and while the prices of their medallions have dropped significantly in value, Uber continues to exploit the fact that it is beholden to limited regulation. With both cab drivers and Uber drivers performing the same service, but with meaningfully different regulations, instances like this could unfortunately continue. 

  • The 4 Stages Of The Collapse Of Venezuela

    Authored by J.G. Martinez D. via The Organic Prepper blog,

    When looking back at the collapse of Venezuela, I see that nothing there happened which was new.

    As many other countries that have experienced similar circumstances can attest, we went through 4 stages of collapse.

    Stage 1 – The Exile

    The first stage was the exile, voluntary for those outstanding opposition members of the political world, and that could foresee and feel the first impacts of the delinquent mafia.

    These are politicians that understood exactly what the taking over the Supreme Court in 2015 was about: a seizing and power consolidation upon the occupation of the Justice system, subordinated to the President figure. This would block any further attempt of judging the politicians of the Socialist Party, and anyone who collaborate with them, no matter the crimes committed.

    It is very likely that they had first-hand information, and they knew what was about to come. They tried to warn what was coming up to the entire population. Some still do it, like Pablo Aure, or the journalist Braulio Jatar (prisoner at home and can´t make public statements) and the journalist Tamara Suju, and they received the first threats, the first incarcerations, and even political participation prohibitions were given. Possible opposition candidates like Leopoldo Lopez and Capriles are no longer an option: they were totally sold and corrupted. (Capriles received money from Odebrecht bribes, according to the CEOs statements)

    Stage 2 – The Upper Middle-Class Migration

    The second stage was the upper-middle-class migration.

    Those professionals who could slowly see their life quality diminishing, and albeit having their properties and extended families, decided to flee away. Given the good level of education (many of them with 4thlevel studies) they could go through the process without too much of a struggle.

    After all, this has happened in a lot of countries, and we were not the exception. Fortunately, the free college education (something that differentiated Venezuela from other countries in South America) allowed access to third level studies to those who really appreciated them, and with the needed financial capability and endurance to finish them and become professionals (usually with help of the entire family).

    A lot of medicine, healthcare, engineering, and law professionals come from the lower middle class, just like myself and almost my entire extended family. There are a lot of stories about the grandma having to sell “arepas” in the streets, or cleaning houses and offices, just so their sons and daughters could become factory laborers or medium level technicians, and their descendants could become MDs, lawyers, and engineers.

    The oil revenues, invested in good education in the 80s and 90s decades was one of our strengths. However (remember the so-called “Cultural Revolution in China”?) after the leftist wing took over the country, this changed drastically. The resources for universities and state-sponsored educational institutions were cut off. The salaries for the education professionals are a joke, as are most of the salaries of the working class.

    The implantation of the leftist doctrine in the army educational institutions permeated and undermined the republican education, allowing a “revolutionary” influence that has resulted extremely toxic for the moral and ethical values that our armed forces once had. The respect for our Constitution no longer exists, neither, in the Army. In the name of the so-called “Revolution” that no longer exists but in the shallow, empty words that compose the increasingly weaker, arrogant (and now desperate) speeches of the mafia expositors, our Constitution has been stepped on, torn, and violated an overwhelming number of times.

    The dissidents, like me, that once realized where this was really going, are now the majorities, and these are being subjugated by hunger and disease. Most of the military officers are now under a strict surveillance by the intelligence organizations, and perhaps some others that we don´t even know.

    The disassembly of the antique republican army structure is already complete, with young, illiterate officers with medium-high ranks but without any formal instruction to deserve them, and total impunity. Ranks are for providing “authority”, getting throughout posts without being checked, and imprisoning people without a court order. And of course, this is illegal, but they do it anyway. Before Hugo´s mess, send someone to prison was not so easy. These days, people have been in jail just for tweeting how p***d off they are with the mafia. This can be verified in the social networks such as Twitter and Facebook.

    It was not my intention to write a merely political article, but here it goes. The consequences of this political mess is what has kicked us out of our country.

    Stage 3 – Seizing Private Property

    This is incredibly painful for me, as the third stage seems to be starting: taking the private properties off the hands of the unarmed owners. In Villa Rosmini, Maracaibo city, Zulia state they demolished the gate of a subdivision with a payloader when the neighbors refused to allow in the police and the thugs.

    There was not even one shot at the “authorities” destroying private property: they were there protecting to the operator of the payloader.

    They are going to “assign” the empty homes to Colectivos gangs, and they are going to be spying for the government and collecting information about the neighbors.

    Stage 4 – Locking Up Dissidents

    It is the third stage, collecting information for the communist mafia that will propel the next. When they go home after home in the 4th stage, they will prepare concentration camps for the dissidents, as it already happened in Russia and China.

    I knew this was going to happen, after witnessing Uncle Hugo seizing buildings in the center of Caracas, to “assign” them “to the poor”, whoever these guys were (We hurried up to get our passports shortly after that, just in case, go figure).

    Many people laughed at me. Now they don’t. Especially those who could not leave the country.

    I can’t believe I am writing about this right now. But I do know that sometimes the reality overcomes our wildest fantasies. Albeit I have never been a very religious man I can’t avoid to notice His intervention in my life, and I truly give thanks every day for all my blessings.

    Venezuela is a failed state

    It has started slowly, but the paint on the wall is there, fresh and dripping all over the place. The mafia has made of the State a failed one, has looted our national wealth, imprisoning those who opposed to this with violence and generated a constant terror in the citizens. This is a technique carefully used in those left (and Nazis) totalitarian governments, with a modern twist, if you want.

    International sanctions work against them, to a certain degree. But this is not enough. Destroying a gate with a payloader just because the neighbors don’t want their subdivision filled up with thugs, living next to their kids and elders…that is a very different fur of an animal. This is a total lack of respect for properties and people. This deserves to be punished, and very severely. It is an open intimidation.

    It is a crime against our Constitution and the rights that once were guaranteed by it.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 16th June 2018

  • Splitting California Into 3 Pieces Is Long Overdue

    As we detailed earlier, it now looks like California voters will have the chance to vote on whether or not the state ought to be split up into three pieces.

    The Los AngelesTimes reports :

    If a majority of voters who cast ballots agree, a long and contentious process would begin for three separate states to take the place of California, with one primarily centered around Los Angeles and the other two divvying up the counties to the north and south.

    As Ryan McMaken, via The Mises Institute, notes, this latest move is just one of many efforts over many decades to split California up, and make its constituent parts more responsive to the people who live there. This effort, however, is more successful than past ones — for example, the 2016 proposed ballot measure breaking up California into six states. That one failed to qualify for the ballot.

    To say the least, breaking up California into smaller pieces is something that is long overdue. The population of California is a massive 39 million, making it larger than either Canada or Peru. And the GDP produced by that state is enormous as well. If California were an independent country, it would have an economy larger than that of the United Kingdom.

    This means the California government – which can (and does) skim off substantial portions of that wealth – is among the richest governments in the world.

    Moreover, the government holds a monopoly of power over a vast area which includes some of the best real estate in the world. Much of North America’s best coastlines, mountains, natural harbors, forests, and mountains are contained within California.

    And, here’s one of the best things about being a huge state (from the government’s perspective): the government can make it extremely inconvenient to escape it: “You don’t like our policies? Well, then, feel free to move hundreds of miles away to Phoenix or Reno.”

    It’s no wonder then, that the government of California has been able to abuse its taxpayers so freely. California has one of the highest tax burdens in the nation, and many leave the state because of it. More and more, the state is become a playground for the wealthy who have enough of a surplus to endure what ordinary people cannot. Thanks to endless regulations on development via environmental regulations and other measures, housing supply has been artificially limited, and thus the cost of housing in California has skyrocketed. This has led to a situation in which, as the Sacramento Bee put it “California exports its poor to Texas… while wealthier people move in.” But California apparently isn’t exporting all its poor — the state has the worst poverty rate in the nation when the cost of living is taken into account.

    And yet, the opponents of the new “Three Californias” ballot measure will surely be telling us that the status quo is perfectly fine. We’ll be told that the political establishment in Sacramento ought not be punished for decades of mismanagement, and that it would be too “extreme” to separate hard-left northern California from the more politically moderate areas of the south and east.

    A State Divided

    Indeed, the state isn’t nearly as united in its love of the dominant political agenda as we’re supposed to believe. As recently, as 2008, the vote on the same-sex marriage measure Proposition 8 illustrated some meaningful divisions in the state. Opposition to the measure (i.e., support for gay marriage) enjoyed a majority only in the northern parts of the state and along the central coast. A majority of voters in the south supported the measure, and even a majority in Los Angeles County voted for the measure. Whatever one’s opinion on the subject of marriage, the vote reiterated what has long been known: what we regard as “progressive California” has long been pushed primarily by Californians centered around the Bay Area and Silicon valley. While it would be silly to call Southern California a bastion of right-wing thinking, that fact is that Southern California is less about Hollywood than it is about miles upon endless miles of suburban neighborhoods filled with middle class people who have better things to do than push for Dianne Feinstein’s latest political hobbyhorse. A middle-class insurance worker in an unglamorous LA suburb with three kids has precious little in common with a pair of Princeton-educated Silicon Valley workers who live a dual-income-no-kids lifestyle, and who bring to the state the “enlightened” views we’ve come to expect from upper-middle-class suburbanites with expensive designer college degrees.

    Moreover, this latter group has been increasingly growing as the influential majority both in terms of population, and in the wealth and resources it can bring to the political game.

    So, it’s hard to not be sympathetic to Californians who might be happy to break free of the current political stranglehold and perhaps embrace a smaller, more flexible political community that might be slightly more responsive to local taxpayers and citizens.

    California is the Poster Child for Un-Responsive Government

    And it’s easy to see why many Californians might regard their political system as un-responsive to their particular personal and regional needs: California has, by far, the most unrepresentative state government in the United States.

    For every state legislator, there are more than 310,000 California residents. Second-place Texas, with 139,000 residents per legislator, doesn’t come close. These numbers aren’t even in the same league, though, with quite a few other states — including especially safe, wealthy, and healthy ones — like Minnesota, Utah, and Massachusetts. Those states have 1 legislator for every 23,600; 23,500; and 33,000 residents, respectively.

    This is what passes for political representation in California’s government.

    As Gerard Casey has pointed out, the very concept of political representation is built on a pretty shaky foundation as is. It’s implausible enough to claim that one person can truly represent the interests of 50 or 100 other people. But 20,000 people spread out over numerous communities, geographies and ethnic groups?

    In some circumstances involving fairly uniform populations, even that might be something many people could swallow. But 100,000 people? 3000,000? That mere suggestion of such a thing should be regarded as laughable. And yet that is the foundation on which California’s “democracy” is based. Its government, politically speaking, relies on the acceptance of the idea that the state’s legislature of 120 people can “represent” 39 million people spread across 163,000 square miles. 

    In practice, however, this idea is totally implausible, and the practical downsides are numerous as well.1 With such an unrepresentative scheme:

    • Large constituencies increase the cost of running campaigns, and thus require greater reliance on large wealthy interests for media buys and access to mass media. The cost of running a statewide campaign in California, for example, is considerably larger than the cost of running a statewide campaign in Vermont. Constituencies spread across several media markets are especially costly.

    • Elected officials, unable to engage a sizable portion of their constituencies rely on large interest groups claiming to be representative of constituents.

    • Voters disengage because they realize their vote is worth less in larger constituent groups.

    • Voters disengage because they are not able to meet the candidate personally.

    • Voters disengage because elections in larger constituencies are less likely to focus on issues that are of personal, local interest to many of the voters.

    • The ability to schedule a personal meeting with an elected official is far more difficult in a large constituency than a small one.

    • Elected officials recognize that a single voter is of minimal importance in a large constituency, so candidates prefer to rely on mass media rather than personal interaction with voters.

    • Larger constituent groups are more religiously, ethnically, culturally, ideologically, and economically diverse. This means elected officials from that constituent group are less likely to share social class, ethnic group, and other characteristics with a sizable number of their constituents.

    • Larger constituencies often mean the candidate is more physically remote, even when the candidate is at “home” and not at a distant parliament or congress. This further reduces access.

    California epitomizes all of this. And it’s even worse when we consider the California’s Congressional delegation. For each US Senator in California, there are 19 million Californians. How much do you suppose a Californian’s single vote is worth to each senator? Approximately zero. (In California, each Congressional district, by the way, contains more than 600,000 residents for each member.)

    So, when we consider California’s enormous size, coupled with its tiny political class, it’s easy to see that political decision making occurs within a tiny, distant, and remote minority well insulated from the lives of ordinary people.

    This is true most places, of course, but California takes this reality to an extreme.

    The Benefits of Splitting up the State

    While it certainly not a panacea, splitting up California into smaller pieces would be a step in the right direction for many reasons.

    First of all, it would provide more options and choice to people living in California right now. Most Californians no doubt consider themselves to be “pro-choice” people. So why not embrace more “choice” among political regimes along the West Coast. With three Californias, current residents would more easily be able to relocate to a state that better fits their personal needs, without having to relocated hundreds of miles away. As its currently proposed, a resident of Los Angeles County who seeks to change the state government he lives under may relocate to Orange County. This isn’t totally convenient, of course, but it’s certainly more convenient and less disruptive than having to move to Tucson or Dallas or Denver.

    Decentralization has also often been shown to increase efforts to attract wealth and capital to each jurisdiction. This in turn limits the extent to which governments are willing to raise taxes and crush business with burdensome regulations. This, after all, is the model that has been working moderately well in Switzerland for centuries.

    And finally, splitting up the state would help put a dent in California’s utterly unrepresentative and unaccountable political class.

    Even after the split-up, the three Californias would still each be among the largest states in the US — and that would still come with all the problems with noted above. But, it’s a place to start.

    Moreover, there’s no reason each new California would have to adopt the model of a tiny 120-member legislature as “Old California” does now. Those who are unreasonably attached to the status quo would no doubt object to a 400-person House of Representatives as tiny New Hampshire has now. But even with a 200-person House, as Pennsylvania has , for each of the new Californias — each with approximately 13 million people — the state’s power would become a little less centralized, a little less insulated, a little less lofty.

    For More:

  • 'The Rampage' – Israeli Supersonic Missile Built To Destroy High-Quality Targets In Iran And Syria

    Israeli Military Industries Systems (IMI Systems) and Israel Aerospace Industries, revealed a new air-launched, GPS-guided, supersonic missile called Rampage — that can hit high-quality targets more than 90-miles away.

    The missile can be mounted to the Israel Air Force’s McDonnell Douglas F-15 Eagle, General Dynamics F-16 Fighting Falcon, and Lockheed Martin F-35 Lightning II with capabilities to launch the supersonic missile outside the enemy’s detection and interception systems.

    The two Israeli state-run defense companies officially unveiled the new missile in a press release on June 11.

    According to the release, the supersonic missile was produced in response to a clear operational need of the ever so expanding modern battlefield, as the “counter weapon,” against new, rapidly emerging complex air defense environments in Iran and neighboring Syria. In other words, Iran and Syria are deploying new missile shields that could render the Israeli Air Force’s (IAF) aircraft inoperable in specific regions.

    In the past 12 to 18 months, both defense firms have jointly tested Rampage with the IAF and have shown the missile is fully operational.

    The missile is expected to head into series production and will be available for sale in 2019. The IAF is expected to purchase the rocket “to improve its surgical high-precision strikes with minimum collateral damage,” said Israel’s Ynet News.

    A video presentation shows a combination of an IAF F-16 air launching Rampage coupled with computer graphic scenes showing the missile striking enemy targets.

    “Sending four fighter jets carrying four Rampage missiles [each] allows us to strike under conditions we’ve never had before,” Eli Reiter, head of IMI Systems’ Firepower Division, told Ynet.

    “IMI Systems and IAI are proud to unveil a response to the challenges of modern battlefields. The Rampage joins a family of accurate rockets, which we have been providing to advanced militaries for years. Rampage complements the air response with a quantum leap in performance and extraordinary cost-effectiveness ratio, two factors which are important to many air forces around the world,” Reiter said in the company’s press release.

    Boaz Levy, general manager and executive VP of IAI’s Rockets and Space Group, told Ynet that the supersonic missile’s cost is approximately one-third of the price of similar missiles being sold on the global defense market.

    Rampage air-to-surface missile developed by Israel’s IMS, IAI. (Source: IMI Systems)

    The missile’s warhead will be guided by GPS-assisted inertial navigation system (INS) guidance package to hit enemy targets, which will allow the warhead to strike its target during the day/night and in any weather condition.

    IMI Systems told Ynet that the missile could repel an electronic warfare attack, the company added, “additional algorithm-based navigation system as a backup will give the missile immunity.”

    At the beginning of 2018, Syrian anti-aircraft missiles downed an IAF’s F-16 returning from a bombing campaign on Iran-backed positions in Syria.

    Confirmed photographs of the F-16 crash site in Northern Israel, which is reported to be 20-30km from the Syrian border. 

    Israeli security forces walk next to the remains of the downed F-16 Israeli war plane near the Israeli village of Harduf, Israel. February 10, 2018. Image (source: Reuters)

    While the winds of war appear unavoidable in Iran and or Syria, the IAF’s need for precision-guided supersonic missiles with long-range capabilities is essential before the next major conflict erupts. Otherwise, the emerging threat of high-tech Iranian/Syrian missile shields could pose a significant threat for the IAF.

  • FBI Agents Called Hillary "President" While Investigating Her, Texted "Screw You Trump" On Election Day

    One of four FBI agents investigating Hillary Clinton’s email server – not Peter Strzok or Lisa Page, referred to Clinton as “the President” in a text exchange with another FBI employee four days after interviewing the Democratic candidate, according to Thursday’s DOJ Inspector General report.

    Then, in a different text exchange with one of the other three Clinton email investigators (not Peter Strzok or Lisa Page), another agent wrote “screw you trump” after the first agent admitted “You should know…that I’m…with her.” 

    Those FBI investigators were dating at the time and were later married, meaning all four FBI case agents working the Hillary Clinton email investigation – the other two being Peter Strzok and Lisa Page – were ardent Clinton supporters, and at least three harbored animus towards Trump. 

    The report released yesterday by the inspector general for the Department of Justice referred to these two FBI agents not by their names but as “Agent 1” and “Agent 5.”

    The report said of these FBI agents that “we identified two instant message exchanges that appeared to combine a discussion of politics with the Midyear investigation.” (The FBI referred to the Clinton email investigation as “Midyear Exam,” “Midyear,” or “MYE.”) –CNS News

    The same agent who texted “screw you trump” – “Agent 5” – also wrote “she better win… otherwise i’m gonna be walking around with both of my guns… and likely quitting on the spot,” as well as “fuck trump” on December 6. 

    Clinton was interviewed by FBI agents on July 2 about her use of a private, unsecured email server which housed classified information while she was Secretary of State. According to the IG report, however, the FBI had already decided against recommending prosecution unless Clinton lied or confessed

    By the time of Clinton’s interview on July 2, we found that the Midyear agents and prosecutors, along with Comey, had decided that absent a confession or false statements by Clinton, the investigation would be closed without charges,” reads the IG report.

    James Comey announced that the FBI would not recommend charges against Clinton three days later despite “evidence of potential violations of statutes.”

    “Although there is evidence of potential violations of the statutes regarding the handling of classified information, our judgment is that no reasonable prosecutor would bring such a case,” he said.

    At the same time, Comey thanked FBI personnel for what he called their “remarkable work” on the Clinton case and said that Americans would better understand how “proud” he was of these FBI agents when they had a “better sense” of the work they had done on the Clinton case. –CNS News

    “I want to start by thanking the FBI employees who did remarkable work in this case,” Comey said. “Once you have a better sense of how much we have done, you will understand why I am so grateful and proud of their efforts.”

    Just remember, the Obama administration was “scandal free,” and according to the DOJ, after investigating itself, there was no evidence that any of the overt and well documented bias harbored by agents crept into the Hillary Clinton email investigation

  • Pepe Escobar: This Is The Key Word In The Trump-Kim Show

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    By reaffirming the Panmunjom Declaration, the US President has committed to bringing its military back from South Korea and thus a complete denuclearization of the South as well as the North…

    The Trump-Kim geopolitical reality-TV show – surreal for some – offered unparalleled entries to the annals of international diplomacy. It will be tough to upstage the US President pulling an iPad and showing Kim Jong-un the cheesy trailer of a straight-to-video 1980s B-grade action movie – complete with a Sylvester Stallone cameo – casting the two leaders as heroes destined to save the world’s 7 billion people.

    Away from the TV, the former “Rocket Man”, now respectfully recast in Trump terminology as “Chairman Kim”, did strike a formidable coup by completely erasing the dreaded acronym CVID – or “complete, verifiable, irreversible denuclearization” – from the final text of the Singapore joint statement.

    Throughout the pre-summit negotiations, the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (DPRK) had always stressed an “action-for-action” strategy leading to denuclearization, as in Pyongyang being compensated every step of the way instead of waiting until after complete denuclearization – a process that could last over a decade – to be eligible for economic benefits.

    The Singapore joint statement enshrines exactly what the Russia-China strategic partnership – formalized in the recent Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) summit – was suggesting from the beginning: a double freeze.

    The DPRK holds off on any new nuclear and missile tests while the US and South Korea stop the “war games” (Trump’s terminology).

    This logical sequence of the Sino-Russian roadmap is based on what South Korean President Moon Jae-in agreed with Kim Jong-un at the inter-Korean summit last April. And that ties in with what North Korea, South Korea and Russia had already discussed at the Far East summit in Vladivostok last September, as Asia Times reported; economic integration between Russia and the two Koreas, including the crucial connectivity of a future Trans-Korean railway with the Trans-Siberian.

    Once again, this is all about Eurasia integration; increased trade between North Korea and Northeast China, concerning mostly Liaoning, Jilin and Heilongjiang provinces; and total, physical connectivity of both Koreas to the Eurasian heartland.

    That’s yet another instance of the New Silk Roads, or Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) meeting the Eurasia Economic Union (EAEU). And not by accident South Korea wants to connect deeper with both BRI and the EAEU. 

    When in doubt, re-read Panmunjom

    The Singapore joint statement is not a deal; it’s a statement.

    The absolutely key item is number 3: “Reaffirming the April 27, 2018, Panmunjom Declaration, the DPRK commits to work toward the complete denuclearization of the Korean Peninsula.”

    This means that the US and North Korea will work towards denuclearization not only in what concerns the DPRK but the whole Korean Peninsula.

    Much more than “…the DPRK commits to work toward the complete denuclearization of the Korean Peninsula”, the keywords are in fact    “reaffirming the April 27, 2018, Panmunjom Declaration…”  

    Even before Singapore, everyone knew the DPRK would not “de-nuke” (Trump terminology) for nothing, especially when promised just some vague US “guarantees”.

    Predictably, both US neocon and humanitarian imperialist factions are unanimous in their fury, blasting the absence of “meat” in the joint statement. In fact there’s plenty of meat. Singapore reaffirms the Panmunjom Declaration, which is a deal between North Korea and South Korea.

    By signing the Singapore joint statement, Washington has been put on notice of the Panmunjom Declaration. In law, when you take notice of a fact, you can’t ignore it later. The DPRK’s commitment to denuclearize in the Singapore statement is a reaffirmation of its commitment to denuclearize in the Panmunjom Declaration, with all of the conditions attached to it. And Trump acknowledged that by signing the Singapore statement.

    The Panmunjom Declaration stresses that:

    “South and North Korea confirmed the common goal of realizing, through complete denuclearization, a nuclear-free Korean Peninsula. South and North Korea shared the view that the measures being initiated by North Korea are very meaningful and crucial for the denuclearization of the Korean peninsula and agreed to carry out their respective roles and responsibilities in this regard. South and North Korea agreed to actively seek the support and cooperation of the international community for the denuclearization of the Korean Peninsula.”

    That’s the commitment. “International community”, as everyone knows, is code for the US as The Great Decider. If Washington does not bring back its military from South Korea, there will be no denuclearization. Essentially, that’s the deal discussed between Kim and President Xi Jinping in their two crucial, pre-Singapore meetings. Get the US out of the peninsula, and we have your back. 

    So all focus should be on “reaffirming”, the key word in the Singapore joint statement. 

  • Plunging Manhattan Rents Are Helping New Yorkers Afford Larger Apartments

    Retail and consumer rents in Manhattan have been doing something unusual in recent years: They’ve been moving lower. And that’s helping renters think about reaching for that most important commodity among Manhattan’s rental community: More space.

    Manhattan

    As Bloomberg reports, Manhattan rental units with three or more bedrooms accounted for 12.2% of new leases in May, the largest share since Douglas Elliman Real Estate started tracking the data in 2011. Excluding renewals, renters signed leases for 767 apartments in this category – a 20% increase from a year earlier. Meanwhile, the median rent for these homes fell 5.8% from a year earlier to an average of $5,650. By comparison, rental rates for two-bedroom units dropped 4.6% to $4,295, while rents for one-bedrooms moved ever-so-slightly higher, climbing 0.3% to a median of $3,459.

    Manhattan

    With such massive discounts, and a glut of high-end apartments, it might make more sense to trade up to a bigger rental rather than buy, according to Hal Gavzie, Douglas Elliman’s executive manager of leasing. Because, for the first time in years, Manhattan has become a renter’s market.

    “We’re getting more people who were in the sales market and just haven’t pulled the trigger” on a purchase, he said. “They’re seeing that it’s a renters’ market, and maybe they’re just looking for that deal.”

    Of course, renters who are hunting for the best deal should look toward the outerboroughs like Queens, where landlords are making massive concessions to keep tenants on as a supply glut worsens. This has caused rents to drop by a massive 12% YOY. Beyond renters, small retailers hoping to sell their wares in downtown Manhattan are also finding incredibly favorable conditions as companies looking to sublease their storefronts are undercutting their own landlords. The result has turned lower Manhattan into a “shopping wasteland.”

    In what was an epic exercise in seeing the glass half full, Jared Epstein, vice president of Aurora Capital Associates, told Forbes that the drop in rents in retail districts like Soho could lead to a revitalization.

    “It’s going to bring SoHo back,” he said. Still, the property owners are suffering with a serious pullback, as rents have fallen nearly 30% in some parts of the neighborhood, like on Broadway between Houston and Broome Streets. But regardless of the broader trends, after years of inexorable rent increases, it seems like retailers and consumers just need a break.

  • OIG Report On FBI/Clinton Shows Secrecy Threatens Democracy

    Authored by James Bovard, op-ed via USAToday.com,

    The 500-page inspector general’s report released Thursday reveals how unjustified secrecy and poor decisions helped ravage the credibility of both Hillary Clinton’s presidential campaign and the FBI…

    Yesterday’s Inspector General report on the FBI’s investigation of Hillary Clinton contained plenty of bombshells, including a promise by lead FBI investigator Peter Strzok that “We’ll stop” Donald Trump from becoming president. The report reveals how unjustified secrecy and squirrelly decisions helped ravage the credibility of both Hillary Clinton’s presidential campaign and the FBI. But few commentators are recognizing the vast peril to democracy posed by the sweeping prerogatives of federal agencies.

    The FBI’s investigation of Clinton was spurred by her decision to set up a private server to handle her email during her four years as secretary of state. The server in her Chappaqua, N.Y. mansion was insecure and exposed emails with classified information to detection by foreign sources and others.

    Clinton effectively exempted herself from the federal Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). The State Department ignored 17 FOIA requests for her emails prior to 2014 and insisted it required 75 years to disclose emails of Clinton’s top aides. A federal judge and the State Department inspector general slammed the FOIA stonewalling.

    Clinton’s private email server was not publicly disclosed until she received a congressional subpoena in 2015. A few months later, the FBI Counterintelligence Division opened a criminal investigation of the “potential unauthorized storage of classified information on an unauthorized system.”

    The IG report gives the impression that the FBI treated Hillary Clinton and her coterie like royalty — or at least like personages worthy of endless deference. When Bleachbit software or hammers were used to destroy email evidence under congressional subpoena, the FBI treated it as a harmless error. The IG report “questioned whether the use of a subpoena or search warrant might have encouraged Clinton, her lawyers … or others to search harder for the missing devices [containing email], or ensured that they were being honest that they could not find them.” Instead, FBI agents worked on “rapport building” with Clinton aides.

    Indictment justified

    FBI investigators shrugged off brazen deceit. An unnamed FBI agent on the case responded to a fellow FBI agent who asked how an interview went with a witness who worked with the Clintons at their Chappaqua residence: “Awesome. Lied his a__ off. Went from never inside the scif [sensitive compartmented information facility] at res [residence], to looked in when it was being constructed, to removed the trash twice, to troubleshot the secure fax with HRC a couple times, to everytime there was a secure fax i did it with HRC. Ridic.” When his colleague replied that “would be funny if he was the only guy charged n this deal,” he replied, “aint noone gonna do s___” as far as filing charges. 

    Perhaps the most frequent phrase in the IG report is “According to the FD-302 …”  This refers to the memo an FBI agent writes after interviewing targets or witnesses in an investigation. Relying on Form 302s (instead of recordings interviews) maximizes the discretion of FBI officials, allowing them to frame issues or create a narrative or buttress charges of lying to a federal agent.

    The FBI waited until the end of the investigation to interview Clinton and had decided to absolve her “absent a confession from Clinton,” the IG report noted. There was no recording and no transcript; instead, a 302 report allowed FBI Director James Comey to proceed with the preordained “not guilty” finding. Clinton had received numerous classified emails (some of which were marked with a (C)) on her private email server. The IG report notes, “According to the FD-302 from Clinton’s interview, Clinton told the FBI that she did not know what the ‘(C)’ meant and ‘speculated it was a reference to paragraphs ranked in alphabetical order.’”

    The IG noted, “Witnesses told us, and contemporaneous emails show, that the FBI and Department officials who attended Clinton’s interview found that her claim that she did not understand the significance of the ‘(C)’ marking strained credulity. [FBI] Agent 1 stated, ‘I filed that in the bucket of hard to impossible to believe.’” Comey told IG investigators that “by her demeanor, she was credible and open and all that kind of stuff.” But a video recording of the showdown (especially the alphabet line) would have been invaluable to Americans who doubted Clinton and the FBI.

    Anti-Trump texts spurred the IG to refer 5 FBI employees to the FBI for possible disciplinary penalties. One FBI agent labeled Trump supporters as “retarded” and declared “I’m with her” [Hillary Clinton]. Another FBI employee texted that “Trump’s supporters are all poor to middle class, uneducated, lazy POS.” One FBI lawyer texted that he was “devastated” by Trump’s election and declared “Viva la Resistance!” and “I never really liked the Republic anyway.” The same person became the “primary FBI attorney assigned to [Russian election interference] investigation beginning in early 2017,” the IG noted.

    Lack of transparency

    The IG report deals briefly with a kerfuffle over the FOIA release of Clinton Foundation documents a week before the 2016 election. Regrettably, the IG overlooked FBI’s horrendous record on FOIA compliance, spurring bitter complaints even from its former Deputy Director Andrew McCabe. A federal judge slammed the agency for claiming it would require 17 years to fulfill a FOIA request on surveillance of antiwar activists in the 1960s. The FBI also makes ludicrous redactions to FOIA releases — such as deleting the names of Clark Kent and Lois Lane from a theatrical adaptation of Superman because disclosing them would “constitute a clearly unwarranted invasion of personal privacy.”

    The IG report illustrates the vast sway that federal agencies sometimes seek over what Americans are permitted to know about candidates and their government. Unfortunately, this coroner’s inquest into 2016 chicaneries will do nothing to prevent covert federal meddling from tilting future elections. 

    And as Secretary of State Hillary Clinton wisely warned in 2012 that “lack of transparency eats away like a cancer at the trust people should have in their government.”

    In a separate note, Jim Bovard expounds on the fact that a politically weaponized FBI is nothing new, but plenty dangerous…

    In reality, the FBI has been politically weaponized for almost a century.

    The FBI was in the forefront of the notorious Red Scare raids of 1919 and 1920. Attorney General Mitchell Palmer reportedly hoped that arresting nearly 10,000 suspected radicals and immigrants would propel his presidential campaign. Federal Judge Anderson condemned Palmer’s crackdown for creating a “spy system” that “destroys trust and confidence and propagates hate.” He said, “A mob is a mob whether made up of government officials acting under instructions from the Department of Justice, or of criminals, loafers, and the vicious classes.”

    After the Palmer raids debacle, the FBI turned its attention to U.S. senators, “breaking into their offices and homes, intercepting their mail, and tapping their telephones,” as Timothy Weiner noted in his 2012 book, “Enemies: The History of the FBI”. After the FBI’s political espionage was exposed, Attorney General Harlan Fiske Stone, warned in 1924, “A secret police system may become a menace to free government and free institutions because it carries with it the possibility of abuses of power which are not always quickly comprehended or understood.” Stone fired the FBI chief, creating an opening for J. Edgar Hoover, who would head the FBI for the next 48 years. Hoover pledged to cease the abuses but the outrages mushroomed.

    In the 1948 presidential campaign, Hoover brazenly championed Republican candidate Thomas Dewey, leaking allegations that Truman was part of a corrupt Kansas City political machine.

    In 1952, Hoover sought to undermine Democratic presidential candidate Adlai Stevenson by spreading rumors that he was a closet homosexual.

    In 1964, the FBI illegally wiretapped Republican presidential candidate Barry Goldwater’s presidential headquarters and plane and conducted background checks on his campaign staff for evidence of homosexual activity. The FBI also conducted an extensive surveillance operation at the 1964 Democratic National Convention to prevent embarrassing challenges to President Lyndon Johnson.

    From 1956 to 1971, the FBI carried out “a secret war against those citizens it considers threats to the established order,” a 1976 Senate report noted. The FBI’s Operation COINTELPRO involved thousands of covert operations to incite street warfare between violent groups, to get people fired, to portray innocent people as government informants, to destroy activists’ marriages, and to cripple or destroy left-wing, black, communist, white racist, and anti-war organizations. Even feminists were eventually added to the target list. Senate investigators warned, “(The) FBI intelligence system developed to a point where no one inside or outside the bureau was willing or able to tell the difference between legitimate national security or law enforcement information and purely political intelligence.”

    Hoover served as FBI boss until his death in 1972. A New York Timesobituary noted, “The more awesome Mr. Hoover’s power grew, the more plainly he would state, for the record, that there was nothing ‘political’ about it, that the FBI was simply a ‘fact-finding agency’ that ‘never makes recommendations or draws conclusions.’” This was the myth that allowed a federal agency to accumulate vast power which it continues to covertly exercise. The FBI pirouettes as the saintliest institution in Washington while its leaders dish dirt to their political or media favorites.

    *  *  *

    The first step to reining in the FBI is to open the agency’s files. Oversight is often a mirage thanks to  FBI spurning of congressional subpoenas and other information demands. Federal judges have been riled by FBI false testimony and withholding of evidence in major court cases ranging from Ruby RidgeWacoOrlando Pulse Massacre, and Bundy Ranch showdown. The FBI has perennially exempted itself from the Freedom of Information Act.

    It has been more than 40 years since a Senate committee had the gumption and the sway to reveal the stunning details and breadth of FBI misconduct. It is time for another independent investigation with the courage and the clout to compel full disclosure from the most powerful domestic government agency. Investigators should receive all the crowbars they need to pry open FBI records.

    In the coming weeks, we will be assured that a few firings and perhaps a few indictments is all that is needed to put the FBI on a straight and narrow path. But the Founding Fathers never intended a secret police force to be an independent fourth branch of the federal government. As James Madison warned in 1788, “Wherever the real power in a Government lies, there is the danger of oppression.”

  • This Abandoned Macy's Is Now A Homeless Shelter Housing Its Former Employees

    The Macy’s at the Landmark Mall in Alexandria, Virginia used to be an iconic and historic building. In what is now undoubtedly a sign of the times, it has been converted into a homeless shelter until the property can be razed and its owner, the Howard Hughes Corporation, can repurpose the property and build something new at its location.

    The Landmark Mall in Alexandria, VA, used to be the talk of the town – in the 1960’s. Times have changed; Photo sources: NY Times

    Even more telling, this homeless shelter houses many of those who used to work at the very same Macy’s.

    In the realm of brick-and-mortar retail, the times are definitely a changin’. We have often, on this site, detailed not only the slow and painful death of brick-and-mortar retail as it has been occurring, but also how the value of once coveted mall property has disintegrated and similarly, how landlords of these properties now find themselves stuck between a rock and a hard place – tenants are dropping like flies, sales numbers used to help calculate rent are on the decline and property appraisals have been underwhelming. This has led to a influx of abandoned property, not unlike the Macy’s in Alexandria, just sitting and waiting to be repurposed.

    (Photo sources: NY Times)

    The Macy’s in the Landmark Mall was the topic of a recent New York Times article, detailing how a once historic landmark that it is now abandoned and has become a homeless shelter, 15 months after it had its last customers. The Macy’s “now provides 60 beds, hot meals and showers for families and for single men and women who are having trouble finding a place to live in a city with a scarcity of affordable housing.”

    Here is The New York Times on the property’s once iconic status as a historic landmark:

    The Landmark Mall was once at the vanguard of shopping. Opened in 1965, the mall housed the region’s most fashionable department stores, Hecht’s, Woodward & Lothrop and Sears & Roebuck. Boys came to buy their first suit at the haberdasher, and teenage girls could get their shoes dyed to match the color of their prom dress.

    Alexandria’s former mayor William D. Euille remembered playing the clarinet in the high school band at the mall’s opening ceremony. “It was the economic engine of the city,” he said.

    Landmark tried to adapt over the years. It began as an open-air shopping center and went through an overhaul in the 1980s to enclose the property.

    Like many other malls, however, it has gone the way of the buffalo:

    Eventually, the mall succumbed to retail’s propensity to chase after newer, flashier spaces. Developers built larger malls with more upscale brands nearby in Pentagon City and Tysons Corner, siphoning customers away from Landmark.

    Landmark’s original anchor stores either have been bought out, went bankrupt or are clinging to life — like many in the retail business. Last year, 6,985 stores closed in the United States, a record number, according to Coresight Research, a retail analysis and advisory firm. This year, retailers are on a pace to close roughly 10,000 stores.

    In its final years of operation, the Landmark’s tenants included two dollar stores and a tax preparer. Only the Sears is still operating. A lone, blue inflatable figure dances on the store’s roof, beckoning shoppers.

    Plans to revamp the property, including a 2009 effort to help it once again become an open-air shopping destination, have failed – namely due to the property’s former owner, General Growth Properties, went bankrupt after the 2008 financial crisis. Subsequent to that, the mall was sold and those plans were scrapped.  

    Landmark’s current owner, the Howard Hughes Corporation, plans to tear down the mall and build a mixed-used space that could include offices, retail and other attractions that are still being finalized. It could take many more years to complete the planning, permitting and construction process for such a huge project.

    “It’s a great piece of real estate,” said Mark Bulmash, a senior vice president of development at Howard Hughes.

    The article then tells several stories of individuals who are moving into this property as it has now become a temporary homeless shelter for a builder who is seeking shelter while it constructs a permanent location on the other side of Alexandria:

    Karleen Smith used to work at the Macy’s in Landmark Mall, putting price tags on summer dresses, housewares and the latest styles of shoes.

    On Saturday, Ms. Smith, 57, returned to her former store, not as an employer or a customer, but as a resident.

    The former Macy’s in this vacant shopping mall outside Washington has been transformed into a homeless shelter.

    “It’s weird to be moving into this building. I used to work here,” she said inside the shelter’s common room, which was once the men’s department. “It’s called survival.”

    Smith’s memories of the building, prior to its current state, were fondly noted in the NY Times article – again just making even clearer how the property is long past its heydey and has made a full 180 degree turn for the worse:

    Ms. Smith, the former Macy’s worker, rested on the floor of the common room under a frayed green blanket. Before coming to the shelter, Ms. Smith had been living in a car and showering in a recreation center. “I was tired,” she said.

    Ms. Smith, who worked at Macy’s as a seasonal hire during the holidays 10 years ago, remembers the store fondly.

    On a slow day, she would try on makeup at the cosmetics counter and spray herself with samples of perfume. She said she could never afford to buy anything of her own. “All I could do was admire it.”

    As Ms. Smith waited to move into her new room, the electricity cut out to a portion of the shelter and the staff set up battery powered camping lanterns to light the way for movers. Volunteers brought crockpots with taco makings for dinner and put together goody bags for the children staying there.

    For many of the current residents of the shelter, what has happened is nothing short of shocking.

    Keith Ham, 43, who has been living the shelter for about three months, said his family did not believe where he was moving.

    “They say, ‘Macy’s at the mall?’ And I say, ‘For real, Macy’s at the mall.’”

    We detailed the glut in retail space in an early May article that we published, noting that the American shopping mall – that centerpiece of the 1980’s big-box retail model – has fallen on hard times in recent years as the growing dominance of e-commerce has finally started to take a toll on brick-and-mortar retailers – a subject that we’ve frequently discussed.

    Shifting consumption patterns (i.e. the dawn of e-commerce), years of underinvestment by mall owners, and a seemingly unceasing stream of retailer bankruptcies are the factors that have been responsible for most of the damage to Mall REITS, particularly products tied to lower quality malls.

    Emptying storefronts and malls have only exacerbated a glut of American retail space. The country now has roughly 24 square feet of retail space per capita, more than twice that of Australia and 5 times that of the UK.

    In April, we talked about the breakneck speed with which retail shopping space was closing. Retail real estate carnage is continuing this year with no signs of slowing up, as Bloomberg reported back in April that over 77 million square feet of retail real estate has closed this year and that 2018 will easily pass 2017’s record of 105 million square feet closed. The latest example was the fall of the once massive Toys ‘R’ Us name:

    The fall of the Toys “R” Us chain, with more than 700 U.S. stores, shows how much retail real estate has changed in just the last decade. When KKR & Co.Bain Capital, and Vornado Realty Trust took over the company in 2005, the buyers justified the $7.5 billion price, in part, because of the supposedly valuable properties that came with the deal.

    We also noted that the price of such properties was tanking. If there was ever to be any silver lining to the complete carnage in the retail real estate space, it was the argument that has been perpetuated over the last decade or so: despite retail stores closing, the real estate would eventually be worth something. 

    This argument was made by real estate investment trusts as well as activist investors and analysts who tried to put a positive spin on the death of brick and mortar retail. Now, with more space freeing up, the bid under former retail property is at ask of falling off as supply is starting to get far ahead of demand:

    Real estate can put a floor under the value of a retailer and make it easier for the company to borrow. Maybe a particular store concept doesn’t work out as consumers’ tastes change, but in that case, investors can always sell the land and buildings to someone with a better plan. Long-term leases can be similarly valuable. But what if the problem isn’t that a particular store is out of fashion, but that consumers are just shopping less at brick-and-mortar retailers in general? As more storefronts empty, the valuation floor will look wobblier.

    The story of Alexandria should come as no surprise to anybody who has been following brick-and-mortar retail, watching it get torched by online competitors, mostly Amazon.com. Unfortunately as times goes on, the reality only gets more desperate for brick-and-mortar retail, and its (former) employees, at a time when many considered that the decimation of brick and mortar may finally be ending.

    It appears that it’s only just beginning.

  • The Texas Bullion Depository Officially Opened For Business This Week

    Authored by Mike Maharrey via The 10th Amendment Center,

    The Texas Bullion Depository officially opened for business this week. The creation of the facility represents a power-shift away from the federal government, and sets the foundation to undermine the Federal Reserve’s monopoly on money.

    In June 2015, Gov. Greg Abbot signed legislation creating the state gold bullion and precious metal depository. The facility will not only provide a secure place for individuals, business, cities, counties, government agencies and even other countries to store gold and other precious metals, the law also creates a mechanism to facilitate the everyday use of gold and silver in transactions. In short, a person will eventually be able to deposit gold or silver – and pay other people through electronic means or checks – in sound money.

    The facility began accepting deposits of precious metals on Wednesday, June 6. Texas Comptroller Glenn Hegar became the first depositor. He praised the depository as a secure place to store gold and silver.

    “Once you’ve made that deposit, it is going to be there tomorrow and in the future, until you make a decision to withdraw it or you want to sell it,” he told the Texas Tribune.

    Rep. Giovanni Capriglione sponsored the legislaiton creating the depository. He also deposited gold on Wednesday. He said he thinks the Texas facility could be the first of many across the U.S.

    “I can’t think of any place else in the world that could create a bullion depository this way, and I’ve heard from legislators across the country who want to do what we are doing, from Tennessee to Utah,” he said in a statement. “We will see a lot of financial interest in this depository, with gold, silver and other commodities coming here.”

    Austin-based Lone Star Tangible Assets runs the depository for the state. It currently operates it out of its existing facility in Austin, but plans to open a new building for the depository in Leander sometime in 2019.

    You don’t have to be a Texas resident to use the depository. Any U.S. citizen can set up an account online and then ship or personally deliver metal to the facility. The Texas Bullion Depository will accept gold, silver, platinum, rhodium and palladium.

    The depository does not currently have a system in place to faciliate everyday transactions with gold and silver, but that remains part of the long-term plan.

    According to an article in the Star-Telegram, state officials want a facility “with an e-commerce component that also provides for secure physical storage for Bullion.” While in the development phase, officials said plans for a depository will include online services that would let customers accept, transfer and withdraw bullion deposits and related fees.

    Ultimately, depositors will be able to use a bullion-funded debit card that seamlessly converts gold and silver to fiat currency in the background. This will enable them to make instant purchases wherever credit and debit cards are accepted.

    By making gold and silver available for regular, daily transactions by the general public, the new depository has the potential for wide-reaching effect. Professor William Greene is an expert on constitutional tender and said in a paper for the Mises Institute that when people in multiple states actually start using gold and silver instead of Federal Reserve notes, it would effectively nullify the Federal Reserve and end the federal government’s monopoly on money.

    “Over time, as residents of the state use both Federal Reserve notes and silver and gold coins, the fact that the coins hold their value more than Federal Reserve notes do will lead to a ‘reverse Gresham’s Law’ effect, where good money (gold and silver coins) will drive out bad money (Federal Reserve notes).

    “As this happens, a cascade of events can begin to occur, including the flow of real wealth toward the state’s treasury, an influx of banking business from outside of the state – as people in other states carry out their desire to bank with sound money – and an eventual outcry against the use of Federal Reserve notes for any transactions.”

    Gresham’s Law holds that “bad money drives out good.”  For example, when the U.S. government replaced silver quarters and dimes with coins made primarily of less valuable copper, the cheap coins drove the silver out of circulation. People hoarded the more valuable silver coins and spent the less valuable copper money. So, how do you reverse Gresham?

    The key is in making it easier to use gold and silver in everyday transactions. The reason bad money drives out good is that governments put up barriers to using sound money in day-to-day life. That makes it more costly to spend gold and silver and incentivizes hoarding. When you remove barriers, you level the playing field and allow gold and silver to compete head-to-head with Federal Reserve notes. On an even playing field, gold and silver beat fiat money every time.

    The Texas Bullion Depository also creates an avenue toward financial independence. Countries around the world, including China, Russia and Turkey, have been buying gold to limit their dependence on the U.S. dollar. University of Houston political science professor Brandon Rottinghaus said a state depository can serve a similar function for Texas.

    “This is another in a long line of ways to make Texas more self-reliant and less tethered to the federal government. The financial impact is small but the political impact is telling, Many conservatives are interested in returning to the gold standard and circumvent the Federal reserve in whatever small way they can.”

    The Texas Bullion Depository creates a mechanism to challenge the federal government’s monopoly on money and provides a blueprint for other states to follow. If the majority of states controlled their own supply of gold, and people began using precious metals in daily transactions, it could conceivably make the Federal Reserve completely irrelevant.

  • 'DISEASE X': New Strain Of Bird Flu Kills 40% Of Those Who Contract, 100s Dead In China

    A “new” strain of deadly bird flu dubbed “Disease X” by the World Health Organization (WHO) has killed hundreds of people in China, and is just three mutations away from becoming transmissible between humans, according to experts.

    The strain, H7N9, circulates in poultry and has killed 623 people out of 1,625 infected in China – a mortality rate of 38.3%. While first identified in China in 2013, H7N9 has recently emerged as a serious threat seemingly overnight. 

    Professor Jonathan Van-Tam, deputy chief medical officer for the UK, told The Telegraph that H7N9 could cause a global outbreak.

    “[H7N9] is an example of another virus which has proven its ability to transmit from birds to humans,” said Van-Tam, who added “It’s possible that it could be the cause of the next pandemic.”

    The WHO says N7N9 is “an unusually dangerous virus for humans,” and “one of the most lethal influenza viruses that we’ve seen so far” 

    H7N9 viruses have several features typically associated with human influenza viruses and therefore possess pandemic potential and need to be monitored closely,” said Dr. Yoshihiro Kawaoka of the University of Wisconsin-Madison. 

    Researchers led by James Paulson of the Scripps Research Institute in California have been studying the mutations which could potentially occur in H7N9’s genome to allow for human-to-human infection.

    The team’s findings, published in the journal PLoS Pathogens on Thursday, showed that in laboratory tests, mutations in three amino acids made the virus more able to bind to human cells — suggesting these changes are key to making the virus more dangerous to people. –Japan Times

    That said, the mutations would need to occur relatively close to each other to become more virulent, which has a low probability of happening according to Fiona Culley, an expert in respiratory immunology at Imperial College London.

    Some of the individual mutations have been seen naturally … these combinations of mutations have not,” and added: “The chances of all three occurring together is relatively low.”

    Wenday Barclay, a virologist and flu specialist also at Imperial College says the study’s findings reinforce the need to keep the H7N9 bird flu under close surveillance. 

    “These studies keep H7N9 virus high on the list of viruses we should be concerned about,” she said. “The more people infected, the higher the chance that the lethal combination of mutations could occur.”

    According to the CDC, Human infections with bird flu viruses can happen when enough virus gets into a person’s eyes, nose or mouth, or is inhaled. This can happen when virus is in the air (in droplets or possibly dust) and a person breathes it in, or when a person touches something that has virus on it then touches their mouth, eyes or nose.

    The reported signs and symptoms of avian influenza A virus infections in humans have ranged from mild to severe and included  conjunctivitis, influenza-like illness (e.g., fever, cough, sore throat, muscle aches) sometimes accompanied by nausea, abdominal pain, diarrhea, and vomiting, severe respiratory illness (e.g., shortness of breath, difficulty breathing, pneumonia, acute respiratory distress, viral pneumonia, respiratory failure), neurologic changes (altered mental status, seizures), and the involvement of other organ systemsCDC

    Rare human infections with some avian viruses have occurred most often after unprotected contact with infected birds or surfaces contaminated with avian influenza viruses. However, some infections have been identified where direct contact was not known to have occurred. Illness in people has ranged from mild to severe.

    Don’t let this happen to you: 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 15th June 2018

  • German Police Uncover Jihadist "Ricin Bomb" Terror Plot

    A 29-year old Tunisian man has been arrested Cologne, Germany after he successfully produced Ricin which authorities say he intended to weaponize as a bio-chemical terror agent. Ricin is considered by the Center for Disease Control (CDC) as among the most toxic biological agents known — classified as a Category B bioterrorism agent and a Schedule number 1 chemical warfare agent.

    According to German media reports, police believe they thwarted a potential jihadist terror attack in the planning stages, which intended to utilize Ricin that the suspect made from castor bean seeds

    German police searched the apartment of a 29-year-old Tunisian man in chemical protective gear. Image via AP.

    The AP reports the plans were inspired by an online instruction manual for a “ricin bomb” on an ISIS website, citing the German newspaper Bild

    Bild also reported that the suspect bought bomb-making materials and chemicals used in the production of ricin. It said the suspect lived in the Chorweiler neighborhood of Cologne with his wife, a convert to Islam, and four children. He supposedly used instructions to make a ricin bomb that had been posted online by the extremist Islamic State group.

    American intelligence reportedly tipped off German authorities after the suspect was monitored ordering unusual quantities of castor bean seeds online, which are naturally toxic and can be used to create the poison. 

    “We don’t know how, or how widely, the ricin was to have been distributed,” the German prosecutor was quoted by the AP as saying. It is as yet unknown if the man, identified only as Sief Allah H., has links to terror organizations, nor have police disclosed how much ricin had been produced — only that “He had contacts with people in the jihadist spectrum,” according to the prosecutor. 

    Ricin: deadly byproduct of the Castor Plant, famously used by Walter White to kill off an enemy in the final episode of the hit series Breaking Bad

    “Deeply concerning development in Germany. Never before to my knowledge has a jihadi in the West successfully produced ricin,” notes the Combating Terrorism Center at West Point’s Paul Cruickshank, who further warns, “A new threshold has been crossed in the chemical terror threat.”

    “Ricin is deadlier than then the venom of a cobra. A tiny amount is enough to kill an adult,” one terrorism expert, quoted by NBC, says of the substance which was famously used by Walter White to kill off an an enemy in the final episode of the hit series Breaking Bad

    Breaking Bad, “Rice’n Beans” scene:

    In fine powder form, Ricin can kill rapidly if inhaled, as National Geographic explains:

    If ricin is inhaled, initial symptoms may occur as early as 4-6 hours after exposure, but serious symptoms could also occur as late as 24 hours after exposure. The initial symptoms are likely to affect the respiratory system and can include difficulty breathing, shortness of breath, chest tightness, and cough. Death from ricin poisoning can take place within 36-72 hours of exposure, depending on the route of exposure and the dose.

    Ricin is, according to the chemical arms watchdog group OPCW, a “Schedule 1 chemical agent” due to to the following: chemicals include those that have been or can be easily used as chemical weapons and which have very limited, if any, uses for peaceful purposes.

    So perhaps most worrisome for investigators currently probing the Cologne case is whether or not it is connected with a broader terror plot by an organized jihadist group.

    Given ricin’s relative accessibility of production and the fact that ISIS propaganda sites have been exploring its potential for causing mass deaths, the Cologne case is deeply disturbing as this could potentially be but the tip of the iceberg in a larger terror trend. 

  • Sweden: "It's Fun To Build A Mosque"

    Authored by Judith Bergman via The Gatestone Institute,

    Some Muslims in Sweden want to be able to broadcast public calls to prayer throughout the country. They have already succeeded in obtaining permission for this in three cities — BotkyrkaKarlskrona and Växjö. “We want to have calls to prayer in more places. There are many Muslims who are Swedish citizens, who have the same rights as everyone else” said Avdi Islami, Press Officer of the Växjö Muslim Foundation, after the police recently gave permission for the Växjö mosque to make a roughly 4-minute-long prayer call every Friday around noon.

    A March poll of 1,000 Swedes showed that a majority of Swedes — 60 percent — are against public Muslim calls to prayer.

    “We do not consider the contents of the loudspeaker broadcast, but [only] the potential noise that it makes,” said Magnus Rothoff, unit commander of the southern Swedish police region, in explaining the decision-making process of the police.

    “Therefore, we chose to refer it to the municipality’s environmental management, where there is expertise on the [noise] level that should apply. Then we came to the conclusion that we are not disturbed to the extent that one can make a different decision than to approve.”

    The municipality also did not consider the content of the call to prayer.

    The desire of Swedish authorities that the content of the Muslim call to prayer, also known as the Adhan, can be ignored and that the issue is only of noise levels is symptomatic of the way Swedish authorities in general approach the increasing Islamization of Sweden: that is continually to deny or ignore the scope of the problem.

    The content of the Adhan prayer, from a Western point of view, is deeply problematic. Its purpose is not only a neutral call to prayer — such as church bells, which consist only of musical notes. Here is the translation of the prayer:

    “Allah is the greatest (Allahu akbar). I testify that there is no God but Allah (Ashhadu anna la ila ill Allah). I testify that Mohammed is Allah’s Prophet (Ashhadu anna Muhammadan rasul Allah). Come to prayer (Hayya alas salah). Come to security/salvation. Allah is the greatest (Allahu akbar). There is no God but Allah (La ilah ill Allah).

    “Allahu akbar” means “Allah is greatest” or “Allah is greater ” — presumably meaning than other deities.

    In 1993, when the Catholic Church wanted to build a tower for ringing church bells in Växjö, the municipality advised the church to refrain, as the neighbors had complained that they would be bothered by church bells.

    As recent decisions by Swedish authorities in Växjö and Karlskrona have undoubtedly created a legal precedent, however, Avdi Islami’s wish to have calls to prayer from mosques all over Sweden is likely to succeed. The Swedish authorities, therefore, are themselves creating the conditions for further Islamization.

    Apart from wanting to spread the call to prayer to mosques all over Sweden, new mosques continue to be planned and built. In Rinkeby, a suburb of Stockholm, the construction of the Rinkeby Mosque is about to begin. With 18 domes and at an estimated 5,000 square meters –1500 of which are dedicated to the mosque, and the rest to a restaurant, classrooms and a library — the mosque will be among Scandinavia’s largest, comparable to the Malmö mega mosque, which opened in April 2017. The Rinkeby mosque, designed by the Swedish architect Johan Celsing, will be constructed by NCC, a major construction company in Sweden. The firm estimates that the complex should be ready in 2020 at a cost of around 100 million Swedish kroner ($11.4 million). “It’s going to be fun to build a mosque, from a construction point of view,” said Fredrik Anheim, Head of Division at NCC Building.

    “For eight years, we have been trying to get funding, but now we are as close as you can get,” said Ibrahim Bouraleh, Vice President of the Rinkeby Mosque Collection Foundation, who refutes claims that the mosque is being funded by foreign donors. The foundation, however, has only collected 3 million out of the 100 million Swedish kroner needed, so the question arises, who indeed is funding the project?

    The organization behind the mosque is the Islamic Association of Järva (Islamiska förbundet i Järva), part of the Islamic Association in Sweden (Islamiska Förbundet i Sverige, IFSI), considered an organizational front for the Muslim Brotherhood. As IFSI clearly states (at the bottom of the linked page and in its statutes), it is a member of the Federation of Islamic Organisations in Europe (FIOE), which is generally acknowledged as an umbrella organization for local Muslim Brotherhood groups from all over Europe.

    In an interview with the Wall Street Journal in 2005, then-president of FIOE, Ahmet al-Rawi, said, when asked about ties with the Muslim Brotherhood, “We are interlinked with them with a common point of view. We have a good close relationship.”

    The area of the future mega mosque, Rinkeby, is considered an “especially vulnerable area” — known as a no-go zone — defined by the police as an area “characterized by a social problem and criminal presence that leads to a widespread unwillingness to participate in the judicial process and difficulties for the police to fulfill its mission. The situation is considered acute”.

    Rinkeby subway station was recently categorized as a place too dangerous to work unless escorted by the police, due to the security risk created by stone-throwing and hostile gangs.

    Rinkeby subway station, in Stockholm, Sweden, was recently categorized as as a place too dangerous to work unless escorted by the police, due to the security risk created by stone-throwing and hostile gangs. (Image source: Tricia Wang/Flickr)

    In December 2017, Lise Tamm, Head of the National Unit against International and Organized Crime, said, “Rinkeby is almost like a war zone. When the police work there, they work as the military defense would”.

    Sweden’s Islamization of itself barrels on.

  • Predicting The Unpredictable: Who Will Win The World Cup?

    32 nations will be competing at the FIFA World Cup in Russia over the next four and a half weeks, but only one team will fly home victorious.

    And, as Statista’s Felix Richter notes, even though every fan/expert has an opinion on who will ultimately win, much of the game’s beauty lies in its inherent unpredictability. Football – at least the one played in Russia these days – is a notoriously low-scoring game (just ask American sports fans about the appeal of a goalless draw) and hence one false decision, one dropped ball or one dislocated shoulder can decide the outcome of an entire season or tournament.

    Defying the game’s unpredictability, analysts from Goldman Sachs have developed a sophisticated statistical model in order to try to predict Germany’s successor as world champions. According to their analysis, based on 53 separate variables including team ratings, player ratings, recent performance and recent opposition performance, Brazil is the favorite to win the title with a probability of 18.5 percent. France is the second most likely champion with a likelihood of 11.3 percent followed by defending champion Germany (10.7 percent).

    As the following chart illustrates, the global public disagrees with the statistical model and sees Germany as the most likely World Cup winner.

    Infographic: Predicting the Unpredictable | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    23 percent of the roughly 12,000 respondents in an Ipsos poll conducted across 27 countries gave Joachim Löw’s team their vote of confidence, while 21 percent favor Brazil to win the title.

    England, a team known to struggle at the world stage, is objectively more likely to win the title than people give them credit for.

    Find all Statista’s World Cup related charts here.

  • The Babchenko False Flag Exposed The Deep State-Journalist Nexus

    Authored by Andrew Korybko via Oriental Review,

    Self-exiled Russian journalist Arkady Babchenko’s false flag “assassination” in Kiev is one of the most scandalous media stunts in recent memory.

    Most people are already aware of his dramatic stunt in appearing at a live press conference about his reported “killing” and then admitting that the whole thing was staged in order to capture what he claimed were his Russian-backed wannabe assassins, but many have yet to realize the larger implications of what just happened.

    A lot of commentary has since been made about how irresponsible it was of Ukraine to carry out this false flag incident in tricking the world for the sake of smearing Russia’s reputation right before the World Cup, with the revelation that this was 100% fake news being used to cast even more suspicion on the Mainstream Media – and especially those that are operating within Ukraine – than ever before.

    Relatedly, it reinforces claims that the White Helmets’ famous videos of dead children in Syria were also faked like how independent journalist Vanessa Beeley proved through her extensive investigative reporting in the country over the years, to say nothing of renewing doubts over the official narrative about the Skripals.

    In hindsight, this self-admitted false flag provocation retroactively adds credence to the argument that these two aforementioned high-profile examples were also staged as well, though there’s also another angle to all of this that hasn’t been given the attention that it deserves, and that’s the cooperation between journalists and the ‘deep state’.

    Russian journalist Arkady Babchenko (R), who was reported murdered in the Ukrainian capital on May 29, and head of the state security service (SBU) Vasily Gritsak attend a news briefing in Kiev, Ukraine May 30, 2018.

    By now it’s taken for granted that some journalists clandestinely cooperate, and even coordinate their activities, with their de-facto handlers from the permanent military, intelligence, and diplomatic bureaucracies after witnessing how the media waged its infowar against Trump over the past 3 years, but Babchenko’s false flag “assassination” introduced a new dimension into all of this.

    Surprisingly, the US-funded “Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty” platform reported that the staged photo of his “killing” was “first published on the Facebook page of a former Ukrainian reporter who says he now works for a shadowy consultancy organization based in the Washington, D.C., area”.

    The only way that he could have received that was from a member of the Ukrainian “deep state” itself, which passed it along to their DC-based asset with the intent of “laundering” the picture through social media and making it “organically” go viral, representing yet another level of collaboration between the “deep state” and so-called “journalists”.

    Altogether, this false flag involved two separate, but interconnected, influence operations through willing journalist participants, the first and most obvious being Babchenko himself – who can be described more as an information provocateur and even a troll instead of a journalist – and the second DC-based individual who laundered the fake pic of Babchenko’s ”assassination”.

  • Millennials Expect To Retire At 56 Despite Negative Net Worth

    Not only are millennials the most populous generation in the American workforce, but the tremendous amount of credit card and student loan debt they carry has made them the most indebted generation in modern history – which is forcing them to put off other major life decisions.

    But despite the fact that a surprising number of millennials are fat and broke, many still have an optimistic view on when they expect to retire. Though their generation mostly lacks the generous pensions offered to Baby Boomers and some Gen Xers, A TD Ameritrade survey found that millennials who use the service expect to retire at the surprisingly young age of 56. That’s six years below the current minimum age for receiving social security.

    Millennials

    What’s even more surprising, of the 1,500 millennials surveyed for the study, 53% expect to become millionaires at some point in their lives. However,  that percentage is unevenly divided between men and women: Of those surveyed who expect to become millionaires, 70% are men, compared with 38% of women.

    Debt

    Roughly 80% of millennials struggle with at least one type of debt. Meanwhile, according to the study, millennials are prioritizing saving unlike previous generations – or maybe it just seems that way. According to the survey, roughly 70% of respondents to the survey described themselves as “savers.” Though that doesn’t quite jive with the official data, which show that the personal savings rate in the US is near all-time lows.

    Personal

    A small percentage of savers say they never expect to pay back their loans (and recently we pointed out that about 100 or so Americans have more than $1 million in student loans). All of this is happening at a time when interest rates are rising, inflation has been showing signs of moving higher, gas prices are climbing and a shortage of homes has forced real-estate values to levels last seen before the housing crisis. Meanwhile, their net worth will likely remain negative for a while.

    Back in March, we pointed out that debt-laden millennials have been set back an average of $140,000 compared with their parents – a problem that has been compounded not just by student loans but by the costs of rent, food and other bills like car loans, which have also seen rapid growth.

    Student

    Any millennial who honestly expects to retire at 56 should be aware: If you truly want to retire young, you need to start saving in your 20s. Because with “the power of compounding,” as TDAmeritrade strategist JJ Kinahan explained it, “even those who start early can end up with more in the end.”

    Of course, by ‘saving’, Kinahan appears to mean ‘gambling in the stock market’, but tomato-potato.

  • US Intelligence Developing Better Storage To Hoard Your Data Based On Human DNA

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    Since the United States insists on spying its own people and saving massive amounts of personal data, the government is running out of storage space.  So now, they are developing a new and improved data storage system based on human DNA.

    It’s obvious the spying isn’t going to stop, and the US is no longer making it a secret that they want every scrap of data available on you stored. The Molecular Information Storage program, run by the Intelligence Advanced Research Projects Activity (IARPA), is recruiting scientists to help develop a system for storing huge amounts of data on sequence-controlled polymer, molecules with a similar makeup and structure to DNA.

    According to RT, US intelligence services struggle to store the trove of data collected during their snooping operations, so a team of researchers is developing the radical new storage technology. The issue for the government of how to store data is one the world’s intelligence services intend to solve for the overbearing governments of the planet. Costly data centers take up huge amounts of land, which is unsustainable given the increasing amount of data generated by each person on a daily basis.

    Some data centers are currently being housed in urban locations. The Lakeside Technology Center in Chicago is the largest data storage facility in the US. It spans a whopping 1.1 million square feet, which is equivalent to an entire city block. The site is actually at the location of the former printing press for the Yellow Pages, but the center was transformed in 1999 and now holds more than 50 generators whirring around the clock. The Chicago facility is only matched by the NSA’s $1.5 billion Bumblehive data center in Bluffdale, Utah, which is just over 1 million square feet.

    This new technology being developed by the US has huge potential as researchers believe DNA-like polymer technology can store data more than 100,000 times more efficiently than current methods. The IARPA hopes that it could one-day process entire exabytes of data while reducing the amount of physical space required to store all that personal information. To give you an idea of the scale: one exabyte, or one quintillion bytes, is four million times the storage capacity of a 256GB iPhone X. 

    “Faced with exponential data growth, large data consumers may soon face a choice between investing exponentially more resources in storage or discarding an exponentially increasing fraction of data,” the IARPA said in a statement cited by Nextgov. And we all know the government cannot be bothered to leave us alone and give us privacy, so they intend to spend a lot of our money so they can continue to keep tabs on all of us. It’s actually rather demented when one logically thinks about it.

    There are three distinct strands to the project, reported RT. The agency is hoping to create systems for storing and retrieving information, as the IARPA is calling on developers to help put together an easy-to-use operating system.

    We will never have privacy again if the US government has anything to say about it.

  • Bank Of Japan Leaves Policy Unchanged, Downgrades Inflation, Continues 'Stealth' Taper

    Yen is weaker following The BOJ’s decision (with one dissent) to leave policy rates unchanged and maintain their JGB holdings target. BoJ did downgrade their inflation outlook but made no mention of its ongoing ‘stealth’ bond-buying taper.

    • BOJ Maintains 10-Year JGB Yield Target at About 0.000%

    • BOJ Maintains Policy Balance Rate at -0.100%

    • Bank of Japan Downgrades Assessment of CPI – BOJ Sees CPI in Range of 0.5% to 1.0%

    • As expected, the BOJ has retained the 80 trillion yen bond-buying target that hasn’t been hit for some time now. This showcases just how careful the BOJ is about even the most minor tweak in its policy guidance.

    The reaction is a weaker yen for now…

    While The Bank of Japan’s policies drift further and further away from The Fed and ECB (admittedly BoJ has tapered down its bond-buying ever so quietly), it is hardly surprising that Kuroda didn’t go full hawktard as economic data has been dismal this year and a recession looms…

    Japanese economic data is the most disappointing since 2014…

    And the economy is shrinking once again…

     

    While no official policy adjustment has been made, The BoJ has been stealth tapering for months…

    “Market players have come to realize that the bond-purchase operations aren’t directly linked to monetary policy,” said Mari Iwashita, chief market economist at Daiwa Securities Co. in Tokyo. “Their action is dependent on conditions and does not indicate anything special in store.”

    Again no mention of this tapering as The BoJ attempts to maintain the bond-buying program pace that it promised.

    As @dmwlsw joked so accurately:

    “BOJ doesn’t disappoint. Just continues to buy everything.”

    Kathy Matsui of Goldman Sachs summed things up nicely when she spoke to Bloomberg Television:

    “When it comes to full blown ‘let’s end QE and lets begin the tapering process,’ until inflation approaches something closer to the BOJ target of 2 percent, I think we are looking at continued central bank divergence for quite some time.

  • China Warns Of "Immediate" Retaliation As Trump Set To Impose $50 Billion Tariff Package

    Just hours after President Trump reportedly signed off on tariffs targeting some $50 billion in Chinese goods (a decision that was finalized after a 90-minute meeting with officials from the West Wing, as well as senior national-security officials, the Treasury Department, the Commerce Department and the office of the US Trade Representative), Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi said during a press conference in Beijing that China is prepared to retaliate as it takes a more confrontational approach against the US on trade, according to the Wall Street Journal.

    China

    Wang’s comments reportedly followed face-to-face talks with Secretary of State Mike Pompeo, where Wang urged Pompeo to choose a path of “cooperation and mutual benefit.” Pompeo was in Beijing to brief Chinese officials on the North Korea summit.

    On Thursday, Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi said China and the U.S. faced a choice between cooperation and mutual benefit on the one side and confrontation and mutual loss on the other.

    “China chooses the first,” Mr. Wang told a joint news conference, after talks with U.S. Secretary of State Mike Pompeo in Beijing.

    “We hope the U.S. side can also make the same wise choice,” Mr. Wang said. “Of course, we have also made preparations to respond to the second kind of choice.”

    Meanwhile, Bloomberg reports that Mei Xinyu, a researcher at Chinese Academy of International Trade and Economic Cooperation, part of China’s Ministry of Commerce, expects China to adopt retaliatory tariffs on U.S. goods “immediately.”

    While the official breakdown of Trump’s tariffs won’t be released until tomorrow, a CNBC source noted that Trump has already signed off on the tariffs, and that a list of talking points has been distributed to 10 government agencies, while a list of products has been uploaded to a government database.

    As we noted earlier, one factor that could sway Trump’s thinking on tariffs would be an aggressive response from China. Earlier on Thursday, Xinhua, China’s state news agency reported that President Xi Jinping had told Pompeo that he hopes the US will tread carefully when it comes to sensitive issues like the US’s relationship with Taiwan and the simmering trade conflict so as to avoid a serious breakdown in bilateral ties between the two countries (ties that, aside from the trade spat, are also being tested by military brinksmanship in the Pacific).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The list of goods that will be subject to the new levies is expected to include between 800 and 900 products, slightly less than the original list of about 1,300 products on a list published by the US Trade Representative in April, as we pointed out earlier, While the two countries have been exchanging trade-related threats for months now, it’s still unclear when the US tariffs will go into effect.

    But remember, this is not a ‘Trade War’ – heaven forbid… the narrative that these shots and retaliations are merely skirmishes (because what would stocks do if they really started thinking a trade war was possible). One can’t help but picture the Black Knight defending his bridge…one “fleshwound” at a time…

  • "No Escape": Don't Expect A Yemeni Version Of The White Helmets

    Have you noticed the almost complete lack of video footage showing the ongoing Arab and US coalition aerial bombardment of Yemen’s key port city of Al Hudaydah? 

    Reuters reports the following:

    “People are scared. The warships are terrifying and warplanes are flying overhead all the time,” university student Amina, 22, who lives near the port, told Reuters by telephone.

    “People are fleeing the city to the countryside, but for those with no relatives there or money, there is no escape.”

    Don’t expect a Yemeni version of the “White Helmets” to emerge with high-tech cameras, slick new gear, and professional uniforms capturing Yemen’s starvation and slow death under US, Saudi, and UAE warplanes.

    Smoke rises from Al Hudaydah city of Yemen after Saudi-led coalition air attack. Image source: Anadolu, Getty 

    Don’t expect prime time news broadcasts to feature images of emaciated Yemeni babies — easily located on social media channels in the thousands.

    And yet he numbers are staggering, as Reuters reports further:

    The United Nations says 22 million Yemenis need humanitarian aid, and the number at risk of starvation could more than double to more than 18 million by year end unless access improves.

    No, there won’t be rebel leaders in Yemen beamed into CNN studios via Skype to detail the suffering of civilians under the brutal siege, because this isn’t Syria… it’s Yemen, where the US and its allies have not only imposed a full military blockade of land, air, and sea on an urban population of half a million people, but have also ensured a complete media blackout of on the ground footage and reporting. 

    As we noted in our initial coverage the complete media and humanitarian blockade on the contested port city of Al Hudaydah means confirmation of the rapidly unfolding events have been hard to come by, though we featured what’s purported to be some of the earliest social media footage of the assault, now in its second day. 

    But what is firmly established concerning the conflict?

    First, the Wall Street Journal has characterized the US role in the new operation as actually “deepening” as US intelligence will provide “information to fine-tune the list of targets”. The US has long been a lead and integral part of the coalition (also including Bahrain, Kuwait, UAE, Egypt, Sudan, and with the UK as a huge supplier of weapons) fighting Shia Houthi rebels, which overran the Yemen’s north in 2014.

    Saudi airstrikes on the impoverished country have involved the direct assistance of US intelligence and use of American and British military hardware. Cholera has also made a comeback amidst the appalling war-time conditions, and civilian infrastructure such as hospitals have been bombed by the Saudi-UAE-US coalition. The coalition claims to ultimately be thwarting Iranian ambitions inside Yemen. 

    Second, the ongoing Arab and US coalition siege of Yemen’s major port city through which 80% of all humanitarian aid for the war-torn country flows could result in the greatest humanitarian disaster and mass starvation in all of recent history according to the United Nations

    The city of half a million is one of the sole lifelines of support for Yemen’s over 27 million people from the outside world, thus analysts are predicting this to be a catastrophe for the country’s civilian population in a war The New York Times notes is already “classified as the world’s worst humanitarian disaster with “more than 75 percent of the population… dependent on food aid”.

    A new Reuters report estimates that “8.4 million people are on the verge of starvation, potentially the world’s worst famine for generations.”

    And yet on Thursday the US State Department announced it would resume funding for the controversial Syrian NGO state-funded group, the White Helmets, to the tune of $6.6, with presumably more American taxpayer funds to come. The group has long been exposed as essentially playing rescue squad for al-Qaeda and is a creation of international PR firms pushing for regime change in Syria

    But again, might Yemen get its own US-funded version of the White Helmets to rescue civilians?

    Why is there no video or photographic media coverage of US, Saudi, and UAE bombs raining down on masses of civilians in Al Hudaydah? Of course, the answer is obvious. 

    * * *

    Early in the Yemeni war the prestigious Columbia Journalism Review produced a short study which attempted to explain, according to its title, Why almost no one’s covering the war in Yemen (in short genocide is OK when US allies do it, according to the actions and words of Western political leaders).

    Other analysts have since criticized the media and political establishment’s tendency to exaggerate Iran’s presence in Yemen and further willingness to ignore or downplay the clear war crimes of US client regimes in the gulf (the US-Saudi coalition claims it must liberate Al Hudayda to cut off Iranian weapons flowing to Houthi rebels). While Iran-aligned states and militias are framed as the region’s terrorizers, the Saudi-aligned coalition’s motives are constantly cast as praise-worthy and noble.

    Meanwhile, the Pentagon has long reiterated its official (Orwellian) line that the US military’s deep level of assistance to the Saudi bombing campaign is actually geared toward reducing civilian harm. One glaring example is contained in an Al-Monitor report from earlier this year: “Speaking to reporters at the Defense Department on the heels of a meeting with Saudi Arabia’s Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman last week, Mattis said a contingent of US advisers deployed to help with intelligence sharing are engaged in a ‘dynamic’ role to help ensure a reduction in civilian harm.”

    But Al Monitor also noted that civilian deaths had continued unabated, while further quoting Mattis as saying, “This is the trigonometry level of warfare.”

    So the official Pentagon line on Yemen seems to be (confirmed repeatedly this week) that as it directly assists the Saudis in dropping bombs on civilians, it is actually “helping” those very civilians. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 14th June 2018

  • Diplomatic Meltdown: Italy-France Relations Collapse Amid North-African Migrant Spat

    Italy has postponed high-level discussions with France on Wednesday after French President Emmanuel Macron criticized Rome for refusing to take in a migrant rescue ship full of 629 shipwrecked North Africans – forcing it to divert to Valencia, Spain. After the ship ran out of supplies, the Italian Navy agreed to escort them across the Mediterranean. 

    Italy’s new Economy Minister Giovanni Tria said he was cancelling a meeting with his French counterpart Bruno le Maire in Paris. The French economy ministry later said the ministers had “agreed that Mr Tria will come to Paris in the coming days”. –AFP

    Italy’s decision to refuse the migrants came after their new Interior Minister, Matteo Salvini, said in early June that “the good times for illegals are over” – writing an urgent letter ordering Malta to accept the 629 migrants picked up by the non-governmental organization (NGO) ship MV Aquarius, run by the group SOS Mediterranee. Salvini called Malta the “safest port” for the passengers, advising that Rome would not offer refuge. After Malta refused leading to several days in limbo, Spain agreed to take the passengers. 

    In response to the ordeal, French President Emmanuel Macron accused Italy of “cynicism and irresponsibility,” adding that their EU neighbor is “playing politics” with the refugees. Meanwhile Gabriel Attal, the spokesman for Macron’s party, called Italy’s actions “nauseating”.

    Italian Interior Minister Matteo Salvini responded – saying on Tuesday that he would not “accept hypocritical lessons from countries that have preferred to look the other way on immigration,” and adding on Wednesay that unless France issues an “official apology” for Macron’s inflammatory comments, a Friday meeting between Italian Prime Minister Guiseppe Conte and Macron should be canceled

    If an official apology doesn’t arrive, prime minister Conte would be right not to go to France,” Salvini told reporters after he demanded that France take in more migrants.

    The statements around the Aquarius affair that come from France are surprising and show a serious lack of knowledge about what is really happening, said Salvini. 

    The Italian government has never abandoned the almost 700 people aboard the Aquarius,” it said in a statement on Tuesday. “After the refusal of Malta to allow the people aboard the Aquarius to disembark there, we received an unprecedented gesture of solidarity from Spain. The same cannot be said of France, which has often adopted much more rigid and cynical immigration policies.” –Thelocal.fr

    France snarked back, with a French presidental source telling AFP that they hadn’t received a “formal demand from Italy for an apology.” 

    According to the Asylum Information Databse, France had a total of 100,412 applications for asylum in 2017 and had a rejection rate of 73.2%, while Italy had 130,119 applications in 2017 and a much lower rejection rate of 58.2%. Italy has accepted over 700,000 migrants since 2013. 

    Speaking to the Senate Wednesday, Salvini accused France of only receiving 640 of the 9,816 migrants it had promised to take from Italy.

    He said that between January and May, France had sent 10,249 migrants back to Italy.

    He demanded that France move from “words to action and offer a sign of generosity” by taking more in.

    Salvini has accused charities that rescue migrants of working with human traffickers but said Italy would not stop rescuing migrant boats itself. –AFP

    In December, EU leaders set an end-of-June deadline for an overhaul to rules governing Europe’s acceptance of migrants – most of whom arrive from North Africa. The International Organization for Migration warned on Tuesday against the closing of EU borders. 

    “I fear a major tragedy if states start refusing to accept rescued migrants,” its director general William Lacy Swing said.

    “Closing ports, whoever does it, threatens rescue at sea, as we have seen in the case of the Aquarius, and therefore is not the right solution,” UN High Commissioner for Refugees Filippo Grandi told reporters in Geneva, however he added that “the reason why Italy said it had closed ports is something we need to listen to”.

     

  • Turkey: Trustworthy Friend & Ally?

    Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdogan is making friends and influencing people once again as he makes it clear that the US/NATO Allies purchase of Russian-built S-400 air defense systems “was not for storage,” warning whoever was listening that “this is a defense system. What are we going to do with it if not use this defense system?”

    As Hurriyet reports, Turkey had been locked in talks over purchase of Patriot anti-aircraft systems for quite a long time, and the process was influenced by flip-flops in Turkish-American relations.

     “Are we going to depend on the U.S. again?” the Turkish strongman continued.

     “When we have been demanding from them for years, the answer that has been given to us is: The [U.S.] Congress is not allowing.”

    “We are tired of this,” he stated. In the meantime, Russia has responded to Turkish request for the S-400 “with a pretty alluring offer,” Erdogan could be heard.

     “They said they would even get into a joint production. And with respect to loans, they have offered us pretty good loan terms.”

    Turkish military is expected to take delivery of S-400s starting from 2019. The S-400 Triumf is now the most advanced Russian anti-aircraft system, designed to engage aerodynamic targets at a range of up to 400km and ballistic missiles up to 60km away. An S-400 squadron can deal with up to 36 aerial targets simultaneously.

    All of which raises the awkward question – Is Turkey still a trustworthy friend and ally?

    Via Andreas Andrianopoulos via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Not long ago, Turkey and Russia reached the brink of war when a Russian warplane was shot from the skies over Syria by a Turkish missile. A long period of escalating animosity followed culminating in an embarrassing apology that the President of Turkey directed to Vladimir Putin. Russia resumed normal relations with Turkey without forgetting the treachery that led to a situation of near conflict. The assassination of the Russian ambassador to Ankara by an Islamist policeman did not contribute to the process of normalization of relations between the two countries. 

    The situation now appears relatively normal with cordiality characterizing the atmosphere among the Kremlin and Ankara. Is however Turkey a trustworthy friend? To what extend can Russia build upon a relationship based solely on the disposition of one man? Is President Erdogan, on the basis of his hitherto political behaviour and diplomatic manoeuvring, to be trusted and relied upon? Presumably, Russia can capitalize on the difficulties that Turkey’s erratic behaviour has brought upon NATO. This exact behaviour however substantiates the lack of credibility that Turkey carries to all its foreign relations and endeavours.

    For decades, Turkey appeared to be a bastion of stability for the defensive orientations of NATO. But the emergence of Recep Tayip Erdogan and his AKP (Justice and. Development Party) to the forefront of Turkish political life has shaken these firm foundations. Not from the beginning, however. For a long time the mild version of Islam that the AKP purported displayed Erdogan as a social democratic leader eager to bring the overlooked marginal poor and agrarian population of Turkey to society’s forefront. An Islamic free market regime was supposed to be the target of the AKP’s reform agenda.

    Up to a point however. Quite abruptly, the Turkish leader decided to opt for a revival of Turkey’s Ottoman past and his choice of a modern day Sultan behaviour, with most of his traditional powers, could not be concealed. This signalled his objectionable choice of new friends and ideological allies. He quite clearly decided to play the card of a pure sharia supporting Islamic leader, by making it clear that there can never be a distinction between moderate and extreme Islam. “There can only be one Islam” he reiterated.

    Likewise, his rather friendly disposition towards the Islamic State militants could not initially be concealed. The hundreds of thousands of Syrian refugees flooding Turkey were by and large Sunni adherents of ISIS who escaped areas recaptured by Assad’s government forces or driven away by the Shia militias and the Kurdish forces who rooted the jihadi armies. Only then, when the areas controlled by ISIS were diminished, did Turkey decide to join forces with Russia and Iran to deal with the situation. Presumably, because of fear for the destiny of areas now under the control of Kurds.

    NATO and the West have already had a taste of Turkey’s unreliability. There are voices already calling for its expulsion from the western alliance (see Daniel Pipes, “NATO’s Turkey Challenge” in Frank J. Gaffney. Jr (ed), ALLY NO MORE: Erdogan’s New Turkish Caliphate and the Rising Jihadist Threat to the West. Center for Security Policy, 2018, p.92). Nevertheless, there are many pending issues as far as Turkey and its western allies are concerned.

    The West no longer looks upon Turkey as a reliable ally. Especially after Erdogan decided to play a heavy Islamic card, to break up with his former moderate Gulen supporters and to open ubiquitous relations with Iran and with radical Muslim Brotherhood organizations in Egypt, Jordan and elsewhere. On the basis of these observations, to what extend can Russia view Mr Erdogan as an honest friend, upholding future obligations and behaving in a trustworthy manner?

     

  • US Counterintel Chief: Russian Government Will Hack Your Phone When You Visit The World Cup

    If you’re planning on traveling to Russia for the World Cup, you might want to think twice about bringing a personal device, according to William Evanina, an FBI agent and director of the US Counterintelligence and Security Center. That’s because malicious actors (either the Russian government or Russian cybercriminals) will likely be able to access the information stored on your devices – possibly gleaning sensitive personal data like the password to your online banking account.

    And Evanina isn’t the only one: Another US official who asked Reuters not to be named confirmed that the UK’s intelligence community – including employees from the British version of the NSA – has issued a similar warning to the UK public, as well as members of England’s football team, according to Reuters.

    If you must bring an electronic device like a phone or laptop, consider leaving your personal device at home and bringing a “burner” – that is, a phone or computer that hasn’t been previously used and can be easily disposed of upon return to the US or UK – instead. Importantly, it doesn’t matter who you are: Even if travelers believe they are “relatively insignificant”, they could still be targeted.

    Russia

    The warnings, of course, come as Special Counsel Robert Mueller is trudging ahead with his investigation into purported Russian interference – including hacking – in the 2016 election, and just after his office scrambled to ask a federal judge to prevent lawyers for accused Russian nationals from Concord Management – one of the firms indicted by Mueller – from participating in discovery that could’ve possibly exposed the indictments as political stunts. Earlier this week, the Treasury Department sanctioned another five Russian firms for orchestrating cyberhacks and abetting the country’s intelligence agencies. 

    “If you’re planning on taking a mobile phone, laptop, PDA, or other electronic device with you – make no mistake – any data on those devices (especially your personally identifiable information) may be accessed by the Russian government or cyber criminals,” he said.

    “Corporate and government officials are most at risk, but don’t assume you’re too insignificant to be targeted,” Evanina added. “If you can do without the device, don’t take it. If you must take one, take a different device from your usual one and remove the battery when not in use.”

    […]

    In a statement, Britain’s National Cyber Security Center said it was “providing expert cyber security advice to the (UK) Football Association ahead of their departure to Russia for the 2018 FIFA World Cup.”

    Meanwhile, cyber security expert Patrick Wardle said that he follows this advice whenever he travels to Russia: “When I travel to Russia, I bring burner devices, so if they get hacked, it doesn’t really matter.” US agencies have issued similar warnings before other major international sporting events.

    Of course, the most secure option would be to simply refuse to attend, an option that several European left-wingers – including a member of Germany’s green party – have urged people to consider.

  • Here's What Would Happen If A Nuclear Bomb Was Detonated On The Ground In NYC

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    After the meeting between North Korean leader Kim Jong Un and US President Donald Trump seemed to end on an optimistic note, one may have hoped that our fears of a nuclear attack would subside. Not so, according to The New Yorker, who published an article entitled, “This Is What a Nuclear Attack on New York Would Look LIke.”

    While the timing may seem odd, it’s important to note that feelings are mixed about the North Korea-US summit.  Some are pleased and feel that a great deal was accomplished, while others are unhappy – even angry – that Trump made nice with a brutal dictator.

    It’s tough for many folks to separate their feelings about Trump, whether those feelings are animosity or support, and it shows in their assessment of the conversation. And this isn’t unique. People had the same difficulties with President Obama. Supporters thought everything he did was great, while detractors thought he was the Anti-Christ. We’d all be wise to try to separate our feelings from our take on current events, as difficult as that might be. However, that isn’t what this article is about.

    What would the nuclear threat look like?

    The  New Yorker piece is prefaced with the opinion that the potential nuke won’t be from the sources most of us have been worrying about. “If America is attacked, the strike probably won’t come from North Korea. And it will be even scarier than we imagine.”

    The intro is a political diatribe with some legitimate facts that are overshadowed by a blatant bias. But Ferris Jabr is an experienced science journalist who is a contributing writer for Scientific American and has been published in Wired, Foreign Policy, Aeon, Hakai, New Scientist, and Quanta, to name just a few outlets.  Don’t be too put off by the first couple of paragraphs to read the very credible information he provides in the rest of the article. The author discusses a distinct, chilling possibility that has quite a bit of merit.

    …a nuclear attack on the United States could well come not from the skies but from the streets. Experts warn that it would be relatively easy for terrorists to build an “improvised nuclear bomb” and smuggle it into America. Building a ten-kiloton bomb nearly as destructive as the one dropped on Hiroshima would require little more than some technical expertise and 46 kilograms of highly enriched uranium — a quantity about the size of a bowling ball.

    This is absolutely not outside the realm of possibility.

    Last month, some weapons-grade plutonium went missing from a university in Idaho. While the amount taken wasn’t enough to make a giant nuke, it was certainly enough to make a dirty bomb. I was unable to find any indication that the plutonium was ever recovered, and if any readers know, please post your links in the comments so I can update this article. This isn’t the first time that nuclear materials have gone missing – far from it. In 2013, the Washington Post published an unsettling map that showed dozens of thefts or losses of the ingredients required to cook up a dirty bomb or worse.

    The New Yorker article posits that the bomb would likely be assembled elsewhere and then smuggled into the United States but we can’t overlook the possibility that it could be just as easily assembled right here at home, should such an event occur. The article explains how a crude 10-kiloton bomb could be made and smuggled in (and it’s quite thorough to my untrained eye)

    Once terrorists obtained the uranium, they would need only a small team of sympathetic engineers and physicists to build what is known as a gun-type nuclear bomb, like the one dropped on Hiroshima. A gun-type nuke uses traditional explosives to fire a slug of uranium through a tube directly into another chunk of uranium, fracturing huge numbers of atoms and unleashing a massive amount of energy…

    …The last step in the process — smuggling the weapon into the United States — would be even easier. A ten-kiloton bomb, which would release as much energy as 10,000 tons of TNT, would be only seven feet long and weigh about 1,000 pounds. It would be simple to transport such a device to America aboard a container ship, just another unseen object in a giant metal box among millions of other metal boxes floating on the ocean. Even a moderate amount of shielding would be enough to hide its radioactive signature from most detectors at shipping hubs. Given all the naturally radioactive items that frequently trigger false alarms — bananas, ceramics, Brazil nuts, pet deodorizers — a terrorist group could even bury the bomb in bags of Fresh Step or Tidy Cats to fool inspectors if a security sensor was tripped.

    Jabr then suggests that the shipment could reach port in Newark, New Jersey, after which a route through the Lincoln Tunnel into Times Square might be the likely course.

    What would happen when the nuke detonated?

    Keep in mind that this article is specific to New York City. Anyone who lives there or has traveled there will finish reading it with a clear picture in their minds of the landmarks mentioned. But even if you never set foot in the Big Apple, the information delivered in such a relatable way is priceless.

    I’ve written a great deal about the survivability of a nuclear strike if one doesn’t happen to be at Ground Zero, and it seems that the author of this piece agrees. Here’s an excerpt:

    A ten-kiloton nuclear bomb detonated on the ground in Times Square would explode with a white flash brighter than the sun. It would be seen for hundreds of miles, briefly blinding people as far away as Queens and Newark. In the same moment, a wave of searing heat would radiate outward from the explosion, followed by a massive fireball, the core of which would reach tens of millions of degrees, as hot as the center of the sun.

    When such a bomb explodes, everyone within 100 feet of ground zero is instantaneously reduced to a spray of atoms…Near the center of the blast, the suffering and devastation most closely conform to the fictional apocalypse of our imaginations…Within a half-mile radius of the blast, there would be few survivors…

    As the fireball travels outward from the blast, people, buildings, and trees within a one-mile radius would be severely burned or charred. Metal, fabric, plastic, and clay would ignite, melt, or blister. The intense heat would set gas lines, fuel tanks, and power lines on fire, and an electromagnetic pulse created by the explosion would knock out most computers, cell phones, and communication towers within several miles.

    Traveling much farther than the fireball, a colossal pressure wave would hurtle forth faster than the speed of sound, generating winds up to 500 miles per hour. The shock wave would demolish the flimsiest buildings and strip the walls and roofs off stronger structures, leaving only their naked and warped scaffolding. It would snap utility poles like toothpicks and rip through trees, fling people through the air, and turn brick, glass, wood, and metal into deadly projectiles. A blast in Times Square, combined with the fireball, would carve a crater 50 feet deep at the center of the explosion. The shock wave would reach a diameter of nearly 3.2 miles, shattering windows as far as Gramercy Park and the American Museum of Natural History.

    All this would happen within a few seconds.

    As this pulse of radiation surges through the bodies of everyone who is outside, or in weakly insulated buildings, it wreaks biological havoc at the molecular level…Within minutes to hours, most people exposed in these areas would begin to show signs of acute radiation syndrome…

    The article is well worth reading to get a clear, horrifyingly detailed picture of the reality of a nuclear attack for those closest to Ground Zero. It continues to explain what would happen to those within a few miles in the hours and first days after the attack, and has some excellent advice on how to protect yourself should you find yourself in close proximity to a strike. The author concludes:

    A terrorist-built nuclear bomb detonated in Times Square would injure 300,000 people and kill 250,000 — 20 times more deaths than in any natural disaster or act of terrorism in America’s history. More than 500,000 would eventually be killed or injured by the radioactive fallout…

    …Overall, a nuclear missile detonated in the air over New York City would be more destructive and deadlier than a ground explosion, because it would generate a larger blast wave and fireball. By contrast, a nuclear bomb detonated on the ground loses some of its destructive power, because the energy is absorbed by the ground itself, but kicks up more dirt and debris, producing a much larger amount of radioactive fallout and causing a higher proportion of deaths from radiation sickness and cancer.

    Really, it seems to me that this scenario of a crude nuclear bomb detonated on the ground in a populated area is a whole lot more likely than a missile strike from across the ocean.

    You need to learn to protect yourself against all types of nuclear threats.

    By understanding exactly how this would affect Ground Zero and the area around it, we give ourselves a much greater opportunity for survival. Clearly, in a localized event, the entire country would not turn into a nuclear wasteland like the setting of The Road, but this is a common misconception that leaves people paralyzed in fear.

    It would be centered around the blast area, but the radiation and plume would travel. Being prepared for this possibility is far wiser than saying, “I’ll just take my chances and die. Who would want to live after that?”

    The unfortunate thing for those who deliberately choose the option of remaining unprepared is that you probably won’t just die in the blast. You will die a horrific, lingering death, in agony as your skin peels off, your organs shut down one by one, and your loved ones suffer beside you.

    Learn how to create a survival shelter in your home. Even if you aren’t at home when something terrible happens, that information could save your life. Knowledge is power.

  • Trump Facing Renewed Pressure To Sit For Mueller Interview After Kim Summit

    Now that President Donald Trump’s historic meeting with North Korean leader Kim Jong Un has come and gone, his legal team’s focus is shifting back toward Special Counsel Robert Mueller. And as Bloomberg reports, Mueller – who is pushing to wrap up the investigation as quickly as possible – is mounting one last push to convince Trump and his legal team to voluntarily sit for an interview. While Mueller has suffered the slings and arrows of Trump’s wrath – Trump’s allies have hurled vitriol at the special counsel on both twitter and cable news – his determination to interview the president remains unshaken.

    Trump

    So, now the two sides must either find common ground – or gear up for a legal battle that would likely need to be resolved by the Supreme Court.

    Now, Mueller is intent on quickly resolving a central issue with Trump’s legal team: whether the president will sit voluntarily for an interview in the probe of Russian election meddling, according to current and former U.S. officials. After months of negotiations, the two sides must find common ground or gear up for an unprecedented legal fight likely to go all the way to the Supreme Court.

    “It’s a little bit of a game,” said Harry Sandick, a former federal prosecutor who’s now a partner with law firm Patterson Belknap Webb & Tyler. “Mueller could subpoena the president but probably doesn’t want to. He faces some litigation risk. Trump could fight the subpoena, but he also faces a political risk.”

    During their push to turn public opinion against Mueller, Trump’s lawyers, led by Jay Sekulow and Rudy Giuliani, have engaged in selective leaking, including back in early May when they leaked a list of 49 questions purportedly turned. As one lawyer who spoke with Bloomberg pointed out, the ongoing negotiations have turned into “a bit of a game.” Others have claimed that the leak was intended to pressure Mueller into killing the interview (of course, we all know how that turned out).

    “It’s a little bit of a game,” said Harry Sandick, a former federal prosecutor who’s now a partner with law firm Patterson Belknap Webb & Tyler. “Mueller could subpoena the president but probably doesn’t want to. He faces some litigation risk. Trump could fight the subpoena, but he also faces a political risk.”

    The interview is key to Mueller’s investigation into whether Trump or any of his associates helped Russia interfere in the 2016 U.S. election and whether Trump acted to obstruct the probe, one official said.

    Meanwhile, Giuliani claimed late last month that he and Trump have already been rehearsing for an in-person interview with Mueller after the special counsel summarily rejected the Trump legal team’s request to conduct some of the interview in a written format.

    However, since FBI agents raided Trump attorney Michael Cohen’s home, office and hotel room and are reportedly preparing to charge him with a crime, the president has grown increasingly wary of an interview.

    One problem for Trump, though, is that if Mueller wins at the Supreme Court, he could compel Trump to sit for a Grand Jury for as long as he wants, and subject Trump to questions on a range of topics without providing any advanced warning.

    “I think the Supreme Court will rule in Mueller’s favor, but we don’t really know,” Sandick said. “If Mueller wins, he can actually put Trump in the grand jury without his lawyer for as long as he wants and ask about any subject he wants.”

    Furthermore, if Trump chooses the court battle route, Mueller’s probe would encounter further delays, as the ruling likely wouldn’t arrive until October at the earliest, after the Court returns from its summer recess. That would mean the investigation likely wouldn’t wrap up until late this year – or early next year – at the very earliest. It also would open the Republican Party up to a high degree of political risk, because the Court’s final ruling could arrive just before the midterms.

    But since the beginning of the probe, the biggest obstacle to a direct interview is Trump. The president’s legal team came within a hair’s breadth of an agreement back in January. But as Trump got cold feet, his team sent Mueller a 20-page letter arguing that Trump isn’t entitled to answer Mueller’s questions as they invoked Trump’s executive privilege.

    Regardless of whether the interview happens, Mueller has told Trump’s team that he will prepare a report summarizing his findings that will be turned over to the DOJ and, eventually, Congress. Then it will be up to Congress whether to release the report.

    That will ultimately depend on the outcome of the midterm vote.

  • Judge Blocks "Assault Weapons" Ban From Going Into Effect In Illinois Town

    Authored by Kerry Picket via The Daily Caller,

    A circuit court judge in Lake County, Illinois granted an injunction Tuesday that blocked the Chicago suburb of Deerfield from enforcing a ban on so-called “assault weapons.”

    The injunction was granted 24 hours before that ban was to go into effect.

    According to a press statement, the Second Amendment Foundation, the Illinois State Rifle Association and Deerfield resident Daniel Easterday filed a lawsuit against the local prohibition on the basis that it violates the state’s preemption law that was adopted in 2013.

    The law amended the state statute to say, “the regulation of the possession or ownership of assault weapons are exclusive powers and functions of this State. Any ordinance or regulation, or portion of that ordinance or regulation, that purports to regulate the possession or ownership of assault weapons in a manner that is inconsistent with this Act, shall be invalid…”

    Following the passage of the law, Illinois municipalities had a period of time in which to alter or adopt their gun laws, and Deerfield argued its ban was simply an amendment to prior ordinance that regulated firearms and became the first municipality to ban assault weapons following the Parkland high school shooting.

    If the ban went into effect, any person found to have what the town considered to be an “assault weapon” after Wednesday, July 13, would have faced a penalty of up to $1,000 per day.

    “We moved swiftly to challenge this gun ban because it flew in the face of state law,” said SAF founder and Executive Vice President Alan M. Gottlieb. “The village tried to disguise its extremism as an amendment to an existing ordinance. The ordinance bans possession of legally-owned semi-auto firearms, with no exception for guns previously owned, or any provision for self-defense.”

    “Worse, still,” he added, “the ordinance also provided for confiscation and destruction of such firearms and their original capacity magazines. It was outrageous that the ban would levy fines of up to $1,000 a day against anyone who refused to turn in their gun and magazines or move them out of the village. This certainly puts the lie to claims by anti-gunners that ‘nobody is coming to take your guns.’”

  • Furious Canadians Threaten US Boycott…Except Coke, iPhones, Nikes, Starbucks…

    Canadian publications and citizens groups are calling for a boycott of US goods in response to President Trump and members of his administration’s attacks on Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But as Reuters reports, a consumer boycott of the US is much easier said than done. Still, the boycott push has gained momentum since Canada’s Parliament on Monday condemned Trump for his treatment of Trudeau. Trudeau himself has “kept a low profile” since the end of the G-7 summit, which Trudeau hosted in Quebec over the weekend. Publications like the Toronto Star have suggested a campaign of “empty hotel rooms and campsites.”

    All kinds of targets have been suggested in opinion columns and postings on social media, from companies that sell goods associated with Trump or his family to a broader ban on U.S. vacations. The suggestions come not only in response to the attacks on Trudeau by Trump and his aides, but to the threat of a trade war that could hurt Canada’s economy and sideswipe jobs.

    “So, if this president insists on punching you in the nose and eating your lunch, why would you continue to pretend he’s still a great neighbor and go over to his place to spend your time and money?” implored an opinion piece in the Toronto Star.

    As Reuters reminds us, Canada is the biggest market for US goods. The country imports a total of $90 billion during the first four months of this year alone. For 35 US states, Canada is the top export market. As a whole, Canada is the destination for 18.3% of US exports – putting it ahead of China and Mexico.

    Canada

    When it comes to tourism, Canadians also comprise a significant proportion of visitors to the US. Hundreds of thousands of Canadian retirees winter in the sun belt – a region that stretches across the southeastern and southwestern US. But as much as Canadians love to boast about their beef, beer and maple syrup, it’s difficult to imagine a countrywide boycott of Pepi, Coca-Cola and other iconic US brands (how about the iPhone? Nike sneakers? Or Starbucks?) ever getting off the ground. Why? Because, at the end of the day, Canadians love US brands.

    “To suggest Canadians are going to stop drinking Coke and Pepsi is a bit of a stretch, given we are so enmeshed in U.S. consumer culture. A bottom line impact is not likely to occur,” said pollster Nik Nanos.

    “That said, this is going to be a massive headache for U.S. companies doing business in Canada, both from a public relations and consumer relations perspective.”

    While Trump has largely been the target of Canadians’ ire, Trump advisor Peter Navarro on Tuesday apologized for unleashing “verbal hell” on Trudeau during a Fox News interview.

    “I own that,” Navarro said during an appearance at The Wall Street Journal’s CFO conference.

  • Yellowstone Supervolcano: The Steamboat Geyser Just Went Off Again!

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    As scientists continue to tell the public not to worry, the largest geyser in Yellowstone has just gone off for the ninth time. Normally, this geyser is quiet for years at a time, but scientists are now saying this is the new normal.

    Over the past few months, the Steamboat geyser has sprung to life and now seems to be erupting somewhat on a predictable schedule, at least for the moment. According to Forbes, just after 1 a.m. Monday it sent boiling water hundreds of feet into the air for the ninth time this year. Before this recent string of eruptions, Steamboat had been dormant since 2014.

    “Major eruptions over the past several weeks have been occurring with surprising regularity (every 6 to 8 days),” wrote Jamie Farrell, Chief Seismologist of the Yellowstone Volcano Observatory (YVO).

    This news comes as the Kilauea volcano in Hawaii continues to erupt sending lava flows into the ocean and Guatemalan volcano erupted sent pyroclastic flows into a townkilling at least 100 people. 

    Are the world’s volcanoes waking up?  Not if you ask scientists.

    According to Ed Venzke, who manages the database of Smithsonian Institution’s Global Volcanism Program, the concern is understandable. “If it’s not part of people’s daily lives and suddenly it’s in the news, people sort of freak out a bit,” Venzke told Newsweek. But he indicated that there’s no real need to worry about the volcanoes. At any given time, there are almost always at least 20 eruptions unfolding on earth, and so far this year 49 volcanoes have erupted at some point. Venzke said that puts us on track for a pretty standard annual tally compared to recent years.

    Annual totals since 2000 have varied from 63 to 80 eruptions, which means that 49 by mid-June may feel higher than average. But that overlooks a major factor in these statistics, which is the duration of each individual eruption. In this case, an eruption is considered to be ongoing until a volcano has been quiet for three months, this year’s tally was already at 37 on January 1. –Newsweek

    “We don’t see any increase in eruptions, we see an increase in reported eruptions,” Venzke said. “It’s not a real increase, it’s just an increase in our knowledge of what’s going on. You have to know the history of a place to plan and take precautions for the future,” he added.

  • China's Surveillance State Is Using RFID Chips To Track Cars' Movements

    China, the world’s most populous country, continues to devise new methods of keeping tabs on its 1.4 billion citizens. And after the Wall Street Journal reported earlier this week about a powerful new spy camera devised by a team of researchers at Duke University who had, incidentally, received funding from the US government, America’s business newspaper of record is back Wednesday with another stunning report, this time about how China is establishing a new system to track cars using electronic tags. Indeed, WSJ describes the plan to “improve public security”, which will also purportedly help ease extreme congestion in the largest Chinese cities.

    The plan, which is set to be rolled out by July 1, will rely on chips that can be identified thanks to their unique radio frequency signature. Compliance will be voluntary at first, but it will become mandatory for all new vehicles by Jan. 2019.

    Trafic

    Of course, the plan will dramatically expand China’s ability to track its citizens’ every move – something that’s becoming increasingly important as Chinese authorities seek to implement their “social credit score.” 

    social

    China’s surveillance network already includes powerful cameras that can detect an individual’s facial features from 100 yards away, according to WSJ. Meanwhile, the program will have a serious impact on China’s automotive industry, which is feeding the world’s biggest market, with nearly 30 million vehicles expected to be sold this year.

    “It’s all happening in the backdrop of this pretty authoritarian government,” said Ben Green, a fellow at Harvard University’s Berkman Klein Center for Internet and Society who is researching use of data and technology by city governments. “It’s really hard to imagine that the primary use case is not law enforcement surveillance and other forms of social control.”

    Security

    As far as western media outlets are concerned, implementing the network will involve RFID chips being affixed to car windshields. As we reported earlier this year, citing a story published in an obscure trade journal, RFID chips are already being used by several governments – including China’s neighbor the Philippines – to aid in tracking their citizens. The system will register details like a drivers’ license plate number, as well as the color, or colors, of their car. Chinese officials insist that the system won’t continuously track individual vehicles; instead, it will register when cars pass certain tagged landmarks.

    The system will register information such as the license plate number and automobile color, one of the people said. The system will know when vehicles passed checkpoints. But unlike GPS tracking systems, it won’t reveal a car’s position at all times.

    In the U.S. and elsewhere, RFID chips are widely installed on cars for automated toll road payments. They are also used in some fleet vehicles like commercial trucks at areas including ports to track the locations of the vehicles and the goods they are carrying.

    But the Chinese plan “would certainly be largest single program managed by one government in the world,” said Manuel Moreno, vice president at Neology Inc., a San Diego-based company and a major provider of RFID technology systems for automobiles in the U.S. and Mexico.

    While China hasn’t recently released any new information about the plan, China public security’s Traffic Management Research Institute unveiled the draft standards and sought public comments back in 2014. The plan is needed, authorities claimed, to combat traffic and congestion on the country’s increasingly crowded roads – while also helping China safeguard the country against possible terrorist attacks after cars and trucks have been used by assailants across Europe and in North America.

    Still, experts say that collecting personal data like a driver’s exact location isn’t necessary to curb traffic. Instead, “it’s kind of like another tool in the toolbox for mass-surveillance,” said Maya Wang, China researcher at Human Rights Watch. “To be able to track vehicles would definitely add substantial location details to the chain of data points that they already have.”

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 13th June 2018

  • Macron Snaps At Italy Over Stranded Migrant Ship, Rome Hits Back At "Hypocritical" France

    French President Emmanuel Macron says that Italy “playing politics” with a boat full of shipwrecked Libyan refugees denied entry to Italy, and the Italian government has displayed “cynicism and irresponsibility” for closing its ports. 

    Mr Macron’s spokesman Benjamin Griveaux said the French president recalled that “in cases of distress, those with the nearest coastline have a responsibility to respond“.

    There is a degree of cynicism and irresponsibility in the Italian government’s behaviour,” he quoted President Macron as saying.

    Most migrants who survive the perilous voyages from North Africa end up in overcrowded Italian camps, and Italy says its EU partners must ease the burden. –BBC

    The French scolding comes after Italy’s new Interior Minister of less than two weeks, Matteo Salvini, made good on his warning last weekend that “the good times for illegals are over” after years of unchecked migration primarily from North Africa.

    In response to Macron’s comments, Italian Prime Minister Guiseppe Conte hit back – accusing Paris of being hypocritical, cynical and rigid. 

    The statements around the Aquarius affair that come from France are surprising and show a serious lack of knowledge about what is really happening. Italy can not accept hypocritical lessons from countries that have always preferred to turn their backs when it comes to immigration,” Conte’s office said.

    After Malta refused to accept the 629 shipwrecked migrants over the weekend, Spain agreed to take in the refugees – a group which includes 123 unaccompanied minors, 11 other children (though we’re guessing nobody is checking birth certificates) and seven pregnant women. 

    As we reported earlier Tuesday, the refugees will be escorted to Valencia, Spain after SOS Mediterranee said that they had run out of food and would not be able to make it on their own.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Non-governmental organization (NGO) ship MV Aquarius, run by the group SOS Mediterranee, picked up 629 shipwrecked sub-Saharan Africans who were stranded in inflatable boats last weekend with the intention of bringing them to Sicily. The group includes 123 unaccompanied minors, 11 other children and seven pregnant women. 

     

    The minors are aged between 13 and 17 and come from Eritrea, Ghana, Nigeria and Sudan, according to Anelise Borges – a journalist on the ship. 

    French Prime Minister Edouard Philippe said that France is ready to help Spain receive the migrants – though apparently sending a naval vessel to provide the transport currently being footed by Italian taxpayers isn’t something France is doing. 

    This isn’t the first time Italy and France have traded barbs over how to handle Sub-Saharan migrants. Nearly one year ago, Italy slammed France for excluding them from negotiations with Libyan leaders on a political power-sharing deal to reunite the fractured North African country. 

    “There are too many open formats in Libya, too many mediators, too many initiatives,” Italy’s foreign minister, Angelino Alfano, told the Italian newspaper La Stampa.

    As VoA noted last year, Macron’s Libya diplomacy is just one irritant in increasingly tension-filled Franco-Italian relations, in which Macron has been also accused of duplicity and hypocrisy in his diplomatic conduct with Italy. In May, after meeting Gentiloni in Paris, Macron announced: “we have not listened enough to Italy’s cry for help on the migration crisis.” But Macron’s position since hasn’t changed much from Francois Hollande, his predecessor in the Elysee Palace, to the Italian government’s rising anger.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • As The G-7 Implodes, SCO Meeting Confirms The New Century of Multipolarity

    Authored by Federico Pieraccini via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The historical changes we are witnessing have never been so evident as in the last few days. The G7 summit highlighted the limits of the Atlantic alliance, while the SCO meeting opens up unprecedented possibilities for Eurasian integration.

    At the G7 meeting in Canada in recent days, we witnessed unprecedented clashes between Trump and G7 leaders over the imposition of tariffs on trade. We must now conclude that the event has been relegated to irrelevance, as the G7 has heretofore derived its clout from speaking as one voice. Trump even went further, refusing to sign the final draft of the organization’s joint statement after Canadian prime minister Justin Trudeau lashed out at Trump’s trade decisions. Trump showed how little he cares for his allies, leaving the summit a day early to arrive early for the meeting with Kim Jong-un in Singapore to make preparations for the long-awaited encounter between the two leaders.

    In terms of geopolitical contrasts, it is easy to highlight the differences that have been seen between the G7 meeting and the meeting of the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO), held in China and, for the first time, including India and Pakistan as new members. While Putin and Xi met and exchanged praises and medals to celebrate the Sino-Russian strategic relationship as well as their personal friendship, Merkel and the various leaders of the G7 were in animated discussion with Trump over his “America first” policies hurting EU member states economically.

    Returning for a moment to Trump’s escape from the G7 (also to avoid further clashes with his “allies”), it should be remembered that in this shifting puzzle of international relations, Assad was poised to meet with Kim Jong-un right on the eve of the US-DPRK summit. Whether or not the meeting between the leaders of Syria and the DPRK will go ahead, it nevertheless confirms the alliance between Pyongyang and Damascus, underlining how adversaries of the US still try to coordinate and manage between themselves their approaches to Washington’s policies of chaos.

    Clearly both Putin and Xi have every interest in seeing Trump and Kim Jong-un reach an agreement. But at the same time, they are well aware of the situation in the Middle East and Iran that risks plunging the whole region into unprecedented chaos. Putin and Xi are clearly trying to manage the chaos emerging from Washington, as are Assad and Kim in their own own way. In this sense, the repeated aid of Russia and Iran to Qatar is part of a Sino-Russo-Iranian strategy to contain the chaos created by Washington, which has even extended to the Gulf states with the Saudi-led blockade of Qatar. In this regard, even Berlin is beginning to be enticed by the opportunities for the European Union beckoning from the east, this temptation made stronger by the reality that the Atlanticist relationship is hurting Europe through the tariffs and penalties imposed on American geopolitical opponents like Iran.

    European companies have suffered major economic losses as a result of Trump’s suspension of the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA), with European companies facing US sanctions should they continue to do business with Iran. This is only the latest example of undue pressure being placed on the energy strategy of sovereign countries that are theoretically allied to the US. In the same way, the sanctions placed on the Nord Stream 2 project are further widening the cracks in the Atlantic alliance.

    To understand the level of disorder within Europe, the North Atlantic and the Middle East, it is enough to consider the attack on Mohammed bin Salman almost two months ago, with Israel on the one hand boasting about agreements with Iran for a mutual abstention in the Daraa affaire and Trump finding nothing better to do than to break every alliance in sight through his commencement of a trade war.

    It is clear that the old unipolar order no longer exists and that we now find ourselves in a multipolar situation, courtesy of the isolationist direction of the United States. This enables the further smoothening of existing divergence between nations in Asia, the Middle East and part of Europe.

    Europe has the opportunity to use Trump’s “America First” policy as a pivot to expand its network of relationships and convergence of interests with more countries outside of the EU or NATO. For once, the EU could use the weapon of its union of many moderately powerful countries to increase its negotiating power with the United States.

    But the reality is very different at the moment, with Europe being in the middle of an internal struggle that has been ongoing for some time now. The wave of new “populist” parties, both of the right and left, has served as a repository for an inevitable transfer of votes following the disasters of the unipolar period (1989-2014). This has also upset the previous balance of power within the European elites.

    The root causes of this “populist” political change lie in the new multipolar world order that has had a ripple effect on the policies of individual European countries.

    The neoliberal ideology, broadly acquiesced to by the “left”, has remained anchored to the diktat of the “old” unipolar world order, which saw Washington as the only hegemonic force.

    What remains in the European political landscape seems to be divided into two streams. On the one side, there is a minority clearly eyeing a sort of neoconservatism 2.0, a sort of rehash of Reaganism. On the other side, there is a complete rejection of any of the faces currently participating in the political system.

    For Europe it is a question of seeing what this new political phase will produce with regard to international issues like the sanctions against Russia and Iran. The behavior of European governments will give an idea of the extent to which they intend to obtain some sort of independence in conducting multipolar relations that are not necessarily linked to Washington.

    In a sense, Berlin, London, Paris and Rome are now at the center of the concept of multipolar relationships. It is interesting to look at how strategists and newspaper editorialists in China and Russia look at what is going on in Europe, particular in Italy. While there is trust, there is also the awareness that there is still a European reluctance to favor development towards the East at the expense of relations with the US.

    The take-home message that Trump seems to be giving Europeans is that it is pointless for them to remain as butlers who wait on Washington. We are living in a defining moment that will shape the the near-term future of vast areas of the world. There are many situations that are moving forward, bringing us closer to the moment where the West will either find common ground or splinter. Factors hitherto appearing unrelated are now serving to have different countries coalesce into a common destiny.

    The summit between Trump and Kim Jong-un will lay the groundwork that will reveal whether Washington really wants to start talking or is only buying for time. Given the recent behavior and attitude of Trump and the political figures around him, the summit, like the foreign policy of Trump’s administration in general, becomes unpredictable and difficult to decipher. If there is one thing that unites the leaders of the G7, the SCO and Kim Jong-un, it is precisely the difficulty of relating to a declining world power and a leader who has no strategic vision; the common suffering stemming from an internal struggle within the United States to impose upon the world its antiquated and declining strategic vision.

  • Israeli Commando Trains White South African Farmers In "Krav Maga" As Violent Attacks Soar

    South Africa has been freed from the death grip of former President Jacob Zuma, whose tenure at the head of the government was marred by years of corruption scandals and allegations of abuse of power. But the country’s wealthy landowners might soon find themselves wishing for a return to the bad old days as Cyril Ramaphosa, the country’s new president, moves ahead with his plan to heal “the original sin” from South Africa’s colonial past by redistributing land (without compensation) from wealthy white farmers to poorer black farmers.

    What’s worse, the country’s economic malaise has been exacerbated by a severe drought that until recently had left Cape Town, the country’s largest city, only months away from “Day Zero” – the point at which the government would need to seriously intensify its water-rationing efforts as the city struggles with its worst drought in a century (fortunately, early rationing efforts have managed to push the crisis point back until 2019, though that could easily change).

    Amid threats from government politicians that “the time for reconciliation is over”, there were 74 farm murders and 638 attacks primarily on white farmers last year, according to minority rights group AfriForum.

    “Current murder tendencies indicate that we will lose more people on farms than in the past three years,” AfriForum’s Ian Cameron recently wrote.

    So with South Africa coming ever closer to resembling the dystopian hellscape from the popular sci-fi movie series “Mad Max”, white South African farmers are faced with two unpalatable choices:

    1) Give everything up and seek asylum in Australia

    After those threats from Malema and Ramaphosa – and on the back of Australia’s offer, RT reports this week that more than 200 farmers from South Africa have applied for humanitarian visas in Australia after allegedly suffering attacks for being white, according to the Australian Home Affairs Ministry.

    “The type of criteria they of course have to meet – or the key one – is evidence of persecution, so that’s exactly what we will be looking at,” Home Affairs Deputy Secretary Malisa Golightly said.

    Home Affairs said 89 refugee visa applications relating to 213 people had been received, although they did not specify their ethnicity or any other details.

    or

    2) Stand and Fight!

    Sky News is reporting that White South African farmers – who are facing the brunt of the president’s “land redistribution” efforts amid a surge in violent attacks against them – are employing an Israeli self-defense expert to teach them survival techniques.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The training is being led by Idan Abolnik, a former Israeli special forces commando, who is teaching farmers hand-to-hand combat and weapons handling.

    South

    Abolnik’s program costs about 20,000 rand (roughly $1,500) per person for an intensive two-week training course. During the course, Abolnik teaches the farmers Krav Maga, a self-defense system developed by the Israeli Defense Force that has become increasingly popular abroad.

    “It’s open to everyone and anyone who wants a specially designed system for farmers. We train them to deal with a variety of different attacks,” Abolnik said during an interview with South Africa’s News24 TV channel.

    Despite being a minority in South Africa, white farmers own upwards of 70% of the country’s farmland. Simmering resentments over the country’s Apartheid past have inspired the new government, led by President Cyril Ramaphosa, to announce a plan to redistribute land to more black farmers – a plan that bears a disturbing resemblance to neighboring Zimbabwe’s actions in the late 1990s that plunged that country’s economy into chaos.

  • Caitlin Johnstone: 12 Tips For Making Sense Of The World

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    In an environment that is saturated with mass media propaganda, it can be hard to figure out which way’s up, let alone get an accurate read on what’s going on in the world. Here are a few tips I’ve learned which have given me a lot of clarity in seeing through the haze of spin and confusion.

    Taken separately they don’t tell you a lot, but taken together they paint a very useful picture of the world and why it is the way it is.

    1. It’s always ultimately about acquiring power.

    In the quest to understand why governments move in such irrational ways, why expensive, senseless wars are fought while homeless people die of exposure on the streets, why millionaires and billionaires get richer and richer while everyone else struggles to pay rent, why we destroy the ecosystem we depend on for our survival, why one elected official tends to advance more or less the same harmful policies and agendas as his or her predecessor, people often come up with explanations which don’t really hold water.

    The most common of these is probably the notion that all of these problems are due to the malignant influence of one of two mainstream political parties, and if the other party could just get in control of the situation all the problems would go away. Other explanations include the belief that humans are just intrinsically awful, blaming minorities like Jews or immigrants, blaming racism and white supremacy, or going all the way down wild and twisted rabbit holes into theories about reptilian secret societies and baby-eating pedophile cabals. But really all of mankind’s irrational behavior can be explained by the basic human impulse to amass power and influence over one’s fellow humans, combined with the fact that sociopaths tend to rise to positions of power.

    Our evolutionary ancestors were pack animals, and the ability to rise in social standing in one’s pack determined crucial matters like whether one got first or last dibs on food or got to reproduce. This impulse to rise in our pack is hardwired deeply into our evolutionary heritage, but when left unchecked due to a lack of empathy, and when expanded into the globe-spanning 7.6 billion human pack we now find ourselves in due to ease of transportation and communication, it can lead to individuals who will keep amassing more and more power until they wield immense influence over entire clusters of nations.

    2. Money rewards sociopathy.

    The willingness to do anything to get ahead, to claw your way to the top, to betray whomever you need to, to throw anyone under the bus, to step on anyone to pass them in the rat race, will be rewarded in our current system. Being willing to underpay employees, cheat the legal system, and influence legislators will be rewarded exponentially more. People with a sense of empathy are often unwilling to do such things, whereas sociopaths and psychopaths are.

    About four percent of the population are sociopaths, and about one percent are psychopaths, with some five to fifteen percent falling somewhere along the borderline. The less empathy you have, the further you are willing to go, and the further up the ladder you can climb.

    3. Wealth kills empathy.

    If that weren’t bad enough, studies have shown that controlling large amounts of wealth actually destroys one’s sense of compassion for one’s fellow man. When you are able to use wealth to obtain everything from security to loyalty to personal relationships, you no longer have to be tuned in to the brain’s empathy center the rest of humanity depends on to get an accurate reading on what’s going on with the people we’re surrounded by. Most people need to be constantly feeling around their families, coworkers, employers, friends and acquaintances in order to ensure their own safety, social standing and security, whereas a wealthy person can simply purchase those things. Being born into wealth or having it for a long time can prevent that sense of empathy from being as strong as it is in the rest of the population.

    4. Money is power.

    2014 Princeton study showed that ordinary Americans have essentially zero influence over their nation’s policy and behavior regardless of how they vote, while wealthy Americans have a great deal of influence. This is because the ability to use corporate lobbying and campaign donations effectively amounts to the legalized bribery of elected officials, which means that money translates directly into political power. This creates a ruling class which is naturally incentivized to use their influence to increase their own wealth while decreasing everyone else’s, because since power is relative, the less money everyone else has the more power the ruling class has.

    This is why billionaires keep hoarding more and more wealth while using legalized bribery to stifle economic justice legislation. It isn’t because they want to be able to buy thousands of luxury cars or dozens of private jets; they can only use one at a time the same as everyone else. They hoard wealth to keep the rest of the population from having it. Because money equals power, spreading wealth around would be tantamount to making everyone king, and because power is relative, making everyone king would mean that no one is king.

    Rulers, historically, do not give up power easily, and this elite wealthy class is no exception. Hence all their aggressive attempts to suppress any movement against the status quo from the unwashed masses.

    5. This same ruling class controls the media.

    It’s common knowledge that most media is controlled by plutocrats, whether it’s the old money plutocrats who control the legacy media or the new money Silicon Valley plutocrats who control much of the new media. Media control is an essential component of rule; this has always been the case, since the days when kings would order dissident books burned and bishops would torture dissident orators to death. This is why the first thing a new plutocrat does as soon as rising to a certain level of wealth is start buying up media influence, like Jeff Bezos did when he bought the Washington Post in 2013. Bezos bought WaPo not because he is a stupid businessman who thought newspapers were about to make a lucrative resurgence, but because he is a brilliant businessman who knows that the status quo he is building his empire upon requires a propaganda firm that the public will trust and believe.

    6. People are always manipulating each other.

    Cultivating an acute awareness of when you are being manipulated, and considering whether someone might have a motive to do so, is an essential component to making sense of the world.

    It is very rare to encounter someone who won’t try to manipulate you in any way. Generally people you’ll encounter in your life will try to influence the way you perceive them and your relationship to them, they’ll try to pull you in in some ways and push you out in others, try to hook you up to their personal agendas and goals and shape you in a way that fits with their shape. There’s nothing inherently malevolent in such behavior, it’s just what people do and what they always have done. Again, humans are social creatures, and we do what we can to increase our standing within our social circles.

    The big problem is when skillful manipulators find their way into positions of large-scale influence like government or media. Unfortunately, these are the types who tend to get elevated into such positions, because they can manipulate their way in, and generally they do so for reasons of personal ambition rather than altruism. These skillful manipulators form an essential echelon of the ruling class’ loyal servants, and are the minds behind the pro-establishment narratives you’ll suddenly see circulated from think tanks to media platforms to the establishment lackeys on Capitol Hill.

    7. Society is made of narrative.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Most of human experience is filtered through our mental stories about it, from our sense of self, to our ideas about who we are, to our beliefs about how we’re supposed to behave in society, to what money is and how it works, to where power exists and who we’re supposed to obey. All of these things are purely conceptual constructs which only exist in the realm of thought; a “dollar” exists to the extent that we’ve all agreed to pretend it’s a real thing and that it has a certain amount of purchasing power. At any time we could collectively decide to change the rules about how power functions or what money is and how it operates, and then instantly the rule of the elite class would be over without anyone firing a shot. It really would be that simple.

    That’s how powerful a force narrative is, which is why the ruling plutocrats fight so hard to keep us from seizing control of it. This is why whistleblowers and outlets like WikiLeaks are aggressively and constantly smeared and demonized in the corporate media; if they can create suspicion of truth-tellers then they can keep them from being trusted, and thus keep them from being believed. This tool has been used to minimize the impact of everything from on the ground reports of what’s happening in Syria to leak drops from Edward Snowden; if you can create enough suspicion of someone it doesn’t matter if they’re speaking 100 percent truth; nobody will believe them, and thus the dominant narrative will remain the same.

    Maintaining an awareness that there is always an unending battle to control the narrative and manipulate it to advance plutocratic interests is an essential part of understanding the world.

    8. The lines between nations are imaginary.

    Those lines drawn on the map between countries are pure narrative as well; they’re only as real as the collective public agrees to pretend they are. The ruling elites know this and exploit this. They don’t think in terms of nations and governments, they think in terms of individuals and groups of individuals.

    Key strategic region in the Middle East? No need to take over the whole country, just flood it with extremist groups who are loyal to your agendas and control its oil fields. Primo naval real estate in the southern hemisphere? No need to annex it and plant your country’s flag there, just secure enough influence over the important moving parts using corporate contracts, trade agreements, military/intelligence treaties and secret deals and you can use it however you want.

    This is why I am dismissive of arguments that “Israel controls America” or “America controls Europe”. There is no “Israel” or “America”; they’re made-up ideas which rulers once upon a time treated as real, but in the modern days of nationless plutocracy they no longer do. There are individuals, there are corporations, there are government agencies, there are factions and groups, and these are what the ruling elites deal with. Governmental structures are only tools which are used by the ruling elites for the purpose of manipulation, control, and military violence, and they only do so insofar as it is useful. The idea of real nations and governments is a cutesy fairy tale sold to the masses so they won’t see the manipulations.

    9. Powerful forces are naturally incentivized to collaborate with each other toward mutual interests.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    You can be a low-grade millionaire and still live like a relatively normal civilian, but once you start obtaining giant amounts of wealth control you need to start collaborating with existing power structures or they’ll snuff you out to prevent you from rocking their boat, because again, money equals power. This is why Jeff Bezos contracts with the CIA and sits on a Pentagon advisory board, and it’s why Facebook and Google collaborate extensively with government agencies; they never would have been allowed to grow to their size if they had not. Plutocratic dynasties which have been in place since long before Amazon, Facebook and Google figured this out many generations ago, and have agreed to push forward in a direction of mutual interest that doesn’t upset the status quo that their wealth is built upon.

    This is extremely true of the west, where an effective empire has been created by a complex transnational alliance of mostly western plutocrats, but it is true outside of that empire as well; there are power alliances to be found everywhere that there is power.

    10. There is an immense amount of wealth that can be grabbed in the chaos of war and conflict.

    In the same way that existing power structures are naturally incentivized to quash any emerging power which would upset their status quo, alliances of power structures push to crush non-aligned power structures the world over. Whenever you see the tight western alliances and their media propaganda arms attacking the interests of Russia, China, Syria, Iran, Venezuela etc., you are seeing an alliance of power structures working to disrupt the interests of another alliance of power structures in order to absorb their assets.

    The chaotic, Wild West environments that these conflicts create allow for an amount of underhanded looting and pillaging that you could never get away with in your own country, in the exact same way the colonialists and conquistadors of old could never have gotten away with brazenly grabbing gold, land and slaves from their fellow Europeans in Madrid or Rome but were given no legal trouble in the new world. The colonialists and conquistadors pushed into the Americas, Africa and Asia on the pretense of spreading Christianity and civilization; modern day conquerers push into non-aligned power structures on the pretense of spreading freedom and democracy in precisely the same way.

    This chaos doesn’t require direct military conflict to be profitable; the uncritical enmity against Russia that the western plutocratic alliance has manufactured with its media control has allowed them to be blamed for everything from incriminating WikiLeaks documents to a corporate raid by Ukrainian oligarchs without any questions asked. Anyone who has ever had to deal personally with a sociopath knows how much they love to exploit the gray areas that chaotic situations give them, and geopolitical conflicts create those situations in spades.

    11. The neocons are always wrong.

    This one’s really easy. If you ever want to be on the right side of history for a foreign policy debate, look at what Bush-era PNAC neocons like John Bolton and Bill Kristol are saying about it, and take the opposite position. Neocon thought leaders have been loudly and catastrophically wrong about everything since the turn of the century, from Afghanistan to Iraq to Libya to Syria, and they’re not about to start being right now.

    12. The push towards truth always starts with yourself.

    You can’t out-manipulate seasoned manipulators. The main error most people make when trying to deal with a sociopath is to try and manipulate them back. Don’t even try. They have years of experience on you because they literally have done nothing else. While you were laughing and crying and worrying and connecting and relating to people, they were working out how to play humans like Garry Kasparov worked out how to play chess. And when you have literal teams of sociopaths collaborating together to amass power, you my dear child, do not have a chance. Don’t play their game. You will lose.

    The only way to win this is to set your compass resolutely to “true.” Always be honest with yourself. Find all the different ways that you are manipulating others and see them and acknowledge them. Find your tribal allegiances and your desire to be right, and tip your hat to their existence. The more self-aware we are, the less levers we have to be manipulated by. If you are blindly partisan or loyal to a particular faction, that makes you gullible to propaganda because your wishful thinking and your desire to be right come into play. Get honest with yourself about who you are and what you want, and you will start to become an un-playable piece on the board.

    If we can’t beat these bastards with truth, we don’t deserve to win.

    * * *

    Internet censorship is getting pretty bad, so best way to keep seeing my daily articles is to get on the mailing list for my website, so you’ll get an email notification for everything I publish. My articles and podcasts are entirely reader and listener-funded, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics on Twitter, checking out my podcast, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, or buying my bookWoke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers.

  • De Niro Expands Nobu Empire With Sushi-Condo-Hotel Scheme, Expects Revenues To Top $1 Billion

    Sushi restaurant and luxury hotel chain, Nobu Hospitality LLC, expects to top $1 billion in revenue within five years as it expands into the real estate market. Partners Robert De Niro, Meir Teper and chef Nobu Matsuhisa unveiled 550 condos and 36 luxury-hotel suites above a Toronto Nobu restaurant. 

    Nobu, founded in 1994 with one sushi restaurant in New York, has swelled to over 40 locations, including Las Vegas and London, according to Nobu Hospitality CEO Trevor Horwell. 

    “It’s quite a rapid growth,” Horwell said, breaking ground at the Toronto project on Mercer Street, in the city’s entertainment district, Monday. “Normally in our restaurants we can have over 100,000 customers a year. All we’ve got to do is convert 10 to 15 percent of those customers to fill our hotels. So that’s why we went into hotels.” –Bloomberg

    The project was announced last year and sold out in three months, while Nobu plans to complete the $231 million two-tower Toronto project in two-and-a-half years. 

    Hotel rooms will cost up to $600 per night, and condo units – most of which have been pre-sold to local residents, will average $650,000, according to Josh Zagdanski, VP for high rise at Toronto-based Madison Group.

    I’ve done movies here, a festival here and it’s a logical place for us to open,” said De Niro, who also attended the groundbreaking, complete with gold shovels and Japanese drummers. –Bloomberg

    Nobu has also committed to two more mixed-use developments in Los Cabos, Mexico and Sao Paulo, Brazil – and is looking to expand into Taipei, Hong Kong, Jakarta for at least 10 such projects over the next decade, while adding five hotels and restaurants per year. 

    New York is also on their radar, however an earlier mixed-use project fell through due to zoning issues, according to Horwell. “We want to do New York without a doubt, but it has to be special,” he said. “If we did a mixed-use, it’d have to be the best, because there’s some great developments there.”

    De Niro says he’s hoping to see a Nobu resort in the coming years, and has his eye on Bermuda. “There’s quite a few things in the works,” he said.

    One thing we’re sure of – Donald Trump won’t be allowed into any of them. 

  • "Do You like It, Senator, When The Deep State Works Against You?"

    Authored by Jeremiah Johnson (Nom de plume of  retired Green Beret of the US Army Special Forces ) via SHTFplan.com,

    There’s an old expression: “What’s good for the goose is good for the gander.” In this case, another old expression is even better: “Turnabout is fair play.” We are all still reeling from the Obama years of “transparency,” and “change you can believe in,” that both equated to Doublethink and Doublespeak. Under Obama, everything was hidden from the American people: Benghazi, Fast and Furious, Ukraine/McCain/Nuland, and the Arab Spring. Nancy Pelosi (on the several thousand-paged Obamacare legislation): “We’ll just have to read it after its finished to know what’s in it.”

    Democrats or Republicans, they are merely far-left Marxists or center-Marxists; nevertheless, they picked up a taste of their own medicine last week. An article was released on 6/7/18, entitled “Conspiracy Theory Proven Fact as Cops Remove Senator from Wal-Mart Converted Into Detention Center.”

    The incident this article describes is very, very important: please read on.

    U.S. Senator, Jeff Merkley (D-OR), attempted to enter a “shuttered/closed” Wal-Mart on 6/1/18, for the purpose of ascertaining whether the children of illegal aliens were being held there. The Wal-Mart is located in Brownsville, Texas. Here’s an excerpt of that article:

    All the windows and doors to the facility – which is a shuttered Walmart – have been blacked out with window tinting.  [Senator] Merkley arrived and was immediately asked to leave by a female government worker. One of the country’s most powerful lawmakers then demanded to speak with a supervisor. Instead of complying with his wishes in the name of transparency, the shadowy government workers called Brownsville police on the U.S. Senator. After 10 minutes of waiting and being confronted by local police, he was denied entry and forced to leave.

    Later, in a Facebook live video, Merkley remarked: “When an organization has something to hide, not allowing members of Congress to see it, in a democracy, is completely unacceptable…What’s going on is an effort to prevent the press from being able to report to the American people what is happening.  And that’s simply unacceptable.”

    Subsequent to all this, it was learned that Southwest Key Programs runs the detention facility. They released this statement three days after Merkley’s statement, on 6/6/18 that ties in to the big picture. Take note of the government agency behind it all, their name emboldened, and their cover story bottom-line, also emboldened for you:

    “We regret having to turn away Senator Merkley at our Casa Padre shelter.  The U.S. Office of Refugee Resettlement (ORR) prohibits any facility from allowing visits that have not been approved by them, even if it is a U.S. Senator. With ORR approval, Southwest Key shelters have welcomed elected and other public officials at our facilities in the past, and will continue to do so, because we are proud of the caring environment we provide these children. We have reached out to the Senator and connected with his staff because we would like to see this happen.”

    Can’t you just imagine Neil Diamond’s “Coming to America” playing in the back of your mind? Or the old Coca-Cola ad in the early ‘70’s with everyone holding hands and singing, “I’d like to teach the world to sing, in perfect harmony…” Can’t you hear it now?

    The “welcoming shelter,” that welcomed Senator Merkley by calling the Brownsville Police on him and denying his entrance. The “caring environment” just couldn’t bear, perhaps, to disturb the children?

    Senator Merkley has visited another facility at the McAllen Border station where he pointed out that he saw hundreds of children kept in chain-link fenced-off areas (basically, cages). The White House released a statement that claimed the Senator was “spreading blatant lies.” Of course the actions had to be politicized by both sides.

    But let’s go a little bit further, and bring the punch line of the comedy (or tragedy) in focus. Another statement came out, as well. Here it is:

    At 2 pm on a Friday, the Senator asked to visit a secure DHS facility over the weekend where children are present and we worked with him [the Senator] to provide him access. This presented obvious and serious privacy concerns – not to mention disrupting operations. He was able to visit the facility on Sunday.

    So, we learn that Southwest Key Programs runs the facility for the DHS. That falls in line perfectly, as DHS has subcontracted out the management of the place to them. Such actions place a layer of insulation between them and the facility. By “corporatizing” the facility instead of having it run by DHS outright, it removes it from direct government oversight by placing it in the hands of a private corporation. Simultaneously, the DHS still controls it by maintaining federal bureaucratic oversight.

    Isn’t it amazing? If a U.S. citizen were to carry out such a “slicky” maneuver, they would be charged with forming a shell corporation for the purposes of concealing another venture and perhaps thrown into a cell…indefinitely…never being charged with anything because that isn’t necessary anymore. Charges are unnecessary, because with indefinite detention being authorized by Congress, what is necessary?

    The only thing that’s necessary is that you be placed under investigation; investigation is the key word, now.

    Interestingly enough, Senator Merkley was never permitted to visit, nor did he visit that facility on Sunday, 6/3/18, or any other time. Guess who made that statement?

    DHS Press Secretary Tyler Houlton, the same man who just a few months ago informed us that the new DHS policy would be to gather up the names of journalists, reporters, writers, bloggers, radio show hosts, and anyone in the Independent News Media that mentioned or wrote about the DHS. He referred to Independent Media reporters as “tinfoil hat-wearing conspiracy theorists.”

    In truth, there’s a lot more to this entire scenario than meets the eye. Let’s summarize it.

    1. The ORR as mentioned previously was formed long before President Trump took office. This shows a continuation of Deep State policies that run without being interrupted by a change in administrations.

    2. There is no transparency in government, even when such transparency is demanded by a government official (in this case, a United States Senator) who has been elected to represent the people.

    3. The three-party system of checks and balances is nothing but a desiccated husk, the shell of a cicada clinging to the bark of a tree.

    4. The irony: politicians do not like it when they are subjected to censorship and denied access to the truth…exactly the same way they have denied American citizens from the truth with endless legislation and bureaucracy, closed-door sessions and meetings, and other tactics employed by the rulers on the ruled.

    5. This is just one little facility. Just one. Think it ends there? Think again: this is just the tip of the iceberg.

    6. If the administration knows about such things as these “happy welcoming centers,” then it is either powerless to stop them, or it supports them.

    7. Senator Merkley said that it is “unacceptable” for a “democracy” to prevent a member of congress from investigating something…or to keep “the press” from reporting it to the people.

    This last item, #7, is the crux of the problem: too many middlemen between the event and the American people, to include elected officials and bureaucrats, and the press. Where is the news? Where has the news been? Why, all mainstream media (MSM) is Associated Press approved, and every paper marches in lock step…it is canned, controlled, and censored content. It is deliberately crafted to mold the public consciousness into the “social conscience” of groupthink…tearing down all normative and traditional beliefs and supplanting them with malleable groupthink.

    It is all form and no substance. The MSM is a 70 year-old prostitute with a made-up, plastic face: a mannequin without a soul, living in a $10 million dollar mansion and claiming to be an average citizen, reporting on “grass roots” issues. Those issues are mere tabloids: bread and circuses provided to the masses to obfuscate and divert focus away from the theft, the ever-increasing surveillance, and the never-ending wars of expansion and global dominance. These tabloid issues exploit the deterioration of society. Even all our crumbling infrastructure is nothing more than a true picture of how we have become a potholed, banana-republic with run-down highways and broken bridges and highwaymen with badges robbing us for ad valorem at will, or worse.

    The politicians are even more heinous than the press, especially since they control the press, equating “freedom to fawn” with license to write. Politicians lie in the campaign and then enter office to do exactly the opposite of what they promised. They cannot be held accountable. It is a business: the business of politics. It is a cycle, where the red clown faces off against the blue clown, and the winning clown sprouts fangs of Stephen King’s “It” as soon as the swearing in is completed. Government is no longer in the hands of the people: the people are necessary for labor and to keep the machine running, but we are ruled, not governed.

    Last week a U.S. Senator received the same spoonful of Castor oil that Congress has been giving to the American people for decades. More than that occurred, however, as another example emerged of lack of balanced accountability and the control of the Shadow government. Working through and aided by bureaucracies…obscure ones created under executive order but without Congressional oversight or expiration date…this Shadow government is one step away from seizing power and smothering out the last sparks of freedom in this country forever.

    It is dangerous to write this article. It is dangerous to write these words, and this comes straight out of the mouths of bureaucrats and government officials. Others will also smear the words: anonymous or masked expletive-laden vitriol spouted by the trolls. They are lackeys, either paid for or indirectly supporting the stance of that Shadow government. The open government and the Shadow government have vested interests in one another, for now. Make no mistake: they mutually support one another.

    There is a written document much greater than mine, however, that has been smeared and denounced over time.  The document’s greatest detractors, ironically, are not the ones who openly denounce and revile it. The true detractors are the complacent ones…the ones who do not exercise the very God-given rights affirmed and championed by this written document: the Constitution of the United States of America.

    It is in this vein that I claim those rights given to me before birth, and affirmed within the First Amendment of the Constitution of the United States: the right to freedom of speech and freedom of the press. Someone may need these words: someone who is struggling whether or not to take a stand within their heart and maybe in their family, workplace, or community. Maybe it will make a difference for at least one, and one is more than none. The First Amendment needs to be exercised if we’re ever to have a government by “We the People” ever again.

  • US Senate Accelerates Hypersonic Defenses Citing "Fierce Competition" By China And Russia

    The U.S. lawmakers have introduced bipartisan legislation that aims to improve missile defense capabilities of the United States. The U.S. Senators Brian Schatz (D-Hawaii) and Dan Sullivan (R-Alaska) introduced S. 2980 – Integrated Missile Defense Act of 2018 on May 24, which was read twice and referred to the Committee on Armed Services. The bill directs new efforts to further accelerate hypersonic missile defenses and space-based sensors, as the cold war for emerging technologies, including hy­per­son­ics be well underway against China and Russia.

    “Last year, Congress – working closely with the Trump administration – undertook much-needed efforts to dramatically bolster and advance our country’s missile defense,” said Senator Sullivan.

    “This year, continuing to work in a bipartisan fashion, our bill finally authorizes the full development and deployment of a space-based sensor layer. This important measure further helps to ready our missile defenses and make them increasingly interoperable and effective against an ever-evolving missile threat.

    Additionally, this bill seeks to better align our missile defenses with the 2018 National Defense Strategy including more quickly fielding advanced capabilities to address future threats, better integrating our missile defense systems, and seeking to collaborate more with allies and partners on missile defense technologies, Senator Sullivan added.

    “When it comes to North Korea, we can hope for the best while still planning for the worst,” Senator Schatz said.

    “I strongly support diplomacy, but in the meantime, this bill beefs up our missile defense system and protects Hawaii, Alaska, and the U.S. mainland from rogue missile threats. It also speeds up our efforts to protect U.S. forces and allies in the region by improving our ability to detect, track, discriminate, and intercept increasingly sophisticated future missile threats,” Schatz added.

    S. 2980 is co-sponsored by Senators Ted Cruz (R-TX), Gary Peters (D-MI) and Tom Cotton (R-AR). Here is the overview of the bill:

    • Develops and Deploys Space-based Sensors: Mandates the development deployment of space-based sensors as soon as practicable.

    • Readies Our Defenses: Mandates an analysis of accelerating the development and deployment of the Redesigned Kill Vehicle (RKV) to Missile Field 4 at Fort Greely.

    • Promotes a More Integrated Missile Defense: Directs a study on an integrated air-and-missile defense architecture to protect against evolving threats outlined in the 2018 National Defense Strategy.

    • Accelerates Our Defenses Against Hypersonic Threats: Directs the acceleration of our hypersonic missile defenses and links them to the deployment of space-based sensors.

    • Focuses of Allies: Expresses that the U.S. should work with allies and trusted partners to share missile defense capabilities.

    • More Rigorous Testing: Seeks to discourage a risk adverse culture of missile defense testing and promotes a more rigorous testing regime to deliver capabilities at the “speed of relevance.”

    Senators Schatz and Sullivan stated that the Secretary of Defense “shall submit to the congressional defense committees a report” detailing how the department plans on accelerating its hypersonic missile defense program, within the next three months.

    The Senators also quoted a variety of high-ranking military officials, who warn about China and Russia acquiring emerging technologies, including hy­per­son­ic missiles that could fundamentally change the landscape of war against the West.

    • General Joe Dunford, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, stated, “The United States military is in a fierce competition to harness the benefits of emerging technologies, including hy­per­son­ics … as these developments will fundamentally change the character of war.”.

    • General John Hyten, Commander of United States Strategic Command (USSTRATCOM) stated, “China is swiftly developing and testing a hy­per­son­ic-glide vehicle capability, a technology used to defeat ballistic missile defenses.”

    • General Hyten also stated, “President Putin announced Russia’s development of … a maneuverable hypersonic glide vehicle,” which “only reinforce Russia’s commitment to develop weapons designed to intimidate and coerce the U.S. and its allies.”.

    • Admiral Harry Harris, Commander of USPACOM stated, “China and Russia continue to develop and operationally field advanced counter-intervention technologies which include fielding and testing of highly maneuverable re-entry vehicle/warhead (i.e., hypersonic weapons) capabilities that challenge U.S. strategic, operational, and tactical freedom of movement and maneuver. China and Russia also present other notable challenges in the form of cruise missiles and small-unmanned aircraft systems (s–UAS) which fly different trajectories, making them hard to detect, acquire, track, and intercept.”

    It seems as China and Russia are surpassing the United States in acquiring these emerging technologies that the Pentagon has not just tried to develop for years, but squandered trillions of dollars in failed Middle East wars. The consequence? Well, China and or Russia could soon have the ability to strike the heartland of the United States with a hypersonic missile — rendering all missile shields useless.

    That is precisely why U.S. Senators are rushing to accelerate the hypersonic missile program because they understand China and Russia now have an edge. The slow death of American exceptionalism continues.

  • Ronald Stoeferle: Gold Is Dirt Cheap Right Now

    Authored by Adam Taggart via PeakProsperity,com,

    …and a new bull market for the metal is beginning.

    Fresh from releasing his exhaustive 230-page annual report titled In Gold We Trust, Ronald Stoerferle joins us to summarize his forecast for the yellow metal.

    Stoerferle, an author of several books on Austrian economics and head of strategy and portofolio management at Incrementum AG, concludes that gold is extremely cheap right now in dollar terms. And he sees a new bull market beginning for the precious metal — one likely to quickly build momentum as the next (and long overdue) financial market correction arrives.

    We’re at the beginning of a new stage of a bull market.

    We’ve seen a massive correction with a big drawdown, but we’re now seeing the Commitment of Traders report suggesting that there’s been a washout. We’re seeing that sentiment is really negative. We’re seeing that nobody really cares about gold and mining stocks, and especially about silver. Silver is probably the biggest contrarian investment, though silver mining stocks are probably even more contrarian at the moment.

    We all know that the herd behavior in the sector is getting more extreme. I think it has got to do with career risk in the financial industry, so nobody really wants to make a contrarian call. But once we go above this $1,360-$1,380 resistance, which is also the neckline of a large inverse head & shoulder formation, I think gold will hit $1,500, $1,600 pretty quickly.

    The most important thing is: in comparison to all the monetary printing that we’ve seen in the last couple of years, gold got significantly cheaper. Gold, in monetary terms, is dirt cheap at the moment. We’re basically at the same levels like in 1971 when it comes to the gold backing of the US dollar. So gold is a bargain at this level.

    Of course, we need some sort of catalyst. I think one of the main catalysts will probably be recession fears coming up and the greater volatility in equity markets that’s going to go hand in hand. And we’ll see it sooner or later.

    We should not forget that stocks have been trading at or close to the all-time highs, that real estate has been doing really well, that bond markets have been doing well, that cryptocurrencies have been kind of stealing the show, that people regained trust in the financial system, in banks, and even in politicians. Inflation is not a big concern at the moment. We’re seeing rising rates and so on. Let’s face it: those things are not an extremely positive environment for gold. But still, it’s been doing pretty well.

    If those headwinds become tailwinds, meaning that there will be some volatility kicking in in equity markets, that the bond markets start cracking, that people start losing trust in the system again — early indications of which it looks like we may be seeing here in 2018 — that’s going to be the point in time when gold will pick up momentum big time.

    And the other big thing is that the whole world is increasingly trying to diversify out of the US dollar. We’re coming to a multipolar currency system sooner or later. That’s a long process. This year we’ve seen the introduction of the oil futures in Shanghai — that’s a really big development — volumes are enormous in Shanghai. Nobody would have expected that. And that’s just another nail in the coffin of the US dollar.

    And, of course, all those countries that are trying to avoid the US dollar in their trade, they are big holders of gold. So I think within the course of the next crisis, I think there’s might chance of a revaluation of gold.

    Click the play button below to listen to Chris’ interview with Ronald Stoeferle (49m:22s).

  • Trump Credits Presidential Trash-Talking In Diplomatic Accord: "Without The Rhetoric We Wouldn't Be Here"

    Less than a year ago, President Trump dropped his first MOAB in the war of words with 35-year-old North Korean leader Kim Jong Un – warning him “best not make any more threats to the United States,” or North Korea “will be met with fire and fury like the world has never seen.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Two days later, Kim threatened a “simultaneous strike” which would rain down “historic enveloping fire at Guam” within weeks. 

    Weeks later, Trump told the U.N. that America would “totally destroy” North Korea and it’s leader, “Rocket Man” Kim Jong Un – a nickname he would continue to use over the ensuing weeks and months. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hitting back a few days after Trump’s speech, Kim threatened to “tame the mentally deranged U.S. dotard with fire” :

    “I am now thinking hard about what response he could have expected when he allowed such eccentric words to trip off his tongue. Whatever Trump might have expected, he will face results beyond his expectation. I will surely and definitely tame the mentally deranged U. S. dotard with fire.”

    *drops mic* 

    Now, President Trump credits his tough-talk with Kim as a major factor in yesterday’s successful summit – telling Fox News “without the rhetoric we wouldn’t have been here.” 

    So I think the rhetoric, I hated to do it, sometimes I felt foolish doing it, but we had no choice,” he said.

    In other words, Trump’s war of words with Kim was all part of the Art of the Deal.  

    So instead of this: 

    We now have this:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 12th June 2018

  • Trump And Kim Sign "Comprehensive" Letter To End Historic Summit

    Donald Trump and North Korean Leader Kim Jong Un signed what the US president described as a “very important, comprehensive” document following the conclusion of their “really fantastic” whirlwind historic summit in Singapore, the first between a US president and North Korean leader that came after decades of hostility.

    “The letter that we are signing is very comprehensive, and I think both sides will be very impressed with the results,” Trump said as he sat alongside the North Korean leade at a large wooden table in front of a bank of U.S. and North Korean flags to endorse the document, the specific contents of which remain unknown.

    Kim added that the two countries would “leave the past behind” in signing the agreement. “The world will see the major change,” he added. “I would like to express gratitude to President Trump for making this meeting happen.”

    Trump said more information would come out “in just a little while” and did not say what the agreement entailed, but some have already managed to extract the key contents from the letter Trump held up.

    The letter says that the U.S. and North Korea “will join their efforts to build a lasting and stable peace regime on the Korean Peninsula,” and that North Korea “commits to work toward complete denuclearization of the Korean Peninsula.”

    The pair also agree to “establish new U.S.-DPRK relations, and the two leaders “have committed to cooperate for the development of new U.S.-DPRK relations and for the promotion of peace, prosperity and security of the Korean Peninsula and of the world.”

    Notably, the U.S. and N. Korea agree to follow-on negotiations led by Sec. of State Mike Pompeo and a DPRK counterpart.

    In other words this is just the first of many summits.

    Speaking to reporters, Trump also said the he would “absolutely” invite Kim to the White House to continue their talks, meanwhile Kim called the document “historic” and said it would lead to a new era in the U.S.-North Korea relationship.

    “We had a historic meeting and decided to leave the past behind, and we are about to sign a historic document,” he said through a translator. “The world will see a major change.”

    Kim also thanked Trump for making “this meeting happen.”

    * *  *

    The ceremony concluded a summit meeting that appeared impossible just one year ago, when both men’s threats against each other fueled an growing nuclear crisis. Just last summer, Trump mocked the North Korean leader as “Little Rocket Man” as the two exchanged barbs over their weapons programs. Kim responded by dismissing the president as a “mentally deranged dotard” who would “pay dearly” for his threats against Pyongyang.

    Trump and Kim, however, appeared to have a friendly rapport during their day together at the Singapore island resort. “The past worked as fetters on our limbs, and the old prejudices and practices worked as obstacles on our way forward. But we overcame all of them, and we are here today,” Kim said through a translator as the two met for the first time.

    The pair shook hands and met in a one-on-one setting before conferring with aides. The president even showed the North Korean leader the inside of his limousine after their sessions were over.  

    “It’s going great. We had a really fantastic meeting. A lot of progress. Really, very positive, I think better than anybody could have expected, top of the line, really good,” Trump said as he stood next to Kim after their meetings.

    He then said that “we’re going to take care of a very big and very dangerous problem for the world”.

    * * *
    The summit marked the first stage in a process that the US, Japan, China and South Korea, and certainly the rest of the wor;d hope will lead to denuclearisation on the Korean peninsula. Trump is scheduled to hold a press conference at 4pm local time to discuss the negotiations.

    As the two men walked through the Capello Hotel where the summit was held, Kim said to Trump that “many people in the world will think of this as a . . . form of fantasy . . . from a science fiction movie.”

    Yet where the market and watchers may be disappointed is that despite the optimistic rhetoric, the summit did not appear to produce an ironclad denuclearization agreement or a peace treaty to end the Korean War — two possibilities Trump raised ahead of the talks.

    Asked if Kim had agreed to denuclearize, Trump said, “we’re starting that process very quickly. Very, very quickly. Absolutely.” U.S. and North Korean officials worked down to the wire to bridge the gap between what the two nations say denuclearization means. The United States wants the complete, verifiable and irreversible denuclearization of North Korea, while Pyongyang wants disarmament across the Korean peninsula and other security assurances.

    On the night before the meeting, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo told reporters it would provide a “framework” for future negotiations.

    As we noted earlier, critics said a summit that ended without a declaration on denuclearization would amount to a propaganda win for Kim, elevating him to legitimacy on the international stage. Regional experts are also skeptical Kim will give up any of his weapons regardless of a declaration, saying the Kim family playbook is for the regime to make promises, drag out its efforts to carry out those pledges as it gets concessions and then later renege altogether.

    Analysts had expected both Trump and Kim to sell the summit as a success regardless of outcome since both have much at stake. At the signing ceremony, Trump said he was “very proud” of what happened Tuesday and thanked Kim, reiterating that it was an “honor” to meet.

    “I think our whole relationship with North Korea and the Korean peninsula is going to be a very much different situation than it has in the past,” Trump said. “We’ve development a very special bond.” Trump did not answer a reporter’s question on whether the two spoke bout Otto Warmbier, the American student who died, shortly after his release from North Korean imprisonment in a coma, exactly one year ago. As a reminder, in the lead up to the summit, North Korea released three other Americans who had been held hostage. Pompeo brought them home last month on the second of his two visits with Kim to lay the groundwork for Tuesday.

    After the ceremony, Trump and Kim walked back to the platform where they started the morning with a handshake, shaking hands once again. Responding to reporters, Trump, who prides himself on his dealmaking skills, called Kim a “worthy negotiator.”

    “We had a terrific day, and we learned a lot about each other and about our countries,” Trump said. “I learned he’s a very talented man. I also learned that he loves his country very much.”

    * * *

    The market reaction to the signing of the “broad” letter has been muted, with the won easing slightly and the USD/KRW climbing 0.2% to 1,077.45 after fluctuating between 1,072.85-1,078.10 in the lead up to the signing ceremony. South Korea’s currency rallied for five consecutive days to June 7 before slipping on Friday as traders bought the won ahead of the event. The gains were the longest winning streak since early January.

    “The market seems long on KRW ahead of the event,” says Masakatsu Fukaya, an EM currency trader at Mizuho Bank in Tokyo before the summit.“I am long KRW too. It’s hard to imagine a negative outcome”

    Commenting on the modest increase in Euro Stoxx 50 futures, Bloomberg notes that President Donald Trump and North Korean leader Kim Jong Un have signed a “very important” document, although we’re not sure yet what’s in it.

    Some analysts were outright disappointed, such as Vishnu Varathan, head of economics and macro strategy at Mizuho Bank Ltd in Singapore who said that markets are struggling to find a reason to sustainably price in more risk-on as they want to see tangible outcomes: “Markets are saying OK, yes this a good thing. We’ve already priced in quite a bit.”

    He notes that this isn’t first time where we have a high-level agreement and some dispute thereafter; China trade talks is one famous example as Trump administration has got the penchant of getting quite frustrated quite quickly; he added that he is not quite sure yet how this will play out for the Korean won in the longer run because opening up North Korea could also mean South Korea would have to subsume some of the costs of integrating North Korea with the world.

    The bottom line came from Stephen Innes, head of trading for Asia Pacific at Oanda, who said that there’s not much of a reaction as traders realize this is little more than the prologue to a long drawn out and lengthy process that could still go sideways,” said . “But this is good nonetheless for regional risk”.

     

  • Bill Clinton Notes Cultural Shift In "What You Can Do To Somebody Against Their Will"

    Bill Clinton just can’t seem to promote his new book without questions over sexual misconduct coming up!

    In a Thursday interview with PBS Newshour, Clinton, 71, suggested that “norms have changed” regarding “what you can do to somebody against their will” after host Judy Woodruff asked the former president for his thoughts on the changing standards that drove Democrat Al Franken to step down. 

    I think the norms have really changed in terms of, what you can do to somebody against their will, how much you can crowd their space, make them miserable at work.” -Bill Clinton

    “You don’t have to physically assault somebody to make them, you know, uncomfortable at work or at home or in their other — just walking around. That, I think, is good,” Clinton continued. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “I think that — I will be honest — the Franken case, for me, was a difficult case, a hard case. There may be things I don’t know. But I — maybe I’m just an old-fashioned person” said Clinton.

    Of note, Al Franken wasn’t accused of “crowding” anyone’s space. Several women said he “forcibly kissed” and groped them

    Meanwhile, according to a new Rasmussen poll, 53% of U.S. voters say Clinton is a sexual predator

    The latest Rasmussen Reports national telephone and online survey finds that just 24% of Likely U.S. Voters consider Clinton a victim of his political opponents. Fifty-three percent (53%) describe the ex-president as a sexual predator instead. Another 24% are undecided. (To see survey question wording, click here.) -Rasmussen

    Last week, Clinton erupted at NBC’s Craig Melvin over questions about Monica Lewinsky. Clinton accused Melving of giving a one-sided interview.

    “This was litigated 20 years ago. Two-thirds of the American people sided with me,” Clinton said. “They were not insensitive that I had a sexual harassment policy when I was governor in the ’80s. I had two women chiefs of staff when I was governor. Women were over-represented in the attorney general’s office in the ’70s for their percentage of the bar.”

    The former President continued, “I’ve had nothing but women leaders in my office since I left. You are giving one side and omitting facts.”

    Melvin defended himself, saying that he was “not trying to present a side.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In response, Juanita Broaddrick, who claims that Bill Clinton raped her on April 25, 1978 in an Arkansas hotel room, biting her upper lip so badly it was nearly severed, asks “WHY Doesn’t any reporter have the guts to ask about Bill Clinton about the sexual assaults and rape???” adding “Monica was Consensual!!!” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Jeweler Behind $2BN Indian Bank Fraud Reportedly Seeking Political Asylum In London

    Four months after news of India’s largest-ever banking scandal burst into the headlines when authorities discovered that a series of shell companies tied to a famous Indian jeweler had stolen nearly $2 billion from state-owned banks using an elaborate scheme, the location of the alleged mastermind – who fled with his uncle, also an alleged conspirator, before the fraud was discovered – is coming into focus. Though Indian police have been unable to track him down, Nirav Modi, an Indian jeweller known for building an international luxury brand, is reportedly in London, where he is trying to claim asylum from what he claims is a political persecution.

    Nirav

    Nirav Modi

    His presence – along with that of beverage baron Vijay Mallya – has the potential to complicate the relationship between the UK and India, as both men are seeking refuge from the Indian government in London, where Modi’s company has one store, according to the Financial Times.

    The case is the latest complicated diplomatic mess inherited by the UK’s Home Office not long after Russian businessman and Chelsea Football Club owner Roman Abramovich withdrew his application to renew his British visa after it was delayed.

    As one senior UK foreign official told the FT: “There are always a number of complicated cases that add a little tension and spice to our relationship with India.”

    “But there is also an appreciation from both sides that we have a legal process that has to be gone through and that we are of course governed by human rights legislation.”

    The scandal rattled investors faith in India’s largely state-owned banking sector, and raised questions about how the fraud wasn’t detected years earlier. India’s banks have largely spurned the SWIFT network for international interbank payments, which purportedly made uncovering the fraud more difficult.

    What most people outside India don’t realize is that Modi is one of the country’s most visible businessmen, who launched one of the country’s few truly international brands, by selling his luxurious, western-style jewelry in India, London, New York and Hong Kong.

    The news that Modi and his uncle, Mehul Choksi, were likely behind the country’s largest-ever bank fraud, shocked and surprised many. What was more surprising was the elaborate nature of the scheme. The two men worked bank insiders to help them use shell companies and fake letters of guarantee generated by Punjab National Bank to solicit loans from foreign branches of other Indian state-owned banks. The scheme, which went on for years, allegedly netted the conspirators $1.8 billion. The news, which broke back in February, sent shares of India’s largely state-owned and controlled banks spiraling lower.

    Both men reportedly left India in late January – just before the scandal broke, and Choksi’s location is still unknown. Meanwhile, an Indian court has issued warrants for the arrest of both men. Police have also shuttered Modi’s shops in India and seized jewellery from his stores, frozen his Indian bank accounts, and impounded his cars, including a Rolls-Royce and a Porsche. Still, India’s foreign affairs ministry confirmed to the FT that it hasn’t yet asked the UK for an extradition – instead, it’s waiting to hear from the country’s law enforcement agencies, which are “pursuing the case.”

  • Paul Craig Roberts: In The Western World, Truth Is An Endangered Species

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    Nowhere in the Western world is truth respected. Even universities are imposing censorship and speech control. Governments are shutting down, and will eventually criminalize, all explanations that differ from official ones. The Western world no longer has a print and TV media.

    In its place there is a propaganda ministry for the ruling elite.

    Whistleblowers are prosecuted and imprisoned despite their protection by federal statue. The US Department of Justice is a Department of Injustice. It has been a long time since any justice flowed from the DOJ.

    The total corruption of the print and TV media led to the rise of Internet media such as Wikileaks, led by Julian Assange, a prisoner since 2012.

    Assange is an Australian and Ecuadorian citizen. He is not an American citizen. Yet US politicians and media claim that he is guilty of treason because he published official documents leaked to Wikileaks that prove the duplicity and criminality of the US government.

    It is strictly impossible for a non-citizen to be guilty of treason. It is strictly impossible under the US Constitution for the reporting of facts to be spying. The function of the media is to expose and to hold accountable the government. This function is no longer performed by the Western print and TV media.

    Washington wants revenge and is determined to get it. If Assange were as corrupt at the New York Times, Washington Post, CNN, National Public Radio, MSNBC, etc., he would have reported the leaker to Washington, not published the information, and retired as a multi-millionaire with Washington’s thanks. However, unfortunately for Assange, he had integrity.

    Integrity today in the Western world has no value. You cannot find integrity in the government, in the global corporations, in the universities and schools, and most certainly not in the media.

    After leaving Assange, an Australian citizen, to Washington’s mercy since 2012, belated pro-Assange protests in Australia forced the US vassal state to come to Assange’s aid before the new corrupt president of Ecuador sells him to Washington for multi-millons of dollars by revoking his asylum.

    When the story was printed in the Sydney Morning Herald, the incompetent or brainwashed, or bought-and-paid-for journalist, Nick Miller, wrote:

    “Assange entered the embassy on June 19, 2012, after he had exhausted his appeals against an extradition order to go to Sweden to face rape and sexual assault allegations. Swedish authorities have since closed their investigation, saying it couldn’t continue without Assange’s presence in their country.”

    Nick Miller has committed libel, whether from his ignorance or from pay.

    There was no extradition order from Sweden for Assange to be returned to Sweden “to face rape and sexual assault allegations.” No such charges were issued by the Swedish prosecutorial office, and no such charges were made by the women involved.

    The case had already been closed by the Swedish prosecutorial office, and the two women who willingly shared their beds with Assange did not press any charges. The Swedish female prosecutor, who many suspect reopened the closed case at the urging of Washington, wrote in the extradition request that she only wanted Assange for questioning.

    Normally, extraditions are not granted for questioning. There has to be actual criminal charges, and there were no such charges against Assange. However, under pressure from Washington, a corrupt UK court granted, perhaps for the first time in history, extradition for questioning.

    Assange’s attorneys understood that if Assange left his embassy refuge and travelled to Sweden to be questioned, there was nothing to prevent Sweden from turning him over to Washington to be tortured, as Washington does, into confession of some crime.

    Consequently, Assange’s attorneys told the Swedish female prosecutor, a person who seems shortchanged on integrity, that Assange would be available for questioning in his place of refuge. The prosecutor, showing her hand, refused to question Assange in the Ecuadorian embassy in London. After refusing for many months while the presstitutes blackened Assange’s reputation as a “rapist who was escaping justice,” the sort of ignorant nonsense that Nick Miller writes, the prosecutor consented to go to London to interview Assange.

    As nothing incriminating emerged from the questioning and as neither of the women claimed that they were raped, the female prosecutor closed the case for the second time. But the corrupt British would not release Assange. They claimed that he was wanted for jumping bail, an argument that made no sense as the charge for his arrest had been dismissed. But Washington insisted, and British “justice” again served Washington instead of justice.

    The basis of the political assault on Assange came from the concern of one of his willing sex partners that he had not used a condom. With everyone worried crazy about HIV and Aids, the woman inquired at a Swedish public office if Assange could be required to take a HIV/Aids test. Assange, not realizing his vulnerability, apparently refused the test, and thus opened himself to a controversy that Washington immediately took advantage of. It is safe for rock stars to have groupies, but not for truth-tellers.

    If you understand the extreme extent to which the US government has gone, riding roughshod over many laws and traditions, to destroy Assange, perhaps you can understand the threats that the very few of us who have the education, experience, and integrity to tell you the truth live under.

    When I write an article, it does not inform me. I already know. When I inform you, I am doing so at my risk. I am not going to take this risk if readers do not support this website. I do this for you. If it is not important to you, I have no need to do it.

    You need to support truth-tellers as we are a disappearing breed under constant assault.

  • US-Backed Kurds Agree To "Unconditional Talks" With Syrian Government After Pentagon-Turkey Deal

    We’ve long predicted that the US-backed Syrian Kurdish forces currently holding a vast chunk of land in Syria’s northeast with the help of American coalition air power will naturally drift toward striking a deal with Assad, as the two sides have throughout the war exercised some degree of quiet cooperation against ISIS, foreign jihadists, and Turkish expansionism. 

    In a huge weekend development which has gone largely unnoticed by mainstream media, the political wing of the US-trained and supported Syrian Democratic Forces (SDF) announced it is open to entering into unprecedented direct negotiations with the Assad government over the future of the country.

    US officer with fighter from Kurdish People’s Protection Units (YPG) in northern Syria in 2017. Image source: AFP via Middle East Eye

    The Syrian Democratic Council, or SDC, is the political arm of the powerful alliance of mostly Kurdish and Arab fighters that make up the SDF, and on Sunday declared willingness to enter into “unconditional talks” with the Syrian government. 

    The London based international Arabic newspaper Asharq Al-Awsat reports the following

    In a statement on Sunday, the SDC said it was committed to resolving Syria’s deadly conflict through dialogue, and would not “hesitate to agree to unconditional talks”.

    “It is positive to see comments about a summit for Syrians, to pave the way to start a new page,” it said.

    Leading SDC member Hekmat Habib told AFP that both the council and the SDF “are serious about opening the door to dialogue” with the regime.

    “With the SDF’s control of 30 percent of Syria, and the regime’s control of swathes of the country, these are the only two forces who can sit at the negotiating table and formulate a solution to the Syrian crisis,” he said.

    As Syria analyst Joshua Landis confirms, the surprise SDC announcement comes just days after a controversial deal reached between Turkey and the US for the withdrawal of Syrian Kurdish forces from Manbij. 

    Syrian Kurdish leaders were enraged by the agreement, announced over the weekend, which allows for US and Turkish forces to patrol the northern Syrian city — though the Syrian Kurdish SDF wrested the city from ISIS in a major 2016 offensive. Turkey has consistently demanded Kurdish withdrawal from Manbij after President Recep Tayyip Erdogan invaded northern Syria in his non-ironically named ‘Operation Olive Branch’ early this year, aimed primarily at annexing Afrin canton. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Increasingly, America’s incoherent policy regarding the Kurds and Syria more broadly has put the more than 2000 US troops occupying northeast Kurdish heavy regions of the country in the middle of a Kurdish-Turkey-Damascus final showdown for the future of Syria. 

    As we remarked after Mattis’ weekend comments stating his desire to keep troops in Syria, Syria looks to be going the way of other major US wars: an open-ended situation short of success in which officials simultaneously are unable to come up with a plan to “win,” but will resist any pullout so they never completely lose.

    Both the Syrian government and Syrian Kurdish forces understand this well, and know that Syrians alone are the lasting stakeholders in the country — something increasingly obvious as the US appears to be handing over sovereign Syrian territory over to expansionist NATO ally Turkey. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A Syrian Kurdish SDC official further stated of weekend developments, “We are looking forward, in the next phase, to the departure of all military forces from Syria and the return to Syrian-Syrian dialogue” — in a reference to both Turkish and US occupying forces. 

    We predicted this almost year a year ago in our analysis of Pentagon goals in northern Syria as it became clearer that Assad and Russia were emerging victorious in the 6-year proxy war:

    Though the US endgame continues to be the ultimate million dollar question in all of this, it appears at least for now that this endgame has something to do with the Pentagon forcing itself into a place of affecting the Syrian war’s outcome and final apportionment of power: the best case scenario for American power in the region being permanent US bases under a Syrian Kurdish federated zone with favored access to Syrian oil doled out by Kurdish partners, and we could now be witnessing the early phases of such negotiations. 

    But if indeed the Kurds are cutting separate deals with Russia, a US exit from Syria could be forced sooner rather than later.

    Notably, in a wide-ranging interview with RT News last month, President Assad issued an ultimatum to Syrian Kurdish militias backed by the US: “We’re going to deal with it by two options: the first one we started now opening doors for negotiations, because the majority of them [SDF] are Syrians. Supposedly they like their country, they don’t like to be puppets to any foreigners,” Assad said. 

    “If not, we’re going to resort … to liberating those areas by force. It’s our land, it’s our right, and it’s our duty to liberate it, and the Americans should leave. Somehow they’re going to leave,” Assad added while speaking to RT

    While it appears the Pentagon is now (predictably) selling out the Kurds to Turkey, Assad has consistently taken a pragmatic approach in dealing with the US-backed SDF, reminding them that no foreign supporters could possibly have Syrian best interests in mind: “either you have a country or you don’t have a country” he said in the RT interview of the foreign invasion of Syrian soil over the past years of war. 

    Should SDC-SDF and Syrian government negotiations come to full fruition, this could mark lasting peace and the final exit of foreign forces, American troops foremost among them. 

  • Pepe Escobar: Putin & Xi Top The G6+1

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    All hell broke loose at the G6+1, aka G7, while the China-led Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) aimed at global integration and a peaceful multipolar order…

    East vs. West: the contrast between the “dueling summits” this weekend was something for the history books.

    All hell broke loose at the G6+1, otherwise known as G7, in La Malbaie, Canada, while all focused on divine Eurasian integration at the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) in China’s Qingdao in Shandong, the home province of Confucius.

    US President Donald Trump was the predictable star of the show in Canada. He came late. He left early. He skipped a working breakfast. He disagreed with everybody. He issued a “free trade proclamation”, as in no barriers and tariffs whatsoever, everywhere, after imposing steel and aluminum tariffs on Europe and Canada. He proposed that Russia should be back at the G8 (Putin said he has other priorities). He signed the final communiqué and then he didn’t.

    Trump’s “I don’t give a damn” attitude drove the European leaders assembled in Canada crazy. After the official photo shoot, the US president grabbed the arm of new Italian Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte and said, in ecstasy, “You’ve had a great electoral victory!”

    The Euros were not pleased and forced Conte to abide by the official EU, as in German Chancellor Angela Merkel’s, policy: no G8 readmission to Russia as long as Moscow does not respect the Minsk agreements. In fact it is Ukraine that is not respecting the Minsk agreements; Trump and Conte are fully aligned on Russia.

    Merkel, in extremis, proposed a “shared evaluation mechanism”, lasting roughly two weeks, to try to defuse rising trade tensions.

    Yet the Trump administration does not seem to be interested.

    “Strategic” game-changer

    Meanwhile, over in Qingdao, the stunning takeaway was offered predictably by Chinese President Xi Jinping; “President Putin and I both think that the China-Russia comprehensive strategic partnership is mature, firm and stable.”

    This is a massive game-changer because officially, so far, this was a “comprehensive partnership.” It’s the first time on record that Xi has put the stress on “strategic”. Again, in his own words: “It is the highest-level, most profound and strategically most significant relationship between major countries in the world.”

    And if that was not far-reaching enough, it’s also personal. Xi, referring to Putin and perhaps channeling Trump’s bonhomie with leaders he likes, said, “He is my best, most intimate friend.”

    Heavy business, as usual, was in order. The Chinese partnered with Russian nuclear energy giant Rosatom to get advanced nuclear technologies and diversify nuclear power contracts beyond its current Western suppliers. That’s the “strategic” energy alliance component of the partnership.

    In a trilateral Russia-China-Mongolia meeting, they all vowed to go full steam ahead with the China-Mongolia-Russia Economic Corridor – one of the key planks of the New Silk Roads, known as the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).

    Mongolia once again volunteered to become a transit hub for Russian gas to China, diversifying from Gazprom’s current direct pipelines from Blagoveshchensk, Vladivostok and Altai. According to Putin, the Eastern Route pipeline remains on schedule, as does the US$27 billion liquefied natural gas (LNG) plant in Yamal being financed by Russian and Chinese companies.

    On the Arctic, Putin and Xi went all the way for developing the Northern Sea Route, including crucial modernization of deep-water ports such as Murmansk and Arkhangelsk, and investment in infrastructure. The added geopolitical cachet is self-evident.

    Putin had said last week that annual trade between Moscow and Beijing will soon reach US$100 billion. Currently, it stands at US$86 billion. Now Russian businesses venture the possibility of reaching US$200 billion by 2020 as feasible.

    All this frenzy of activity is now openly described by Putin as the interconnectivity of BRI and the Russia-led Eurasia Economic Union (EAEU). Not to mention that the SCO itself interconnects with both BRI and the EAEU.

    Putin told Chinese TV channel CGTN that though the SCO began as a “low-profile organization” [back in 2001] that sought merely to “solve border issues” between China, Russia and former Soviet countries, it is now evolving into a much bigger global force.

    In parallel, according to Yu Jianlong, secretary general of the China Chamber of International Commerce, the SCO has now gathered extra collective strength to harness BRI expansion to increase business across Europe, the Middle East and Africa.

    So it’s no wonder companies from SCO nations are now being “encouraged” to use their own currencies to seal deals, bypassing the US dollar, as well as building e-commerce platforms, Alibaba-style. So far, Beijing has invested US$84 billion in other SCO members, mostly in energy, minerals, transportation (including, for instance, the China-Kyrgyzstan-Uzbekistan highway), construction and manufacturing.

    Putin also met with Iranian President Hassan Rouhani on the sidelines of the SCO and vowed in no uncertain terms to preserve the Iranian nuclear deal, known as the JCPOA.

    Iran is a current SCO observer nation. Putin once again reaffirmed he wants Tehran as a full member. The SCO charter determines that “a dialogue partner status can be granted to a country that shares the goals and principles of the SCO and wants to establish relations based on equal and mutually profitable relationship.”

    Iran, as an observer, fulfills the commitment. The spanner in the works happens to be tiny Tajikistan.

    Enter the trademark convoluted internal politics of the Central Asian stans, in this case revolving around Tajik president Emomali Rahmon accepting Saudi Arabia’s acquisition of a 51% stake in Tajikistan’s largest bank. Nobody else wanted it; Riyadh was just buying influence.

    All SCO full members must be approved unanimously. Still, that won’t prevent larger economic integration between Iran, Russia and China. The talk in the SCO corridors was that Chinese companies expect an extra bonanza in the Iranian market after the unilateral Trump pullout of the JCPOA.

    Behind closed doors, as diplomats told Asia Times, the SCO also discussed the crucial plan devised by the SCO-Afghanistan Contact Group, an Asia-wide peace process with Russia, China, India, Pakistan, Iran and Afghanistan trying to finally solve the decades-long tragedy without Western interference.

    So what about a G3?

    The “dueling summits” clearly set the scene. The G7 meeting at La Malbaie represented the dysfunctional old order, dilacerated by largely self-inflicted chaos and its apoplexy at the Rise of the East – from the integration of BRI, EAEU, SCO and BRICS, to the yuan-based gold-backed oil futures market.

    In contrast to the G7’s full spectrum dominance doctrine of total military superiority, Qingdao represented the new groove. Implacably derided by the old order as autocratic and filled with “democraships” bent on “aggression”, in fact it was a graphic illustration of multi-polarity at work, the intersection of four great civilizations, an Eurasian Café debating that another, non-War Party conducted future is possible.

    In parallel, diplomats in Brussels confirmed to Asia Times there are insistent rumbles about Trump possibly dreaming of a G3 composed of just US, Russia and China. Trump, after all, personally admires the leadership qualities of both Putin and Xi, while deriding the Kafkaesque EU bureaucratic maze and its weaklings, currently represented by the M3 (Merkel, Macron, May).

    In Europe, no one seems to be listening to informed advice, such as provided by Belgian economist Paul de Grauwe, who’s pleading for Frankfurt and Berlin to manage a common debt, without which the EU won’t survive the sovereign crises of individual members.

    Trump, for all his dizzying inconsistencies, seems to have understood that the G7 is a Walking Dead, and the heart of the action revolves around China, Russia and India, which not by accident form the hard node of BRICS.

    The problem is the US national security strategy, as well as the national defense strategy, advocate no less than Cold War 2.0 against both China and Russia all across Eurasia. All bets are off, however, on who blinks first.

  • Why Does Imran Awan Work At His Clinton-Linked Attorney's Law Firm?

    A stunning video by investigative journalist Jason Goodman of Crowdsource the Truth reveals that Pakistani IT worker Imran Awan is reportedly answering phones at the office of his attorney, Chris Gowen. 

    Gowen notably worked for both Bill and Hillary Clinton in various capacities.

    Gowen is a founding partner of Gowen, Rhoades, Winograd and Silva law firm, with offices in Washington, D.C., and Philadelphia, Penn.

    His official bio on the firm’s web site notes that he “left the Public Defender’s office to work for former President William Jefferson Clinton and then-Senator Hillary Clinton. Chris was a fact checker for President Clinton’s memoir, ‘My Life.’”

    He also served as a traveling aid for President Clinton’s national and international trips. Chris finished his tenure with the Clintons by directing the advance operations for then-Senator Hillary Clinton during her 2008 presidential campaign.”

    Conservative Review — which first reported Gowen’s extensive Clinton connections Wednesday — said they also include work for the Clinton Foundation and its Clinton Global Initiative and the Clinton Health Access Initiative. –Daily Caller

    In the video, Goodman can be seen visiting the law offices of Awan’s attorney, where he asks to speak with the former House IT staffer. After his request was denied, Goodman asks: “Is Imran here?“, to which the employee replies “Uh, he is, why?

    Goodman responds “‘Cause it sounds like he’s answering your phones,” which drew the retort “What’s your point?” 

    “Is he working for you?” asks Goodman, to which the employee whispers back “Go away.” 

    Watch: 

    Awan and several family members worked for Rep. Debbie Wasserman Schultz along with 20% of House Democrats as IT staffers who held – as the House Inspector General called it – the “keys to the kingdom,” when it came to accessing confidential information on Congressional computer systems. He is currently on trial on allegations of bank fraud unrelated to his work in Congress, while potential crimes committed go unprosecuted. 

    Awan was arrested one day after reports emerged that the FBI had seized a number of “smashed hard drives” and other computer equipment from the residence Imran Awan, the IT aide of Debbie Wasserman-Schultz, we learn that Awan has been captured at the Dulles airport while attempted to flee the country. While charged with bank fraud, there is ample evidence that the Awans were spying on members of Congress through their access to highly-sensitive information on computers, servers and other electronic devices belonging to members of Congress. 

    After months of delays Imran Awan and his wife Hina Alvi, appear to be about to slide right out of a D.C. courtroom with a plea deal in their bank fraud case – while a litany of far more serious allegations documented by the Daily Caller‘s Luke Rosiak remain unprosecuted.

    “Awan and his wife, Hina Alvi, were charged last summer with bank fraud. They now appear poised to strike a plea deal with the Department of Justice. A plea agreement hearing is set for July 3 before U.S. District Judge Tanya S. Chutkan in Washington,” –Fox News

    President Trump wasn’t too pleased with the rumored plea deal:

    Meanwhile, as we noted last week, the judge in the Awan case, Tanya Chutkan, was appointed to the D.C. US District Court by President Obama on June 5, 2014, after Chutkan had contributed to him for years.

     

     

    Prior to her appointment to the District Court, she was a partner at law firm Boies Schiller & Flexner (BSF) where she represented scandal-plagued biotechnology company Theranos – which hired Fusion GPS to threaten the news media. Because of this, Chutkan had to recuse herself from two cases involving Fusion GPS.

    So we’ve got Imran Awan working for his Clinton-linked attorney, appearing in for his fraud trial in front of an Obama-appointed Judge – perhaps about to receive a plea arrangement – while a litany of allegations against the Awans including high level espionage remain uninvestigated. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     

  • Kim Heralds "Prelude To Peace" At Historic US-North Korea Summit

    The world is crossing its fingers (even Maxine Waters)…

    The Handshake…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bloomberg’s Jennifer Jacobs reports that Kim Jong Un told Trump, after their handshake and before their one-on-one meeting:

    “Many people in the world will think of this as a scene from a fantasy … science fiction movie.”

    Walking to the meeting…

    “It’s my honor — we will have a terrific relationship, I have no doubt,” President Trump says as he sits down with Kim Jong Un in Singapore.

    “The way to get here was not easy…but we overcome all the obstacles to get here,” replies Kim Jong Un.

    After their one-on-one talks, Pres Trump and Kim Jong-un joined their delegation members for an expanded bilateral.

    On the brief walk there, Trump asked how things were going: “Very, very good. Excellent relationship.”

    Once at the expanded bilateral, Trump tuned everyone out and focused laser-like on Kim.

    Kim: “We overcame speculation about this summit… I believe this is a good prelude for peace.”

    Trump: “We will solve it, we will be successful… I look forward to working on it with you.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Trump-Kim Summit just reached the two-hour mark…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And amid it all CNN…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    Contrary to rumors spread early Monday by the Washington Post, international media has confirmed that the denuclearization of North Korea is, in fact, on the agenda – as is the easing of US economic sanctions.

    Achieving this would require much more than the removal of weapons…

    *  *  *

    Dennis Rodman getting choked up on CNN…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The following is a rough outline of President Trump’s schedule for the (all times are Singapore local time):

    • 09:15 Trump to meet North Korean leader Kim at the Capella Hotel, Sentosa (estimated to be a 45 minute meeting)
    • 10:00 A bilateral meeting, involving Pompeo, Kelly & Bolton
    • 11:30 Working lunch
    • 16:00 Trump
    • 18:30 Trump leaves for Air Force One
    • 19:00 Departs Singapore

    POTUS exits his limo…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Kim exits his limo…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Kim’s motorcade arrives at the summit hotel…

    POTUS arrives at the hotel:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Kim heading to The Summit…

    Trump heading to the hotel where the Summit is being held…

    Activists hold a vigil outside the White House to celebrate the joint summit between President Donald Trump and North Korean leader Kim Jong Un held in Singapore.

    *  *  *

    After a year of vitriolic sound, fiery tweet fury, and hidden diplomacy, the day has arrived when President Trump will meet face-to-face with North Korean leader Kim Jong Un in Singapore on Tuesday.

    Kim prepared by sightseeing some of Singapore’s finest nightlife…

    And selfies with the Singapore minister of Foreign Affairs…

    And after meeting with Prime Minister Lee Hsien Loong…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump’s team hunkered down…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A successful summit could lead to a peace that has been elusive for 50 years; an unsuccessful summit would offer the left yet more ammunition to attack the current administration as having been ‘duped’ and before the summit had begun, Trump had some choice words for the naysayers… ” The fact that I am having a meeting is a major loss for the U.S., say the haters & losers,” Trump tweeted, then explaining where they are wrong: “We have our hostages, testing, research and all missle launches have stopped, and these pundits, who have called me wrong from the beginning, have nothing else they can say! We will be fine!”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And sure enough, just an hour before the historic meeting, the House Democrats chimed in with Nancy Pelosi explaining solemnly what a “historic opportunity” this was – setting the scene for their post-summit PR blitz to play down any and every achievement – and furthermore demanding that the ever-so-helpful Congress “must weigh in on any US-North Korea deal.”

    Democrats say they are hope Trump can pull a strong deal off, though they express worry he could accept a bad deal just to secure an agreement.

    “We don’t want the president to fail at this,” Senate Foreign Relations Committee ranking member Bob Menendez (D-N.J.) told reporters this week. “We want him to succeed. The stakes for our nation are simply too great. We all want diplomacy to succeed. But, if the president signs on to any deal, even if it’s a bad deal, simply because he wants a deal, that would be a huge mistake.”

      As The Hill reports, The Trump-Kim meeting will be a first for a sitting U.S. president and North Korean leader, and the picture would have seemed unthinkable just a year ago.

      “No matter what happens, President Trump and Kim Jong Un are going to call it a success because both leaders are invested in this and they want to,” Sue Mi Terry, Korea chair at the Center for Strategic and International Studies, said at a press briefing.

      The history is short and often not so sweet. As The Hill details, Trump took office having been warned by President Obama that North Korea would be his gravest challenge.

      Tensions boiled almost immediately as Pyongyang began a barrage of missile tests during Trump’s first months in office.

      The tests culminated in November’s test of an intercontinental ballistic missile that North Korea said could reach the entirety of the United States.

      North Korea also conducting its sixth and most powerful nuclear test in September, which Pyongyang said was a successful hydrogen bomb detonation.

      Trump responded to the provocations with provocative rhetoric, belittling Kim as “Little Rocket Man” and threatening “fire and fury.” The Trump administration also launched a “maximum pressure” campaign that sought to choke North Korea with sanctions.

      Then came the new year, an Olympics in South Korea and change.

      Kim used his New Year’s address to suggest a diplomatic opening: sending a delegation to the Winter Olympics in South Korea.

      “I think that was a very shrewd move on Kim Jong Un’s part,” Terry said. “North Korea knew just the line to stop. They didn’t go further. They didn’t conduct — remember, we were worried about North Korea conducting atmospheric nuclear tests and going further. But they just stopped right before they crossed that line.”

      The Olympics-inspired diplomacy led to more talks with the South, during which the North extended an invitation for Trump to meet with Kim.

      When the South Koreans visited Washington to relay the invitation in March, Trump accepted on the spot.

      Since then, U.S. and North Korean diplomats have been trying to bridge the gap between the two countries’ definition of denuclearization.

      Instead of “rocket man,” Trump has been calling Kim a “very honorable” man.

      The summit was thrown into doubt late last month after North Korea took exception to comments from national security adviser John Bolton and made clear its definition of denuclearization includes concessions from the United States. Trump canceled the meeting, but decided to move ahead with it a week later after a visit to Washington by a top North Korean official.

      *  *  *

      But here we are, and President Trump sounds hopeful:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • Contagion: Suicide Hotline Calls Jump 25% After Celebrity Deaths

      When the headlines broke that celebrity chef Anthony Bourdain took his own life just days after designer Kate Spade killed herself, and almost two months after Avicii ended his life, mental health experts raised concerns about a suicide contagionvibrating through America.

      Last week, the phone number for the National Suicide Prevention Lifeline (1-800-273-8255) spiked by more than 25 percentafter the latest round of celebrity deaths.

      “When I heard about Bourdain, I was sad for him and for all the people who were going to hear about it, and I am also sad for people who might be influenced by it,” said Madelyn Gould, a professor of epidemiology in child psychiatry at Columbia University.

      Gould, who has conducted extensive research on “suicide contagion” trends for years, said, “research has shown that the phenomenon is real and suggests that media coverage of celebrity deaths, in particular, can influence those who are vulnerable or at risk and can lead to a spike in suicide rates.”

      “The deaths of two high-profile people by suicide this week has much more of an impact than less well-known individuals,” Gould said.

      Whenever a celebrity commits suicide — a flood of calls normally hits the hotline, Director John Draper of the National Suicide Prevention Lifeline told The Wall Street Journal. Draper said that the surge in calls started shortly after Kate Spade’s death, then peaked again during Bourdain’s death last week.” Calls jumped 25 percent in the two days after her death, compared with the same period the previous week,” Draper added.

      Draper said that people often feel connected to celebrities, which there can be a “collective sense of loss that many people feel.”

      Alan Ross, executive director of Samaritans suicide prevention center in New York, said the surge in calls that hotlines experince might not be a direct correlation of hearing about a celebrity’s death. In some cases, individuals who are already mentally unstable might have been triggered to seek help when the news of a celebrity death occurs.

      “The random number of things that can stimulate people who are already likely to get worse is so varied,” he said. “When there is promotion and marketing and in some ways acceptance, yeah, it does drive people to reach out.”

      The deaths of Bourdain and Spade came the same week the CDC published a shocking report that suicides across America have climbed 30 percent since 1999 — and is now the country’s tenth-leading cause of death. In 2016, nearly 45,000 Americans ten years old or older died by suicide, according to the CDC.

      Suicide Statistics

      Suicide rates have increased in almost every state since 1999, with the exception of Nevada, which already maintained one of the highest rates in the country. Western and Midwestern states like Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, North Dakota, South Dakota, Minnesota, Kansas, and Oklahoma saw some of the most significant increases in rates.

      “I have been learning as a nation we have seen increases and decreases over time in suicide,” said CDC principal deputy director Dr. Anne Schuchat. “Increases mostly seem to correlate with economic downturns.”

      Democratic Sen. Chuck Schumer on Sunday asked the federal government for an increased spending bill for more suicide-prevention programs. Programs that have been “flat-funded include the Suicide Lifeline hotline, which has received $7 million annually since 2013”, he said. Schumer noted that a New Yorker dies by suicide every five hours.

      The current trends in suicide rates across America have developed into a contagion sparked by the Dot Com bust and 2008 economic crisis — continuing to spread across the country like wildfire.

      The latest round of celebrity suicides confirmed that many Americans dialed the hotline, as they also had thoughts about ending their lives.

      Besides the massive gap in wealth/health inequality plaguing much of the middle class, America’s love affair with mind-altering prescription drugs could be one of the many reasons producing structural decay.

      President Trump continues to spoon feed the vanishing middle class with the hope and hype narrative that the U.S. economy is now magically the “greatest in history,” meanwhile structural decay proves otherwise.

      Suicide trends across America are so bad that even Hollywood had to bring together a bunch of celebrity stars to rap about the National Suicide Prevention Lifeline, in a 2017 music video, called 1-800-273-8255.

      As it has been understood, Hollywood is the propaganda arm of Washington, and the elected and unelected elites know that the empire is starting to unravel, as their failed fiscal, monetary, and social policies have produced massive amounts of inequality triggering the latest wave of suicides.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 11th June 2018

    • Mapping The Price Of A Pint Around The World

      Whether you’re sipping a pint of kölsch in Germany or drinking a Heineken at a hotel bar in Hong Kong, there are a number of factors that can influence how much your beverage will cost. As Visual Capitalist’s Nick Routley notes, cost of living is certainly a primary factor, but taxes, availability, type of establishment, type of beer (craft beer vs macro brew), and local tastes will also affect the price of your pint.

      Analysts at Deutsche Bank recently gathered critical data on how much a pint of beer costs in various major cities around the world.

      Courtesy of: Visual Capitalist

      STICKER SHOCK

      Many of the cities that topped the price list have a higher cost of living, and it’s no surprise to see Singapore and Oslo rank near the top.

      The city of Dubai, however, is a unique case.

      Technically, drinking is only permissible for expats and non-Muslim residents in Dubai, and being drunk in public can come with serious consequences. That said, the city’s establishments serve beer with prices that reflect its high-end look and feel. Considering the scarcity and heavy regulations, those craving a pint might be happy to overlook the price tag of $12.

      CHEAP THRILLS

      The thirsty citizens of the Czech Republic consume the most beer by a long shot – a full 36% more than neighbors Austria and Germany. This is partially because demand is so high that companies are willing to compete on cost. As a result, beer is often cheaper than water in restaurants and pubs in Prague.

      Manila’s low cost of living and steady supply of domestic beer earned it the lowest price per pint on the Beer Price List. San Miguel, the Philippines’ largest brewery, dominates with a market share of over 90%, and beer consumption is also on the rise in the country.

      THE 48 PACK

      The median price of beer in the 48 cities analyzed was $5.70, and below is the full list of cities ordered from most to least expensive pint.

      It’s worth noting that the data collection focuses on expat (read: touristy) areas of the city. While that’s not a perfect picture of prices in a city, it does allow for a more consistent comparison of wildly differing markets.

      And so, summing it all up – If you like beer, move to Manila…(and whatever you do, don’t move to Dubai).

    • Crisis In Armenia & The Balance Of Power In South Caucasus

      Via SouthFront.org,

      The changing geopolitical situation around the world, especially the Middle East; and the intensified cultural-ideological and class struggle both within individual countries and globally, continue to provoke reactive political processes. Recently, a new crisis has erupted in Armenia, a state in the South Caucasus.

      The balance of power, self-perception of local ethnic groups, and the influence of socio-economic and cultural ideological groups on public policy have significantly changed in the country. These changes are multidirectional, increasing the risk of a new armed conflict.

      On April 12, an acute internal crisis started in Armenia, a post-USSR nation and a traditional ally of Russia in the South Caucuses since the 1990s. The Armenian opposition triggered this crisis and used it to pursue a regime change, using various, among which unconstitutional, measures. Following a series of street riots from April 15 – May 2, Nikol Pashinyan, an opposition leader and a leader of the neoliberal, formally pro-US political party “Way Out Alliance”, became prime minister. Armenia is a parliamentary republic. Pashinyan gained his post on May 8 using a mobilized pro-opposition minority and pressuring the parliament with riots. The change in power occurred without bloodshed and without the direct actions of external actors.

      Despite the formally pro-western position of his party, Pashinyan changed his public foreign policy rhetoric after the situation had entered into a revolutionary phase of the race for power. These changes are based on the need to act in line with the internal political situation and geopolitical reality. The bulk of the Armenian population does not consider themselves as the so-called “liberal thinking part of the middle class” neither economically nor culturally. In addition, there is an acute regional issue – an unresolved territorial dispute over the Nagorno Karabakh region and some nearby areas between Armenia and its Turkic neighbor Azerbaijan, also a post-USSR state. Pro-Armenian forces captured Nagorno Karabakh in the early 90s triggering an armed conflict between Armenia and Azerbaijan. Further development of this conflict and the expected offensive by pro-Azerbajian forces was stopped by a Russian intervention in May 1994. By mid 2018, Nagorno Karabakh and the nearby areas are still under the control of Armenian forces, de-facto making it an unrecognized Armenian state – Arts’akhi Hanrapetut’yun (Arts’akh).

      The 2018 political crisis and further developments did not strengthen Armenian positions over the Nagorno Karabakh issue. At the same time, the political situation in Azerbaijan remains stable. Azerbaijan, despite all existing problems, continues to develop, has a population over 3 times higher than Armenia and the economy is almost 4 times higher than Armenia’s GDP. At the same time, Azerbaijan maintains good working relations with Russia in almost all issues of the bilateral relations. Additionally, Azerbaijan is a natural historical ally of Turkey.

      Turkey has recently overcome some of its differences, restored and strengthened its partnership relations with Russia. Additionally, Ankara has reached a tactical compromise with Iran. This along with successful actions in Syria allowed Turkey to significantly increase its influence in the region. Iran has also strengthened its positions through participation in ongoing conflicts in the Middle East. Teheran moved its positions closer to those of Russia and Turkey. In turn, Russia has expanded its activity far beyond the South Caucasus and is now employing an active policy in the Greater Middle East. The activity of these leading regional states has obviously come into conflict with the interests of the establishment in Washington. Each of these three countries, has its own format of relations with the US, which in each chase is characterized as uneasy.

      From all the aforementioned regional players, Russia is the only power, which has been a strategic ally and a military defender of Armenia and its interests. Armenia is a member state of the Collective Security Treaty Organization (CSTO) and the Eurasian Customs Union (ECU). It’s interesting to note that reading Wikipedia articles in different languages, it’s not easy to find info about Armenia’s participation in the CSTO and the ECU, which are crucial for this state. It’s also hard to find out the real role of Russia, Turkey and Iran in the modern history of the Southern Caucasus.

      Meanwhile, the importance of the Armenian foothold in the South Caucasus for Russia has decreased. The importance of the Russian military base in Armenia has decreased because of the expansion of Russian military infrastructure in the Middle East, including naval and air bases in Syria. The political importance of Armenia has also decreased because of improved Russian-Turkish relations, which are strengthened by major joint economic projects, including the TurkStream gas pipeline and the Akkuyu Nuclear Power Plant. At the same time, Armenian has little economic value for the Russian state or private companies. Its only value is found in the nostalgic memories of a part of the Armenian diaspora with Russian citizenship. Additionally to the aforementioned factors, the Russian political leadership seems to be more cautious in forecasting and assessing the course of Armenian foreign policy, analyzing in depth actions and rhetoric of representatives of the Armenian elites. This shift was expected. For a long time, Armenia has pursued a foreign policy that was significantly at odds with the foreign policy position of its formal strategic ally. Furthermore, while enjoying Russian military protection, Armenia has declined to support Russia over key issues on the international agenda. A number of representatives of the Armenian elites, including the diplomatic corps, have claimed in unofficial conversations and remarks that Armenia should move to the pro-US camp.

      The current situation is the result of a number of factors, including the social stratification in Armenia and the cultural-ideological influence on Armenia’s youth and elites. For example, the integration of rich Armenian families into the inner circle of the Washington establishment through a large Armenian diaspora in California; constant propaganda aimed at rewriting history and changing its focus; direct financial support of nationalist movements and neoliberal globalists etc.

      Besides these, another factor is the cultural-ideological dominance of implanted postmodern consumerist values in the post-USSR states.

      However, there are objective factors, limiting the maneuverability of the relatively pro-Washington establishment in Armenia:

      • Armenian elites understand that without Russian’s participation region it will be virtually impossible to ensure the presence of Nagorno Karabakh in the zone of influence of Armenia; and possibly, the independence of Armenia itself. An analogy with Israel and its patron, the US, can be useful here. Without direct US support, the existence of an independent Jewish state would be impossible in the current situation;

      • Armenia receives a notable cash flow from Russia through transfers from the multi-million Armenian diaspora, which includes employees as well as small and medium business owners. These people, in general, are still committed to conservative ideology or, by virtue of their age, retain the physical memory of events that took place 20-30 years ago;

      • A number of ethnic Armenians keep large amounts of capital in Russia.

      These restrictions do not allow Armenian elites to change foreign policy sharply without incurring painful consequences.

      Despite the existing inconsistencies, Russia has taken an active position on the Armenian issue. All the necessary measures were taken to preserve Armenia in the orbit of Moscow’s influence.

      However, this situation changed during the recent political crisis in Armenia. Surprisingly, Moscow distanced itself from the developing events. This Russian attitude has quietly contributed to the regime change carried out by the pro-Western minority. This was done despite repeated remarks by Pashinyan in favor of the Euro-Atlantic integration as the main priority of Armenian foreign policy. Later, during the power seizure, understanding the problems of Armenia and the region, Pashinyan changed his public rhetoric supporting the strategic partnership with Russia. However, his personal position as well as the position of his neoliberal party are well known and are unlikely to have changed.

      The question arises, why did Russia choose a course for complete self-elimination and non-interference in the current crisis in Armenia?

      Some believe that this may be linked to the possibility that the Russian leadership has drawn a lesson from mistakes made during previous actions in post-USSR states, for example from their failure in Ukraine or their partial failure in Georgia. So, the Russian nonintervention could well be linked to concern for its public image.Another point of view is that Russian strategy is based on the realpolitik approach. In the current regional situation, Russia will gain revenue from any developments of events in Armenia. The following scenarios or their hybrids are possible:

      1) If the new Armenian leadership changes the country’s foreign policy course, or even breaks the military base agreement with Russia or withdraws from Russia-controlled international organization, Azerbaijan would, earlier or later exploit the new conditions to take back what it sees as its own lost territories – the Nagorno Karabakh region and nearby areas. The restoration of territorial integrity is one of the key foreign policy and military tasks of Azerbaijan and the ruling family of Aliyev. Turkey, still a NATO member state and a formal US ally, supports Azerbaijan in this intention.

      If Armenia loses Russian support and an armed conflict over the Nagorno Karabakh region resumes, Azerbaijan’s forces are likely to take control of this area within 1-2 weeks. Certainly, the US would voice protests against the Azerbaijani actions and present an ultimatum to Azerbaijan but only if its forces enter into the territory of Armenia. In this scenario, Russia would act similarly and then, after the expected new internal crisis in the country triggered by military defeat, Russia would restore its influence in the region.

      By then, the Nagorno Karabakh issue would be resolved because it would be in the hands of Azerbaijan, which is supported by Turkey, a NATO member state and a Russian partner in the region.

      2) If the new Armenian leadership implements a double standard policy, de-facto conducting anti-Russian actions but keeping a pro-Russian public rhetoric and standing on ceremony, Moscow would get a formal pretext to reshape its presence, first of all military, in the region. Strategically, the military infrastructure in Syria is much more important for Russia. Additionally, Moscow would get grounds for shifting its diplomatic rhetoric over the Nagorno Karabakh issue, thus achieving closer cooperation with Turkey and Azerbaijan. If in this situation, Azerbaijan triggers the resumption of armed conflict over Nagorno Karabakh, Russia would remain a formal Armenian ally and a guarantor of its territorial integrity. Moscow would intervene into the conflict both politically and militarily, but only as far as necessary to prevent violation of Amrenia’s borders. Russia would not contribute military efforts to restore Armenian control over Nagorno Karabakh should the region be captured by Azerbaijan. In this scenario, Russia would keep and maybe even strengthen its position in the region once again acting as a defender of the Armenian nation.

      3) If the new Armenian leadership shows political awareness and becomes engaged in not just a formal, but a real strategic alliance with Russia, the development of economic and cultural relations with the West would not detract from this alliance. Then, the Nagorno Karabakh conflict would remain frozen until the next major shift in the regional balance of power or until a political settlement of the conflict becomes possible. Russia would at least maintain its current influence and would maybe further improve its public image. While Armenia keeps a strong military political partnership with Russia, it is unlikely that Azerbaijan would make an open attempt to resume full-scale military hostilities.

      4) The most unlikely scenario is that Armenia would fully shift its foreign policy course towards the US and enlist full support from its new “strategic” ally. The Russian military base would be replaced by a US one and the US would become a guarantor of the independence of Nagorno Karabakh or at least a military guarantor of its current undefined status in the case of a new round of military escalation with Azerbaijan. This scenario is extremely unlikely. Yerevan has little to offer Washington in exchange for the inevitable decline of US relations with Azerbaijan and Turkey. US forces are already deployed in the region, in Georgia. A new US military base in Armenia would not change the balance of power in the South Caucasus and the Middle East. Economically, Armenia also has nothing to offer the US. So, the only possible Armenian offer would be blatant anti-Russian propaganda in the Ukrainian or British scenario. In this case, Russia would turn to Azerbaijan, strengthen its alliance with Turkey, actively destabilizing the situation in Armenia itself, creating additional problems for the US in the region.

      At this stage, it looks like the Armenian leadership is balancing between the scenario 2 and 3. In the future, the situation will develop depending on the level of strategic thinking of the new Armenian leadership and the inertia of the crisis situation created by Pashinyan, his supporters and sponsors for coming to power.

      Analyzing the situation in the South Caucasus, one should remember that “the great game might never end”. A possible shift of Armenian foreign policy would certainly trigger a change in the local balance of power. Following unavoidable fluctuations, the system would return to find a temporary balance at a particular point. The big game will continue.

      Some Turkish and Russian analysts believe that if Nagorno Karabakh returns to Azerbaijan’s control, a more stable system would be established in the region. This system would meet the needs of all three major regional actors. This position is based on the premise that Armenia is able to hold the system in its current quality and actually control the disputed territory only thanks to the balance between the formal traditional alliance with Russia and the unspoken patron-client relations between the Armenian elites and the Washington establishment.

      Taken as a whole, the political crisis in Armenia is just the continuation of the events of “the Arab Spring” and “velvet revolutions”. It has once again confirmed the growth of global economic, demographic, cultural and civilizational issues paradigmatic to the development of civilization over the past 30 years.

      *  *  *

      If you’re able, and if you like our content and approach, please support the project. Our work wouldn’t be possible without your help: PayPal: southfront@list.ru or via: http://southfront.org/donate/ or via: https://www.patreon.com/southfront, BTC: 13iYp9CDYZwgSnFXNtpEKgRRqaoxHPr2MH, BCH:1NE49pQW8yCegnFCMvKuhLUnuxvTnxNUhf, ETH: 0x962b312a9d41620f9aa0d286f9d7f8b1769bfae6

    • German Officials Admit "Still No Evidence" From UK That Russia Poisoned Skripals

      It seems notably fortuitous that the world is now distracted with the ongoing actions surrounding President Trump – whether in Quebec tweet-slamming PM Trudeau, or in Singapore ahead of his historic summit with North Korea’s Kim Jong Un.

      We say ‘fortuitous’ since it offers UK PM Theresa May some breathing room as her dramatic, quickly determined, and globally propagandized claims that Russia was the culprit for the poisoning of the Russian ex-agent Sergei Skripal and his daughter; remain entirely unsubstantiated by any proof.

      However, just as May was hoping the world had forgot dozens of nations expelled hundreds of Russian diplomats on nothing more than her word and the constant Russophobic narrative pumped thru the eyeballs and earholes of the rest of the world; the Germans just threw a rather loud wrench in the slient-running PR campaign that has taken the Skripal-murdering Putin off the frontpage.

      German media reports that the German government has zero evidence from the British authorities that could back London’s claims that Moscow was behind the poisoning of the Skripals

      More than three months since the start of the probe into the poisoning of former Russian double agent Sergei Skripal and his daughter Yulia, RT reports that the UK is still conspicuously tight-lipped when it comes to any real evidence that could prove its accusations against Russia.

      This week, the German government informed a parliamentary oversight committee during a closed hearing that it still has not received any evidence suggesting that Russia might well be behind the incident that took place in early March, German TV station RBB reports.

      “It is [still] only known that the poison used in the attack was a nerve agent called Novichok, which was once produced in the Soviet Union,” Michael Goetschenberg, a correspondent of German ARD and an expert on security services, told RBB, commenting on the results of the hearing, which he is familiar with.

      Apart from this information, which was released by the British authorities soon after the incident, no new data on Russia’s alleged implication in this case was provided to Germany so far, he added.

      German intelligence has also found no Russian trace in this case so far, Goetschenberg said.

      “The BND, Germany’s foreign intelligence… has also contacted its own sources and tried to verify the information [about Russia’s potential involvement] in some way,” he told RBB, adding that it eventually failed to find any evidence pointing to Moscow as well.

      Russia has categorically denied any involvement, and has complained that the victims were not allowed visits by Russian lawyers and diplomats, and the results of the investigation were kept secret. The Russian envoy to the UK has on several occasions alleged that London was even trying to “destroy” evidence in the probe.

      Just days ago, Scotland Yard said it was still following multiple leads in the investigation, adding that it still “cannot discuss the results at this stage.” The probe has already cost £7.5 million ($10 million) to British taxpayers, according to the region’s police and crime commissioner.

      Meanwhile, both Sergei and Yulia Skripal have been released from the hospital, seemingly no worse for the attampted assassination using the world’s most deadly nerve agent.

      Are we still supposed to believe that Vladimir Putin the man who western media and politicians blame for meddling with US elections to get Trump elected, manipulating French elections (unsuccessfully), murdering reporters (that actually came back to life), causing Brexit, killing millions in Syria (and anywhere else that US hegemony is bring back democracy), enabling an entire nation’s athletes to take steroids, and probably causing LeBron and the Cavs to get sweptmanaged to mess up the delivery of a deadly military grade nerve agent to kill an old man and a young woman?

       

    • Soros Slams "Schoolmarm" Clinton, Says "Ultimate Narcissist" Trump Will "Destroy The World"

      Fresh off a series of losing California DA races that “ran into a brick wall,” Hungarian-born billionaire George Soros sat down for an interview with the Washington Post to discuss his view on the future and the current state of the world. And during the interview, he delivered the following assessment: “Everything that can go wrong has gone wrong.”

      Soros appears to be building on  his previously presented view that Trump is adding to Europe’s existential crisis:

      “The EU is in an existential crisis. Everything that could go wrong has gone wrong,” he said.

      To escape the crisis, “it needs to reinvent itself.”

      The United States, for its part, has exacerbated the EU’s problems. By unilaterally withdrawing from the 2015 Iran nuclear deal, President Donald Trump has effectively destroyed the transatlantic alliance. This has put additional pressure on an already beleaguered Europe. It is no longer a figure of speech to say that Europe is in existential danger; it is the harsh reality.”

      He’s now arguing that President Donald Trump is “the ultimate narcissist” who would be “willing to destroy the world” to preserve his own narcissism.

      Soros said he would support impeachment proceedings against Trump if Democrats win in a landslide in November, as long as their is some Republican support.

      Soros

      Soros, who has championed liberal causes like the European Union, has seen the world turn against his center-left ideology and embrace a more populist, nationalist strain of politics that has seen his foundations booted out of Russia and his home country of Hungary. Unfortunately, his recent failures – and even the stigma that’s attached to candidates who take his money – have only convinced him to redouble his efforts, instead of embracing an early retirement.

      “The bigger the danger, the bigger the threat, the more I feel engaged to confront it,” Soros said Thursday.

      “So in that sense, yes, I redouble my efforts.”

      After spending “months” studying what went wrong in the 2016 election, Soros told WaPo that he had concluded that while Clinton would have made a “very good president,” she was not a good campaigner and “was too much like a schoolmarm,” Soros said.

      “Talking down to people . . . instead of listening to them.” Soros-linked organizations gave Clinton some $15 million.

      Soros also said he learned another lesson in 2016: The ease with which people’s opinions can be manipulated. “It’s so much easier to destroy trust than build it up.”

      While Soros wouldn’t say which 2020 contender he’s supporting, he did single out one potential 2020 contender whom he hopes doesn’t get it – New York Senator Kirsten Gillibrand. Soros blames her for forcing the resignation of Minnesota Sen. Al Franken – “whom I admire” – over images that surfaced showing Franken groping the breasts of a sleeping female journalist.

      As WaPo reminds us, Soros gave money to Republicans in the 1980s and 1990s who opposed Communist dictators that Soros also opposed. But he turned against the Republican party in 2003 after the invasion of Iraq. Since then, he has become one of the Democratic Party’s most reliable and generous donors. 

      As we previously argued, the Deep State appears to be focused still on playing “The Delegitimization Card” (as opposed to “The Herbert Hoover Card” or “The John F. Kennedy Card”) for now and as ever Soros is the ring-leader.

      There’s a joke that goes something like this…

      Question: Why can there be no “color revolution” in the US?

      Answer: Because there are no US embassies in the US.

      To get the joke you have to understand the role the US played—through CIA officers based out of US embassies – in orchestrating various color-coded revolutions, really coups d’état, over the past 17 years:

      • The Bulldozer Revolution in Serbia (2000)

      • The Rose Revolution in Georgia (2003)

      • The Orange and Euromaidan Revolutions in Ukraine (2004 and 2014)

      • The Tulip Revolution in Kyrgyzstan (2005)

      • The Cedar Revolution in Lebanon (2005)

      • The Jeans Revolution in Belarus (2006)

      • The Saffron Revolution in Myanmar (2007)

      • The Green Revolution in Iran (2009)… though that one didn’t work.

      • The Grape Revolution in Moldova (2009)

      • The Colorful Revolution in Macedonia (2016)

      All of these AstroTurf revolutions have one thing in common. In each case, George Soros’ NGOs helped delegitimize the targeted government.

      Of course, there were valid grievances against these governments. But the US Deep State manipulated these situations to advance its geopolitical agenda.

      Here’s how it worked: Soros’ NGOs would help fund and organize “professional protestors.” Then they’d use color-specific branding to help rally others to their cause.

      Soros has turned colored revolutions into a science. The pattern is predictable.

      Now it’s playing out in the US.

      It smells to me like the CIA and George Soros’ NGOs are trying to start a “color revolution” in the US, just like they’ve done in numerous foreign countries.

      *  *  *

      And today’s WaPo interview is merely building on that effort…

    • The Geostrategy That Guides Trump's Foreign Policies

      Authored by Eric Zuesse via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

      According to Alastair Crooke, writing at Strategic Culture, on June 5th

      “Trump’s US aims for ‘domination’, not through the globalists’ permanent infrastructure of the US defence umbrella, but through the smart leveraging of the US dollar and financial clearing monopoly, by ring-fencing, and holding tight, US technology, and by dominating the energy market, which in turn represents the on/off valve to economic growth for US rivals. In this way, Trump can ‘bring the troops home’, and yet America keeps its hegemony [America’s control of the world, global empire]. Military conflict becomes a last resort.

      He bases that crucially upon a landmark 6 November 2017 article by Chris Cook, at Seeking Alpha, which laid out, and to a significant extent documented, a formidable and complex geostrategy driving U.S. President Donald Trump’s foreign policies. Cook headlined there “Energy Dominance And America First”, and noted that,

      “Towards the tail end of the Clinton administration and the Dot Com boom in 2000, [Trump’s U.S. Treasury Secretary until April 2018] Gary Cohn of Goldman Sachs had dinner with his counterpart at Morgan Stanley, John Shapiro. From this dinner was hatched an audacious plan to take control of the global oil market through a new electronic global market platform.”

      This “global market platform,” which had been started months earlier in 2000 by Jeffrey Sprecher, is “ICE,” or InterContinental Exchange, and it uses financial derivatives in order to provide to Wall Street banks control over the future direction of commodites prices (so that the insiders can game the markets), by means of the financial-futures markets, locking in future purchase-and-sale agreements. It also entails Wall Street’s buying enormous commodities-storage warehouses and stashing them with such commodities — such as, in that case, aluminum), and so it influences also the real estate markets, and doesn’t only manipulate the commodities markets. Those vast storehouses (and the operation of the U.S. Government’s Strategic Petroleum Reserve, to carry out a similar price-manipulation function in the oil business) are crucial in order for the entire scheme to be able to function, because without control over the storehousing of physical commodities, such futures-price manipulations aren’t possible. Consequently, ICE couldn’t get off the ground without major Wall Street partners, which are willing to do that. Cohn and Shapiro (Goldman, and Morgan Stanley) backed Sprecher’s operation; and Wikipedia states that,

      “Wall Street bankers, particularly Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley, backed him and he launched ICE in 2000 (giving 80 percent control to the two banks who, in turn, spread out the control among Shell, Total, and British Petroleum).”

      This is today’s financial world – a world in which billionaires control the future directions of commodities-prices, and thus manipulate markets, and even determine the economic fates of nations. It’s not the myth of capitalism; it is the reality of capitalism. It functions by means of corruption, as it always has, but the corrupt methods constantly evolve.

      However, Trump’s geostrategy goes beyond merely this, especially by bringing into the entire operation the world’s wealthiest person, the trillionaire King Saud, who, as the sole owner of the Saudi Government, which in turns owns the world’s largest corporation Aramco, which in turn dominates the oil market and which is also #6 in the natural-gas market (far behind the three giants, which King Saud is trying to destroy — Russia, Iran, and Qatar — so that the Sauds will become able to dominate even there). Trump’s geostrategy ties King Saud even more tightly than before, into America’s aristocracy. 

      King Saud, as Cook noted, is trying to disinvest in petroleum and reposition increasingly into natural gas, because outside the United States and around the world, people are seriously concerned to minimize global warming so as to postpone global burnout from uncontrollably soaring atmospheric carbon. Petroleum has an even worse carbon footprint than does natural gas; and therefore natural gas is the world’s “transition fuel” to a ‘survivable’ future, while solar and other alternatives take hold (even if too late). Despite all of the carbon-fuels industries’ propaganda, people outside the United States are determined to delay global burnout, and the insiders know this. King Saud knows that his petroleum-laden portfolio will have to diversify fast, because the long-term future for petroleum-prices is decline. And he won’t be able to control prices at all in the natural-gas business unless he’s got America’s aristocracy on his side, in the effort to keep those prices up (at least while the Sauds will be increasing their profits from natural gas). Unlike his dominance over OPEC, Saudi Arabia has no such position to control natural gas-prices. He thus needs Wall Street’s cooperation.

      Cook said:

      “The second objective was a switch from oil to natural gas, and when the U.S. [military] was obliged to leave Saudi Arabia, they [the U.S.] thereupon established their biggest regional base in Qatar, who co-own with Iran the greatest single natural gas reserve on the planet – South Pars.

      Energy Dominance

      In the four months since President Trump’s announcement, the market strategy developed by Gary Cohn is now being implemented and its elements are emerging into view.

      Firstly, there has been a massive inflow of Managed Money into the oil market, particularly the Brent contract, which has seen the Brent oil price increase by 35% since the starting point, which I believe can be dated to the August Brent/BFOE Crude Oil option expiry on June 27th 2017. …

      The dominant market narrative is that the backwardation in Brent is evidence of surging global oil demand which has emptied inventories and is leading the price to new sunlit uplands. However, I see the market rather differently.

      Firstly, whether the Brent spot month is supported by financial, rather than physical demand, the result will still be a backwardation, and because few oil producers expect a price over $60 to be sustainable they therefore hedge and depress the forward price. In support of this view, I am far from the only market observer who believes that Aramco, and Rosneft would not be selling equity if either Saudi Arabia or Russia believed the oil price trajectory will be positive even in the medium term. …

      This still leaves open the $64 billion question of which market participant is motivated and able to support the ICE Brent term structure for years into the future by swapping dollar risk (T-Bills) for long term oil risk (oil reserves leased via prepay purchase/resale contracts).

      My conclusion by a process of elimination is that this Big Long can only be Saudi Arabia and regional allies, with Saudi Arabia now under the management of the thrusting young Mohammad bin Salman.”

      However, I do not agree with Alastair Crooke’s “In this way, Trump can ‘bring the troops home’, and yet America keeps its hegemony [America’s control of the world, global empire]. Military conflict becomes a last resort.” I explained at Strategic Culture on March 25th “How the Military Controls America” and noted there that “on 21 May 2017, US President Donald Trump sold to the Saud family, who own Saudi Arabia, an all-time-record $350 billion of US arms-makers’ products.” This means that not only Wall Street — the main institutional agency for America’s aristocracy — and not only American Big Oil likewise, are committed to the royal Saud family, but U.S. corporations such as Lockheed Martin also are. Vast profits are to be made, by insiders, in invasions and occupations, just as in gas and oil, and in brokerage. 

      Although Trump routinely talks about withdrawing U.S. troops, he does the exact opposite. And even if this trend reverses and America’s troop-numbers head down, while the U.S. economy becomes increasingly dependent upon Big Oil and Big Minerals and Big Money and Big Military, America’s military budget is, under Trump, the only portion of the entire U.S. federal Government that’s increasing; so, “Military conflict becomes a last resort” does not seem likely, in such a context. Rather, the reverse would seem to be the far likelier case.

      War against King Saud’s chosen enemies (Iran, Qatar, Syria) and possibly even against the U.S. aristocracy’s chosen enemy, Russia (and against Russia’s allies: China, Iran, and Syria) — seems more likely, not less likely, with Trump’s geostrategy.

      In fact, on 29 June 2017, when President Trump first announced his “Unleashing American Energy Event,” the President spoke his usual platitudes about the supposed necessity to increase coal-production, and what he said was telecast and publicized; but his U.S. Energy Secretary, the barely literate former Governor of Texas, Rick Perry, also delivered a speech, which was never telecast nor published, except that a few days later, on July 3rd, an excerpt from it was somehow published on the website of Liquified Natural Gas Global, and it was this:

      “I want to address what Mr. Cohn was talking about from a standpoint of how important American energy is as an option, not as the only option, but as an option to our allies and to count[r]ies around the world. 

      At the G7 it was really kind of interesting. The first thing they beat on the table talking about the Paris accord, you can’t get out of it, and I was kind of like OK. Then we would go into our bilats and they’d go, how about some of that LNG you’ve got? How do we buy your LNG, how do we buy your coal? And it was really interesting, it was a political issue for them. This whole Paris thing is a public relation[s], political issue for them. We made the right decision, the President made the right decision on this. I think it was one of the most powerful messages that early on in this administration that was sent. 

      We are in a position to be able to clearly create a hell of a lot more friends by being able to deliver to them energy and not being held hostage by some countries, Russia in particular. Whether it is Poland, Ukraine, the entirety of the EU. Totally get it, if we can lay in American LNG, if we can be able to have an alternative to Russian anthracite coal that they control in the Ukraine. That singularly will have more to do with keeping our allies free and building their confidence in us than practically anything else that I have seen out there. It is a positive message around the world right now.”

      If that was more the reality of Trump’s “Unleashing American Energy” policy than just the pro-global-burnout cheerleading of Trump’s mere words, then it seems to be — in the policy’s actual intent and implementation — more like “send more troops in” than “bring the troops home,” to and from anywhere. It is more like energy policy in support of the military policy, than military policy in support of the energy policy.

      This sounds even better for the stockholders of Lockheed Martin and other weapons-firms than for the stockholders of ExxonMobil and other extractive firms. On 6 March 2018, Xinhua News Agency reported that, “U.S. President Donald Trump’s chief economic adviser Gary Cohn has summoned executives from U.S. companies that depend on aluminum and steel to meet with Trump this Thursday, in a bid to persuade the president to drop his tariff plan, media reported Tuesday.”

      After all: Goldman has warehouses full of aluminum, and has the futures-contracts which already commit the Wall Street firm to particular manipulations in the aluminum (and other) markets. Controlling the Government so that it does only what you want it to do, and only when you want the Government to do it, is difficult. In any aristocracy, some members need to make compromises with other members, no matter how united they all are against the publics’ interests. This is the way it’s done – by compromises with each other.

    • Dead Wrong: Visualizing How Perceived Causes Of Death Differ From Reality

      The saying goes that nothing in this world is certain except for death and taxes.

      And rightfully so, the inevitability of death is a prominent fear for many humans around the world. After all, death is universal, mysterious, immutable, and sometimes sudden – and it can shake up life in ways that no other event can.

      But, as Visual Capitalist’s Jefff Desjardins asks is how we perceive death, along with its common portrayal in media, something that is accurate?

      PERCEPTIONS VS. REALITY

      Like anything that is shrouded in mystery, death has accumulated its fair share of myths and half-truths that get baked into our stories, perceptions, and societies.

      Even further, high-profile and tragic events like terrorist attacks, murders, and suicides dominate many aspects of the news cycle. As a result, the causes of death that media outlets are the most fixated on couldn’t be further from actual causes of human death as shown through statistics.

      The following animation, which comes from Aaron Penne, compares three data sets to show that our worries and media coverage have become quite disproportionate from the actual data. The animation looks at the following:

      • Which causes do we worry the most about? (Google Search data)
      • Which causes are talked about in the media? (NYT and Guardian headlines)
      • What are actual causes of death in the U.S.? (CDC data)

      And as you’ll see, the data is quite different for each source.

      We worry about cancer 10x more than we worry about heart disease, but in reality both diseases kill roughly the same amount of people. Meanwhile, the media is fixated on terrorism, homicides, and cancer, but heart disease – which kills more than all put together – receives almost no coverage.

      MORE DATA ON DEATH

      Actual causes of death are quite different from personal and media perceptions, but this data is not absolute either. After all, how someone may die depends greatly upon other factors like age.

      Here are causes of human death in the U.S. graphed by age group:

      The data shows that accidents are the leading cause of death for most ages up until 45 years old, at which case cancer and heart disease take over.

      While the topic of death is grim, the above data and statistics can arguably help provide a more realistic outlook regarding one of life’s certainties. It also shows that humans and media are not necessarily rational about this topic, so it’s important to think about it independently if at all possible.

    • Bitnation, Liberland, And Other Micronations Are Gaining Independence Via Crypto, But Crypto Alone May Not Be Enough

      Authored by Simon Chandler via CoinTelegraph.com,

      Ever since the “decentralised borderless voluntary nation” Bitnation was founded in July 2014, a slowly growing raft of startups and organisations have been attempting to seize cryptocurrencies as an opportunity to build entirely new nations from the ground up.

      image courtesy of CoinTelegraph

      Whether it be the landlocked Liberland or the seaborne Floating Island Project, they’ve taken cryptocurrencies and blockchains as the basis for a new way of organising how people live, interact and work. And even if they’ve approached the same fundamental task from varying angles, they all regard the decentralisation of crypto as a potential liberator from the top-down control of central governments, and from their inefficiencies and corruptions.

      However, despite the evangelical fervour with which many of these projects have pursued their missions, almost all of them have encountered similar obstacles. Not only have the limitations of blockchain technology held them back, but they’ve also suffered from the unsurprising resistance of national governments, which are perhaps less-than keen on being usurped by crypto-states.

      Funding, products and services

      The Floating Island Project is the most recent would-be crypto-state to have garnered press attention. Initially announced in 2013 by the Seasteading Institute (itself launched in 2008 and boasting Peter Thiel as an early investor), it aims to found an indefinite number of floating cities in and around French Polynesia, with the target-year for the establishment of its first city being 2022.

      In May, further details on the project were revealed, with the Seasteading Institute (SI) revealing that its inaugural island would accommodate 300 houses and be making use of its very own cryptocurrency, named Varyon (VAR).

      Nicolas Germineau, the co-founder and MD at Blue Frontiers (a Seasteading Institute offshoot which oversees the token) told Cointelegraph:

      “Varyon is a payment token which will initially generate revenues to fund the last steps of the pilot project and kickstart the ecosystem of Seasteads in French Polynesia. It will also be used widely afterwards as we build seasteads in more locations and establish relevant partnerships.”

      While Blue Frontiers’ planned attempts “to establish Varyon as a useful currency in and around the Seasteads” might imply that VAR will form the essential bedrock of the Project’s financial system and economy, Germineau affirms that VAR won’t in fact be the only accepted currency on the island and its eventual siblings.

      “It should be noted that we will not be forcing third parties to transact in Varyon among themselves, even within our SeaZone,” he says. “It is important to us to establish Varyon on its own merits and the onus is on Blue Frontiers to make it widely accepted, easy to use, and generally compelling enough to become a premier medium of exchange.”

      Cryptocurrencies, interference, and taxation

      In other words, cryptocurrency isn’t actually of indispensable importance to the day-to-day workings of the Floating Island Project, which could still theoretically operate without VAR. Instead, it’s using the digital currency in order to kickstart and boost its funding in a way that wouldn’t be possible via traditional investment, something which is common to certain other ‘crypto-state’ projects.

      For example, Liberland is a crypto-state lying on a 7km2 patch of land situated between Serbia and Croatia. It’s because of a territorial dispute between the two Balkan countries (stemming from the Yugoslav Wars of the 1990s) that the micronation’s founder, Vit Jedlicka, was able to lay claim to its small slither of territory in April 2015. But ever since, Croatian authorities have hounded the former Czech politician and the citizens of his new nation, with ‘President Jedlicka’ himself being arrested and fined in May 2015 for attempting to enter the newborn country.

      Given the Croatian establishment’s persecution of Liberland (which is recognised by no other nation), it’s unlikely that receiving taxation (which is voluntary) and other funds in a fiat currency such as the Croatian kuna would be a good idea, with the harder-to-seize nature of cryptocurrencies being considerably more preferable.

      Something broadly similar applies to Sol, also known as Puertopia. This is a (somewhat informal) ‘crypto-utopia’ settlement founded at some point in late 2017 in San Juan, Puerto Rico by child actor-cum-crypto entrepreneur Brock Pierce and a number of his fellow crypto-tycoons. According to a highly cited profile of Sol published in The New York Times, much of the attraction of “Sol” (or rather Puerto Rico) is its extremely lenient tax regime, with the US territory imposing no capital gains tax and no federal income tax.

      As such, hugely wealthy investors such as Pierce can reside in Sol without having to hand much (or any) money to a central government, something which indicates that their plans to establish a self-enclosed economy revolving around Bitcoin is perhaps an extension of this principle.

      As Reeve Collins, a resident of Sol and the founder of ‘blockchain app store’ BLOCKv, said in February’s profile:

      “No, I don’t want to pay taxes […] This is the first time in human history anyone other than kings or governments or gods can create their own money.”

      Libertarianism

      Of course, the desire to avoid paying tax or to evade the jurisdiction of an existing, larger nation can point to a deeper principle than simply wanting to hold onto money and/or achieve fiscal independence. For most of the projects mentioned above, libertarian political values play a guiding role, and while the merits of such values are open to debate, they regard a minimal state, fiscal sovereignty and free trade as the greatest goods a nation can attain.

      Starting with the Floating Island Project, aside from receiving early funds from libertarian Peter Thiel and being founded by fellow traveller Patri Friedman (grandson of economist Milton Friedman), the Seasteading Institute’s managing director Randolph Hencken has gone on record as saying:

      “The underlying philosophy is rooted in a belief that we can do better with technology and innovation rather than ideology, politics and argumentation.”

      Comparable views have been expressed by Liberland’s Vit Jedlicka, who said in February:

      “For many years, I worked for lowering taxes and regulations in the Czech Republic, but I suddenly realised that it would be easier to start a new country than to fix an existing one.”

      And much the same goes for the Free Society Foundation, announced in September 2017 by libertarians/crypto investors Roger Ver and Olivier Janssens. Its openly avowed aim is to “establish a rule of law based on libertarian principles and free markets,” and while it hasn’t outlined how it might harness the power of cryptocurrencies in order to realise this aim, Ver had hinted that an ICO was in the offing. He said in an interview given at the time:

      “Thanks to cryptocurrencies, now there is a way to fundraise for people all over the world who are interested in this.”

      Government resistance

      However, mention of the Free Society Foundation’s potential ICO leads to the obstacles such projects have faced, since Ver admitted in the same interview:

      “We were planning to have an ICO, but the regulators have kind of gotten in the way of that at the moment.”

      Regulators – or rather governments – may have also gotten in the way of the Foundation’s primary aim, which was to pay a sovereign government for the piece of land on which it would establish the “world’s first libertarian country.” Despite stating in September that “[government] interest was much higher than initially anticipated,” there has so far been no update on whether it’s actually made any progress in purchasing land, with our requests for comment from the Foundation being ignored.

      Aside from the persecuted Liberland, government hostility or indifference (call it what you will) may end up impeding the progress of the Floating Island Project. Despite signing a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with French Polynesia in January 2017, the French dependency distanced itself from the project this February, when it noted in a Facebook post that the validity of the MoU expired at the end of last year. As a result, it will no longer be collaborating with the Seasteading Institute on the development of a “special governing framework” for any floating islands, and may end up resisting plans to launch such islands altogether.

      Another issue crypto-states will encounter is a familiar one for any blockchain project: scalability. However, they’re optimistic that this challenge can be met, even if some of them – e.g. the Floating Island Project – operate on such blockchains as Ethereum’s, which was infamously backlogged by a video game last year, for instance. Nicolas Germineau tells Cointelegraph:

      Scalability is a challenge faced by the entire Ethereum community. Many initiatives, from proof of stake to off-chain settlement mechanisms, are going to make this less challenging moving forward. We have a lot of faith in the Ethereum development community and their ability to innovate, and we are confident they will solve these challenges.”

      Peaceful transition?

      Scalability aside, one crypto-nation that may not suffer so much resistance from vested governmental interests is one that doesn’t lay claim to any particular territory: Bitnation. Launched in July 2014 as the “world’s first Decentralised Borderless Voluntary Nation” (DBVN), it provides a range of blockchain-based governance services (e.g. public notaries, IDs, marriages), and ultimately aims to create a competitive global marketplace for such services that would make central governments redundant.

      While its COO James Fennell Tempelhof warned Cointelegraph last year that the “nation state will not give up [its power] easily” to blockchain-based alternatives, it’s interesting to note that Bitnation won the Grand Prix at UNESCO’s Netexplo Forum in May 2017 for its Refugee Emergency Response project, which began registering refugee IDs on the Bitcoin blockchain in September 2015.

      If nothing else, this glowing award from a UN agency reveals that the world’s governments do see at least some place for blockchain-based platforms to assume certain functions of theirs. And if they permit enough wriggle room to such crypto-state projects as Bitnation, these projects may end up claiming even more, with (Bitnation CEO and spouse of James) Susanne Tarkowski Tempelhof affirming in 2016, “we need to outcompete national governments at their original core function: security and jurisdiction.”

      For sure, such a transition is no doubt a long way away if it’s even possible, but with rumours that a certain crypto-exchange is planning its own micronation, the future of experimental blockchain-based states could end up being very interesting. These will have to compete with the enduring power of nationalism and patriotism, and they’ll also have to face up to questions concerning the real-world scalability of blockchains, but the variety of forms they’ve taken in recent years would indicate that they may throw up plenty of ideas and innovation along the way.

    • Morgan Stanley Is Wrong: Goldman Warns China's Credit Impulse Collapse Will "Drag On Growth" This Year

      Just over a month ago – in what seemed to be an effort to keep the dream of a global synchronous recovery narrative alive – Morgan Stanley attempted to show that the link between China’s (declining) credit impulse and the global economy (which we are constantly told is ebullient) has now been severed and all is well in the world.

      Their Chief Asia Economist Chetan Ahya began by confirming that “if you had been able to reliably pick the key global macro variable over 2012-16, China’s credit impulse would have been your choice” and explains why (this should be obvious to regular readers): 

      The incredibly tight link between the credit impulse and China’s growth cycle, emerging markets (EMs) exports, global growth and commodity prices meant that it would have accurately predicted the direction of almost all other global macro variables that mattered, with about six months’ lead time.

      He further explains the “simple” – in retrospect of course – reason behind this observation:

      China’s credit impulse – or its leverage cycle – was the only game in town back then. With global aggregate demand weak as developed markets (DMs) were deleveraging and EMs were adjusting, the change in China’s credit impulse was the most significant driver of the global economy

      However, in a striking claim which breaks with precedent and which, if correct suggests a historic change in the relationship between China’s credit creation and its impact on global markets and economies, the Morgan Stanley economist then writes that the link between China’s credit impulse and the global economy “has now been broken” and justifies his answer as follows: 

      China’s tightening has not had a material impact on the growth cycle either in China or globally, even though its credit impulse began to weaken about 24 months ago. As deleveraging and adjustment headwinds recede, the recoveries in domestic demand in both DMs and EMs have emerged as additional global growth engines.

      Ahya used the following chart to prove his thesis…

      However, Goldman Sachs disagrees, warning that things are aboutto get a lot more problematic for that global synchronous recovery narrative as China’s collapsing credit impulse wriggles its way thru the economy…

      Since 2008, there have been two and half distinct cycles in China credit. We see these cycles more clearly in the chart below, which plots net credit flows from lenders to borrowers against nominal IP growth in China.

      Lower net credit flows from lenders to borrowers weigh on future activity growth

      We can visually see how peaks/troughs in net credit flows from lenders to borrowers tend to systematically predict growth outperformance/ underperformance over a short period of time, but then growth underperformance/ outperformance over a longer horizon. For example, the peak in net credit flows from lenders to borrowers in late 2009, early 2013 and mid-2016 was systematically followed by peaks in nominal activity 2-3 quarters after, and then – in the case of peaks in 2009 and 2013 – a trough in nominal activity growth 2.5-3 years after. In our empirical estimations, we attempt to measure this predictable lag between peaks in net credit flow from lenders to borrowers and nominal activity growth.

      Credit boost to China activity peaked in mid-2017 and has declined since. With the results of our modeling exercise in hand, we can simulate the net impact of changes in the net credit flow on past and future activity growth. Armed with the stylized impact of shocks to credit flow on activity growth, we can sum up the effects from the historical path of changes in the net credit flow to generate an “aggregate growth impact of net credit flow” for every period. The results of this exercise for nominal growth are shown in the chart below.

      Net credit impulse to activity growth likely to decelerate over the coming year…

      This suggests that net credit flows were a substantial drag on growth in late 2014 and 2015, as new borrowings decelerated and debt service costs rose. Thereafter, as net credit flows rose in mid-2015 as new borrowings accelerated and debt service costs fell (maturity extensions and falling interest rates), this provided a meaningful boost to activity growth. The positive credit impulse on nominal activity peaked in mid-2017 , about a year after the peak in net credit flows and has declined since. Results for real activity growth are very similar.

      The credit impulse should continue to push activity growth modestly weaker in our base case of a stabilization in new borrowings at current levels. What can we expect for activity growth going forward? While the pre-specified path of debt service already bakes some impacts in the cake, we evaluate some scenarios on the future path of new borrowings in the economy, to estimate the net activity impact going forward (chart below).

      In our base case, where new borrowings stabilize at current levels, net credit flows would gradually decline as debt service costs rise, dragging nominal growth lower by 70bp (from +30bp above trend to -40bp below trend) and real growth lower by 20bp (from +5bp above trend to -15bp below trend) over the next 12 months. In practice, this scenario is in line with our expectation on the policy stance – i.e. that the government will continue to tighten policies in targeted areas (such as on shadow banking products, local government irregular borrowings etc) while keeping the broad monetary policy accommodative and lowering interest rates to offset some of the targeted tightening effect. The growth impacts in our base case are broadly in line with our current forecasts of modestly slower nominal and real GDP growth over the next year.

      … with more negative impacts on activity should new borrowings continue to decelerate at the same pace since mid-2016. In a bearish case, new borrowings continue to decelerate at the same pace they have done since mid-2016, and net credit flows decline more sharply than in our base case. In practice, this case could emerge if the government overtightens on shadow banking products or local governments’ irregular borrowings and does not sufficiently substitute these borrowings with other standard credit. In this base case, we would expect the drag on nominal growth to increase to 140bp and real growth to 40bp, over the next 12 months. Even in a more optimistic case in which new borrowings gradually increase to offset rising debt service costs over the next year, stabilizing net credit flows at current levels vs. GDP , real and nominal activity growth should decelerate although more modestly than our base case.

      The key takeaway from this exercise is that, barring meaningful increases in new borrowings over the next year, activity growth in China is likely to decelerate, as the credit impulse to activity growth fades and debt service costs rise.

       

    • Mattis: Withdrawing US Troops From Syria Would Be A "Strategic Blunder"

      Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

      Speaking at NATO headquarters of Friday, Secretary of Defense James Mattis reiterated his opposition to the idea of withdrawing US troops from Syria. He said any withdrawal before progress was made would be a “strategic blunder.”

      “In Syria, leaving the field before the special envoy Staffan de Mistura achieves success in advancing the Geneva political process we all signed for under the UN security council resolution would be a strategic blunder, undercutting our diplomats and giving the terrorists the opportunity to recover…”

      James Mattis

      Mattis’ position reflects those of a lot of top US cabinet officials, who have resisted President Trump’s talk of a quick withdrawal. He argues that the UN peace plan necessitates an ongoing US military presence.

      On the one hand, Mattis suggests leaving too soon could give “the terrorists the opportunity to recover.”

      On the other hand, he also says that leaving would be exploited by the Assad government and its supporters.

      This again sets out the US position that the UN plan necessitates regime change in Syria, something other supporters say is not the caase. It also suggests a more or less permanent US presence in Syria, since there is virtually no chance the US will impose a favorable outcome.

      Instead, Syria looks to be going the way of other major US wars, an open-ended situation short of success in which officials simultaneously are unable to come up with a plan to “win,” but will resist any pullout so they never completely lose.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 10th June 2018

    • When, Where, And How Will The Empire Strike Back?

      Authored by James George Jatras via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

      In any analysis of contemporary international politics it pays to be cautiously pessimistic. As the default mode one can generally expect that any way in which things can go wrong to threaten the peace and security of the planet, they will. Anticipation of improvement is a chump’s bet.

      That’s why the analyst’s gut instinct rebels at any indication that things overall may be moving in a positive direction, however haltingly or indirectly. But consider:

      • Europe’s anti-Russia sanctions: American pressure on Europe with respect to trade with Iran, added to Trump’s new tariffs, feeds resentment across Europe, especially in powerful Germany, which especially objects to Washington’s threatening sanctions on companies participating in Nord Stream 2. It may be too soon to guess how soon the EU will pull the plug on anti-Russian sanctions, but there’s something in the air when even the likes of European Commission President Jean-Claude Juncker can say that “Russia-bashing has to be brought to an end.”  Italy’s voice will be key.

      At the epicenter of each one of these earthshaking developments is one man: Donald Trump.

      It would be inaccurate to say that these are even moves of the US government, of which Trump is only in partial control. With the permanent government – not to mention some of his own appointees – seeking to undermine him at every step, Trump seems to be resorting to the one tool he has at his personal disposal: disruption.

      Let’s remember that, especially in the Rust Belt states of Pennsylvania, Ohio, Michigan, and Wisconsin, those who voted for Trump wanted something radically different from business as usual. They voted for him because they wanted a bull in a china shop, a wrecking ball, a human hand grenade, a big “FU” to the system.

      Maybe that’s what we got.

      To be sure, none of the foregoing itemized developments is dispositive. But taken together they point to a remarkable confluence of good omens, at least from the point of view of those who wanted to shake up, even shatter, the cozy arrangements that have guided the so-called “liberal global order.”

      But those whose careers and privileges, and in some cases their freedom and even lives, depend on perpetuating that order will not go gentle into that good night. They are getting nervous. This means in particular the elements of the US-UK special services, their Democratic and GOP Never-Trump fellow travelers, the Trump-hating fake news media, and the bureaucratic nonentities in Brussels (not only at the European Commission but at NATO headquarters).

      If past is prologue, the Empire will strike back – hard and dirty.

      One is reminded of the past seven years of war in Syria, where every time the US indicated a willingness to disengage, or when Syrian forces had made major military gains, then – BAM! – a chemical weapons attack immediately and without evidence is attributed to government forces, followed by renewed cries of “Assad is killing his own people! Assad must go!” (This is a ploy that goes back at least the Bosnian war of the 1990s. Every time a negotiated ceasefire seemed to be taking shape, another “Serb mortar attack” on civilians took place, leading to calls for NATO military action.)

      The question is not “if” there will be a provocation, rather it’s one of when, where and how. While it’s difficult to make predictions, especially about the future, it’s nonetheless possible to anticipate some possibilities:

      • FIFA World Cup 2018 in Russia (June 14 to July 15): Given the huge expense and effort Russia has put into the World Cup as a favorable showcase to the world, it will be a tempting target. Let’s remember that the unconstitutional ouster of Ukraine’s elected government took place as Putin’s attention was presumably distracted by his pride and joy, the 2014 Sochi Winter Olympics. The 2008 attack by Georgia’s then-president, Mikheil Saakashvili, on South Ossetia, was launched while the world’s eyes were focused on the Summer Olympics in Beijing. Both initiatives led to a strong counteraction by Moscow, leading in turn to worsened relations between Russia and the west – including Russia’s suspension from the G8 in 2014. (Though in the fevered imagination of western Russophobes, Putin was the one using the games as a cover, not the other way around.) A provocation could be directed against the FIFA events themselves – perhaps a terrorist attack by ISIS operatives reportedly being ferried out of the Middle East to Russia – or something elsewhere timed to coincide with matches being played all over Russia.

      • Ukraine: Regarding President Petro Poroshenko’s actions, everything must be put into the context of upcoming presidential elections in 2019. Poroshenko has to find a way to get into a runoff, presumably against Yulia Tymoshenko. The most beneficial thing he could do would be somehow to pull a rabbit out of his hat and achieve a peace deal in the Donbas. But chances of that are slim to none, as it would require flexibility from Kiev that Poroshenko can’t afford to show lest he be accused of being a Russian puppet. Conversely, he can up the ante with the Russians and hope the West will line up behind him. Perhaps the recent fake news murder fiasco regarding the still very much alive Arkady Babchenko was to have been one such ploy but it misfired. But there are other options, such as a provocation along the line of control in the Donbas (the newly delivered US Javelin missiles are handy, as is the Dutch MH17 report), maybe a covert attack on the Kerch bridge, as well as other less obvious possibilities.

      • Incident between NATO and Russian forcesNATO forces are stepping up provocative maneuvers on Russia’s doorstep in the Baltic and Black seas – purely to deter Moscow’s aggression, mind you. An incident could occur as any time, either by accident or on purpose. Either way, it would be the hostile Russians’ fault for putting their country so close to our bases and the venues of our military exercises.

      • Assassination: One of Putin’s well-known predilections is for killing, or at least attempting to kill, anyone who might displease him. Or like Assad with his chemical weapons, maybe Putin kills just for the sheer, malicious fun of it. The list of victims is long: Babchenko (except, not), the two Skripals (except, not them either), political opponents like Boris Nemtsov and Sergei Yushenkov, muckraking journalists like Anna Politkovskaya and Natalia Estemirova, former chekist Aleksandr Litvinenko, RT network founder Mikhail Lesin, crusading lawyers like Stanislav Markelov and Sergei Magnitsky, oligarch Boris Berezovsky, and so on. A well-timed rubout of a suitably visible figure would have a salubrious impact on any annoying moves towards east-west rapprochement. No evidence is needed – the mere identity of the victim would be irrefutable proof of Putin’s guilt.

      Regarding the last item, assassination, it should always be kept in mind that in the end the man threatening to upset the applecart of the liberal global order isn’t Putin – it’s Trump. That suggests an ultimate solution that might become tempting if The Donald’s continued functioning at higher than room temperature becomes just too much to endure.

      As Joseph Stalin is reputed to have remarked, “Death solves all problems. No man, no problem.” Trump, who for many powerful people is quite a problem indeed, has been recklessly compared to Jean-Marie Le Pen, Silvio Berlusconi, Vladimir Putin – even to Hitler and Mussolini. In an American context, to Andrew Jackson, Huey Long, and George Wallace. Let’s note that each of those three Americans was the target of assassination. Jackson (someone Trump is known to admire) survived by a failure of his attacker’s pistols, hailed by some at the time as miraculous. “The Kingfish” was killed. Wallace was crippled for life.

      There is reason to think that Trump is well aware of the fate of the last American president who so threatened the habitual order of things and the entrenched, ruthless establishment that profits so mightily from it. He has repeatedly indicated his interest in releasing the full file on Jack Kennedy’s assassination, then backed off from it for undisclosed reasons. The shooting death of the president’s brother Robert Kennedy, who had he been elected president in 1968 would have had the opportunity to reopen the investigation into his brother’s murder, is back in the news with Robert Kennedy, Jr., expressing doubt about the official conclusion that his father was killed by Sirhan Sirhan.

      If anyone thinks there is any length to which Trump’s enemies will not go, think again.

    • Visualizing How American Household Finances Are Changing

      Via VisualCapitalist.com,

      VISUALIZING SHIFTS IN INCOME, SAVINGS, DEBT, AND SPENDING

      Courtesy of: Visual Capitalist

      FROM PEAK TO PEAK

      In 2007, real median household income had a local peak of $58,149, and then fell off a cliff at the same time as the credit cycle, which reached its own peak in 2008 Q3 as the financial crisis set in.

      Real median household income bottomed in 2012, and then debt followed in 2013.

      Looking at the most recent year of data available, both categories are now back above pre-crisis highs. Real median household income has now surpassed its all-time record in 1999 – and total household debt has topped $13 trillion in 2018 Q1, more than $500 billion higher than its previous peak in 2008.

      A CLOSER LOOK

      While consumer debt is similar in terms of total size from a decade ago, the composition has changed considerably.

      Mortgage debt, which makes up the vast majority of consumer debt, is still actually down from its 2008 peak by 4%. Replacing that is other forms of debt, including student loans:

      Note: it appears the data listed in this table is one quarter more recent than Meeker’s, which was represented in chart

      Since 2008, student loan debt has surged by 131% – and auto loans by 52%. Mortgage debt, credit debt, and other non-housing debt have not yet crawled back to pre-crisis peaks.

      SAVING AND SPENDING

      Looking at the longer-term trend, Americans are borrowing more and saving fewer dollars.

      In the 1970s, both rates were about the same as a percentage of income, falling in a range between 13-15%. Today, the savings rate is below 5%, and debt-to-annual income ratio has risen to 22%, according to Meeker.

      What are American households spending money on?

      Notably, households are spending more on shelter and healthcare – meanwhile, the cost for food, entertainment, and apparel are decreasing over time.

    • The NSA's Newly-Declassified Propaganda Posters Are Wild

      Authored by Katherine Schwab via FastCoDesign.com,

      Plenty of bosses hang up motivational posters around the office. But it’s not just companies that do this kind of brainwashing by graphic design: the NSA does, too.

      A ream of internal propaganda posters that the NSA released in the 1950s and 1960s are now available online, thanks to a FOIA request from 2016. And they are a perfect mix of surreal imagery, pop culture references, and dark propaganda. One poster has a creepy skull inside of a spotlight with the words, “Don’t TALK yourself to death!”

      A “Season’s Greetings” poster displays a Norman Rockwell-esque scene of a cute little town blanketed in snow–and a grim reminder at the bottom of the image that “security takes no holiday.” This poster in particular is so creepy because of how the designers juxtaposed the sheer normalcy of the scene and the frilly, Hallmark Card font used to wish employees happy holidays with their eerie message of constant vigilance and loyalty to the government.

      Perhaps the most bone-chilling is a poster featuring the last words of the Gettysburg Address, with the word “people” crossed out in bloody red ink and replaced with “STATE.” Just in case NSA employees forgot who they were working for.

      Because these paranoid posters are from so many years ago, the NSA of today doesn’t know who designed them, but whoever it was had the daunting task of reminding employees what the NSA is all about while scaring them into keeping their mouths shut. And the designers used some surreal tactics to get their point across. One poster declares, “Security is everyone’s responsibility” with dozens of heads that look like they were cut out from magazines floating on a pale yellow background.

      Another shows a group of people walking down some stairs, all with images of old-fashioned safe locks in place of their mouths–bizarre enough to give you nightmares. Perhaps one of the most direct shows an image of a man’s hands tied behind his back with the grim caption, “Communist security.”

      After all, many of the posters were from the era of McCarthy’s Red Scare.

      There are pop culture and artistic references in the posters as well, including the Mona Lisa, Rodin’s The Thinker, and even a poster devoted to John Travolta in Saturday Night Fever, complete with a terrible, hilarious pun: “Security-fever–catch it!”

      It’s like the NSA is a very dorky parent who’s trying to be hip–dad jokes about John Travolta and all–but still has to make sure the kids never tell the family secrets.

      The NSA told me that these kinds of posters still populate its walls, mostly in office areas where employees tend to congregate, like elevators, cafeterias, and water fountains, and maintains that they’re nothing out of the ordinary. Nonetheless, old posters are surreal gems of graphic design that capture the anxiety–and insanity–of the Cold War era.

      Check out the entire set of posters here.

    • Stunning Hawaii Aerial Footage Shows Mile-Wide Volcanic Front, 230 Ft Lava Geyser

      Aerial and satellite photos taken over the Kilauea volcano on Hawaii’s big island reveal the extent of devastation caused by the massive eruption which began on May 3 – destroying 600 homes, roughly 500 of which occurred after the most recent eruption, which sent lava coursing through the communities of Kapoho beach and Vacationland. While thousands of people have been evacuated from the region, officials fear up to a dozen residents who refused to leave are dead. 

      The USGS notes that an estimated 4008.2 million cubic feet of lava has saturated the Eastern side of the Big Island – which would fill 45,000 Olympic-sized swimming pools, or 11 million dump trucks – enough to cover Manhattan Island up to a depth of six feet

      Aerial footage shows the flow front covering nearly a mile of coastline spewing toxic steam, also known as “vog,” which will be blown inland until at least Sunday. 

      Meanwhile, fissure #8 is belching a steady fountain of lava up to 230 feet in the air. 

      Flow map as of Friday:

      A helicopter flyover of the crater shows the funnel-shaped collapsed floor with a deeper cylindrical shaft filled with rubble. 

      A special mention goes out to the USGS Volcano social media team (@USGSVolcanoes, Facebook), who have been working hard to provide a constant flow of critical updates and stunning footage of the ongoing Kilauea eruption, along with fun facts:

    • Facing The (Horrible) Future

      Authored by Chris Martenson via PeakProsperity.com,

      I’d like to tell you a short story based on a movie that has had a profound impact on me.

      I’ll get to the story in a moment, but first, a little background on the movie… 

      It’s called Griefwalker (by Tim Wilson) and it focuses on the life and wisdom of Stephen Jenkinson, a theologian and philosopher who worked as an end-of-life specialist for many years.  Because we all must face death in our lives, inevitably our own someday, I highly recommend this movie and Stephen’s work to everyone. 

      After sitting at the death beds of a thousand individuals, Stephen has accumulated a wisdom regarding the process of dying that is perhaps unmatched in our modern times. His views and insights are extraordinarily powerful and extremely well-delivered in the movie. 

      Stephen is a blunt yet thoughtful man, and my own interview with him (Living with Meaning) remains one of my all-time favorites.

      At one point in Griefwalker, Stephen was lobbed what I’m sure the interviewer thought was a soft-ball question.  From memory, and I last watched the movie a few years ago so I’m certain to have this inexactly recalled, it was along the lines of “So, Stephen, you’ve learned how to ease people through the process of dying. How is that done?”  I guess the idea was that after being so steeped and skilled at shepherding people through the process of dying, Stephen had arrived at some tidy formula for making it as gentle as possible.

      Without blinking Stephen said, “Oh no. Dying for most people these days is horrible.”  After a few shocked fumbly moments by the interviewer, and I confess to having been shocked too, Stephen continued, explaining that the physical process of dying can certainly be managed easily and well with palliative care, but the emotional journey can be quite terrifying (at first). 

      The reason why is because most people spend their entire lives pretending as if death is somehow avoidable. So when they find themselves dying, they suddenly have to confront the fact that they may have forgotten to fully ‘live’ during their one and only shot at life. 

      To suddenly realize the most precious thing you had was barely treasured along the way, never to be recovered, can indeed be a horrible moment.

      As far as we know, we’ve only got one life to live — and facing our end puts that into sharp focus. As Stephen says in his book Money and the Soul’s Desires“Not success. Not growth. Not happiness. The cradle of your love of life … is death.”

      To look back on one’s time on Earth and realize how much of it was spent not really being alive, not loving, not noticing, not being present with what is, is to realize that your one glorious ride was largely spent without reflection, depth or meaning. It was squandered. And there’s no undoing that fact. Again, that moment of realization is a bad moment.

      I’m not writing this to push you to ponder your own demise, though that may be a healthy pursuit for many of us. Rather, I want to direct your attention towards a moment of horror that I think is coming – for all of us.

      Where We’re Headed

      Travel with me to the future. Imagine that the year is now 2040. 

      If we suddenly woke in that year, what would we see in the world?  More importantly, what would we not see? Which species would be missing? Which ecosystems will have utterly collapsed?

      By extrapolating trends already in place (many of which are accelerating) we can easily predict a future world where there are no large animals left. Perhaps the last giraffe was killed and eaten by a hungry mob back in 2033, joining the White Rhino which was lost back in 2018. 

      Lions and tigers can no longer be found in the wild; their genetic stock hopelessly compressed into a few zoos and frozen test-tubes, should humans ever rally to justify the expense of trying to resurrect those species. 

      There are no coral reefs anywhere in the oceans, and essentially no diversity of life left in the seas at all. Acidification has upset and mostly ruined the ocean ecology from the bottom up.

      First, we noticed that the oysters no longer successfully made it out of the larval stage. But by the time the scientists delivered a loud enough warning for all of the missing copepods and other vital zooplankton, it was already too late. The jellyfish had taken over. Nobody has a clue how to get the ecology to return to one that can support tuna, rockfish, dolphins, whales, seals and seabirds. Those are all gone — starved, fished or hunted to extinction.

      Worse, the ubiquitous jellyfish are entirely too efficient. In addition to decimating the zooplankton, the jellyfish are eating the phytoplankton responsible for generating most of the world’s oxygen — their levels too low to continue being a positive force for oxygen release into the atmosphere. “Don’t worry!” scream the Tweets, “Scientists have found a new and better way in the lab to harness the sun to split water. We can make our own oxygen!”  However, after the past 1,000+ lab ‘miracle breakthroughs’ that proved to be duds when attempted at scale, few have hope that this time will prove any different.

      The vast systems offered by Nature — more accurately, that were offered by Nature — once taken for granted, are now fully appreciated by the people left on Earth. But it’s too late. 

      The insects are mostly gone, at least in terms of diversity. The terrestrial ecosystem balance that people knew and loved back in “the twenty teens” is gone and has been replaced by something far simpler and painfully less interesting. The failure to block neonicotinoid pesticides in time, as well as their more morally repugnant (yet legal!) derivations that outpaced activist’s ability to fight them, meant that entire classes of pollinators were lost. 

      With those, entire species of plants disappeared because they were utterly dependent on highly-specific pollinator services. Mankind’s few lame attempts at creating “drone pollinators” were so utterly unfit for the task that the term became a profoundly disparaging insult, most frequently applied to ineffective politicians.  “Looks like another useless bill being put up by the drone pollinator from New York.”

      A few hardy bugs and roaches, lots and lots of ants (where are they all coming from?), and very few flying insects remain. No more large moths in the temperate climates, with such splendid examples as the Luna and Hawk moths now only existing as dead specimens in a few museums, right next to the dodo and African elephant displays. 

      And it’s been over 15 years since “the dawn chorus of birds” was a phrase that had any meaning. Nearly all of the migratory birds are gone, along with all of the insect eating species.  It’s eerily silent outside in the morning. The sight of a single bumblebee, or a flash of colorful plumage, is cause for a quickening of your pulse — the same physical reaction people once had when as noticing a movie star at a café.

      Life, where it now exists in pockets, is revered.  In nearly every place it remains, human guardians quickly dispatch any poachers or defilers, burying the bodies without remorse.  Non-human life has become more valuable than human life.

      Fossil fuels began peaking in 2030 in terms of total BTUs from all sources: oil, gas and coal. And while not crashing, they’ve unable to provide more, which exposed the ‘continuous growth’ model as being a cruelly-attractive mirage. Its handmaiden, debt-based money, was also revealed to be an artifact of the surplus energy from fossil fuels. Both models have failed. 

      As has retirement, a several-generation luxury never to be repeated again in human history. Everyone left alive has to work, if they want to eat.

      With the loss of those fantasies, everything is now a difficult trade-off. Not surprising, many people are unable to cope with the consequences.  Suicides are a leading cause of death, especially among those born during earlier and more abundant times. 

      Worst of all, food is now increasingly scarce due to a horrid combination of ruined soils and ever more frequent and destructive climate disruptions. Rains fall where they shouldn’t and fail increasingly to fall where they should.  Or they fall too hard, and too fast.   Summers with temperatures of over 50C baked crops compounding water shortages, with several years’ harvests lost entirely because the overnight temperatures did not cool sufficiently to allow for the open-air pollination of corn. Who knew?

      How did we ever get to 9 billion people on Earth without considering that this moment might have arrived?

      How did we allow ourselves to pretend that it wouldn’t?

      Why did we let the fantasy of relocating to Mars capture such a broad swath of our imagination and focus?  Sure, we put an outpost there for a few years in the 2020’s, but – guess what? – it turns out that Mars is a hostile planet to life. It’s utterly lacking in resources, it’s much farther from the sun than the Earth, and managing a high-tech existence there was a colossal struggle.  Of course we should have realized that going in and not placed so much of our species’ odds on that hope. We spent hundreds of billions getting to Mars at the same time we were spending trillions to destroy Earth.  What a horrible idea that was.  In retrospect, it’s all so terribly obvious.

      Another forlorn diversion was vertical farming, which posited that we’d just grow salad greens in container boxes.  Of course, with some simple math and logic, we should have been able to realize that plants are calorie conversion machines, turning light energy into food energy.  The idea that we were going to meaningfully replace the sun’s free and intense full-spectrum light with our own manufactured lighting, at scale and in sufficient quantities to meaningfully address the caloric needs of 9 billion people was…not very well thought through.  Actually, in retrospect, that’s being too kind.  We were deluding ourselves.

      And so, out here in 2040, looking back, we humans have suddenly come to our collective moment of horrible realization. Because we could not face the idea that our specie’s pursuit of collective growth had a predictable end, we forgot to properly care for the one planet we have.

      Now that life on Earth is dying, the regret comes pouring out.  Oh, how much we’d give to once again be able to hear a cacophony of birds in the morning! Or to swim over a thriving coral reef!  Or to boat over an ocean teeming with fishes, whales and sea birds.  Instead, the waters are now blank, sterile and depressing. 

      Remorse and regret.  How could we have been so utterly stupid?  How could we not have rallied in response to the warning signs, the endless string of increasingly desperate red flashing warning lights any one of which could have — and should have — been sufficient to motivate us?

      Oh, what we would give to get one more chance!  To go back in time and do things differently, protecting and preserving the Earth’s treasures as if…as if we were deeply in love with all of them.

      Our Last Chance

      In Dickens’ A Christmas Carol, Scrooge is given the chance to return to his present and get another shot at life. If the 2040 vision I’ve painted terrifies you on a fundamental level as it does me, just know that there’s still the chance to wake up and positively alter the course of events.

      Yes, the trends are very bad, but they can be changed. As I am fond of saying, we already have all the knowledge and technology we need to be agents of regeneration and abundance instead of extraction and degeneration. We simply lack the right narrative to mobilize our society productively.

      Go outside and rejoice in what nature has still to offer.  Really see the next bird or mammal or insect you encounter.  Each one is pure magic.  Take a good hard look at the individual before you, not a robin, but that robin. Not a squirrel, but that squirrel. That bumblebee.  Each is an individual, same as you.  Each has a role, a life, and is busy making decisions and contributing to the story exactly how it is supposed to.

      This world we have is the only one we’ll ever have. It’s the one we evolved on and to which our DNA blueprints are exquisitely crafted. And it’s not dying, it’s being killed. We might as well be honest about that and use the active verb.

      Killed actively and on purpose, but also by negligence.  We’re neglecting to notice what’s true: that humans are a part of, not apart from nature.  We are one with the larger world.  It’s time to wake up and live into that story. It’s not a new one, but something we forgot in our hasty failing efforts to escape its limits — limits that disappointed our fragile egos which wanted, needed, to be special and different. 

      Life ends, and life begins. There’s an evolutionary impulse underway that has given this brief moment of geological history both humans and elephants.  We cannot know where evolution is going or why, but we can feel the potential of it all.

      Elephants, as well as all of life, should be revered and cared for not because children’s books need real-life examples, or zoos need fresh breeding stock, or even because Kenya needs tourist dollars. But simply because they are here. With us. In this time.

      A certain humility needs to be adopted along the lines of We simply don’t know what role the special and peculiar sentience of elephants is playing, so we’d better protect it. Because we don’t know. If we remove that species from the web of life, what cascade may we create?

      A Call To Action

      I could dredge up all the perilous ecological data I publish often on this site, noting the decline in virtually every species — with many being lost every day and many more on the brink. But I won’t.

      There’s no need. You already know in your gut that something is very badly wrong in this story. Something even worse than killing the life on the planet, including our own.

      No, what’s worse is that we can do better but we’re not.  We can have immense empathy, and bond with both humans and non-humans alike.  We are capable of dimly grasping our own role on this planet and yet we’re collectively continuing to act as if….we’ll live forever.  If there are problems with that approach, we’re assuming we’ll figure them out as they arise.

      But as Stephen Jenkinson pointed out, when the stakes are too high that leads to a horrible moment. To get serious about saving other species after they are already gone is a wildly immature idea. 

      But it is still in our power to avoid that horrible moment. That’s where the idea of a ‘movement’ comes in.  Look, I have little clue about how to actually start a self-sustaining global movement, but I do suspect that it has to involve (1) the right idea at (2) the right time and (3) involve the right people.

      We have to do this. I know the time is right because so many people are already deeply unhappy with suicide rates up 30%, opioid addictions and death skyrocketing, and levels of depression (more accurately termed demoralization in most cases) at never before seen levels. 

      Those are all expressions of people who have lost their will to engage with life, or even to continue living.  That means a loss of meaning and purpose, a devastating loss. Adam’s recent report gives a hard-hitting breakdown of the mental health epidemic our disconnected and unfulfilling modern way of life has created. Be sure to read it if you haven’t already.

      To truly “save the planet” is to actually undertake the harder proposition of “saving ourselves.”  The planet will be fine … but humans?  Maybe not so much.

      Changing any of this will begin with each of us as individuals.  We have to become the change we wish to see.  We have to shift the narrative away from the old bankrupt idea of infinite growth on a finite planet, or that humans are apart from (rather than a part of) Nature, and towards a better narrative that aligns better with the world as it actually is.

      This is a tough sell, for sure. Ultimately, it requires us to find a way past our instinctual drive for comfort and more ‘stuff’.  Waking up to the realities involved is not easy nor pain-free. It’s emotionally devastating at first. And who wants to go through that?

      “Inattention to the world’s ecological state is well advised. Because attention to it mitigates against your happiness, contentment, and your sense of well-being.”

      “Having a conscience now is a grief-soaked proposition”

      ― Stephen Jenkinson

      I do, for one. Why? Because to do so is to pass through the tunnel that brings me back to living fully into the one life that I have.  I’m here to live, to make a difference, and to help usher new ideas into the world. The alternative is to face a bitter end-of-life moment that was unavoidable in the first place.

      What needs to happen is to somehow awaken the people of the world to the actual nature of the predicaments we face, recognize their inevitability, and go through the wrenching adjustments necessary to realign our collective narrative with the objective truths of our times. 

      But how?

      In some ways I’m encouraged, because so many people seem to be waking up.  I know this terrifies The Powers That Be, who so desperately want to cling to their authority at any and all costs, because I track their efforts towards shaping the narrative.  There’s nothing subtle about the ways that Wikipedia constantly degrades and disparages the pages devoted to anti-war activists while grotesquely supporting the neocon and war party efforts and related sympathetic journalists.

      Twitter and Facebook are constantly stifling various views while elevating those that fall under the umbrella of promoting business as usual and protecting the ideas of those already in power.  In other words: more war, more unfairness, and maybe some barely-passable lip-service to the idea that maybe we should devote a percent or two of our resources towards rear-guard actions to protect the environment.  None of which are actually effective, of course, or else they would be immediately marginalized as the work of terrorists or malcontents.

      All of which is to say that any revolution of thought won’t be televised, as they once said., Perhaps in today’s age we should amend this to: The revolution won’t be posted to FB and then successfully re-Tweeted.

      In other words, please don’t wait for this to appear on your radar before you take it seriously.  It will only ever appear long after it’s far too late.

      The revolution underway is already being conducted in places like our own site Peak Prosperity, as well as Charles Eisenstein’sCharles Hugh Smith’sZerohedgeJim Kunstler, and Craig Murray’s as well as countless others not named here.  Each of these sites is committed to telling narratives that run counter to what the guardians in the MSM would like you to hear. 

      Each of these alternative websites is saying, in its own way, Hey the old way doesn’t even make sense anymore, is shot through with logical inconsistencies, and in many cases lacks even basic morality. Collectively, they’re offering an invitation to see things differently, and to begin acting differently.

      Our challenge is to remain focused, to promote the new ideas, and to be the leaders that are needed in these changing and difficult times.  Our adversaries are those peddling fantasies that serve only to pacify our growing inner discomfort as the world dies around us, as well as those who seek to diffuse, distort and decay the new messages either for corporate or political ends.

      Our various social media platforms are a slithering mess of ever-changing algorithms (making it hard to know who you are or aren’t reaching with any given post), paid trolls, and bots programmed to deceive, slide, and/or derail any given conversation.

      Which means we’ll need to be alert to those tactics and find other ways of remaining in touch.  You’ll need to trust your own instincts, and avoid the numerous and sophisticated ways that we are being made to feel powerless, isolated, and even a bit crazy for thinking the things we do.

      My personal strategy is to (severely) limit my time on Facebook, use Twitter only for data and never opinions, and then comment at sites like Peak Prosperity where the moderation is heavy and bots and trolls are quickly booted.

      This movement will consist of good people taking right action.  People who are willing to lead because they know it falls to them and they are not afraid to stand out and be different for a while.  People who can read the data and know that it is correct because they can feel it in their bones.

      The time for infinite growth is over. It’s increasingly obvious that the benefits of pursuing growth have nosed over, and that the human rocket is now pointed towards the Earth.

      We still have time to right this ship, but it’s going to take heroic efforts by a lot of people.  We need to be willing to give much and possibly lose even more.  However, it won’t be futile sacrifice, because this is just how things are sometimes.  You were born here and now, into these times, and your gifts are desperately needed.

      We need each other. And you know what?  Along they way we may just discover unity, purpose, meaning and our true individual gifts to bring forth.

      My personal invitation is to support the mission of Peak Prosperity (“Creating a World Worth Inheriting”) by becoming an active premium subscriber so that Adam and I can continue to bring these messages to the world, along with promising models for a sustainable future.  If not that, then please use your time and money to support others working in these areas, not least of which would be the important works of the individuals writing the blogs listed above.

      It’s only by facing the true nature of our predicaments that we can avoid a truly horrible future moment of deep and profound regret. 

      Time still remains, but it is running short. 

      We are open to any and all ideas about how to build, join or support a movement of like-minded people who are ready and able to shuck the old conventions and start anew which begins by facing the data as we know it today.

      None of the former splitting/sorting functions of old apply here.  So please don’t offer up one political party over the other, or any one country or system as being better, or ways we might vote new and better scoundrels into office, or tweaks to the existing exponential debt-based fiat money system that might extend things a bit longer.  None of those hold any merit.

      We need a new narrative and even if it cannot lay claim to “the truth” it cannot be based on obvious falsehoods.  How do we create that new narrative in a way that it can be shared broadly?  What needs to be done?  Who should be involved? 

      Perhaps nothing needs doing, and this will all unfold of its own accord when its ready, but for those with an active “do” gene, like us, there are things to be done and efforts to be made.

      So let’s get going.  Either we do this on our own terms now, or we all face the horror of profound regret later. 

      The really good news? If we do this right, we reclaim our lives, our sense of meaning, our connection to each other and the sacred, and we fulfill our potential as creative stewards of planet Earth.

    • Millionaire Bill Maher "Hoping" For Economic Disaster To Oust Trump

      HBO host Bill Maher, who makes $6 million/year on top of his estimated $100 million net worth, would love nothing more than an economic collapse in order to “get rid of Trump.” 

      “this economy is going pretty well,” Maher said (total jobless claims remain the lowest they’ve been in 44 years, for example) before telling political commentator Shermichael Singleton “I feel like the bottom has to fall out at some point. And by the way, I’m hoping for it. Because I think one you get rid of Trump is a crashing economy. So please, bring on the recession. Sorry if that hurts people, but it’s either root for a recession  or you lose your democracy.”

      Maher, a multi-millionaire, would hardly be affected if the economy crashed, unlike millions of low and medium income Americans whose lives would be immeasurably worse if the HBO host’s dreams come true.

      For example, Maher could continue to attend Dominus – an elite $75,000 / year members-only sex club that requires a “blood oath” to join. 

      As we noted earlier, Bank of America made the case that the only thing that would stop a “nuclear” trade war is a market crash, while last week Goldman suggested that if President Trump wants to win the brewing international trade war, the market has to tank. 

      As BofA puts it: 

      Market discipline could break the spiral. The markets provide immediate and publically observable feedback from investors on the expected effects of policies. So far, US equities have only had a small negative reaction to news on trade. This has likely emboldened the administration to take a more aggressive stance. But if back-and-forth tariffs with China were to cause a large selloff in US equities, China would probably push harder, knowing that continued escalation would be costly for the US.

      BofA escalated the impact of a market crash on the political realm, and writes that, in a similar manner, “elections clarify the costs and benefits of protectionism. If the Republican party retains control of the House of Representatives and the Senate in November’s midterm elections, free-trade advocates in the Republican party may remain reluctant to push back against the President. The opposite might be true if the Democrats win.”

      In summary, BofA sees risks to the view that “cooler heads will prevail” on trade, and its concern is not so much irrational action, but that the US and its trading partners could rationally engage in tit-for-tat protectionism, with growing economic costs, in order to test each other’s resolve, while markets remain dormant and allow even greater escalation. Still, the Bank of America economists ultimately remain hopeful “because market and electoral discipline could break up this dynamic.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • Still Waiting For Evidence Of A Russian Hack

      Authored by Ray McGovern via Consortium News,

      More than two years after the allegation of Russian hacking of the 2016 U.S. presidential election was first made, conclusive proof is still lacking and may never be produced…

      If you are wondering why so little is heard these days of accusations that Russia hacked into the U.S. election in 2016, it could be because those charges could not withstand close scrutiny. It could also be because special counsel Robert Mueller appears to have never bothered to investigate what was once the central alleged crime in Russia-gate as no one associated with WikiLeaks has ever been questioned by his team.

      Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity — including two “alumni” who were former National Security Agency technical directors — have long since concluded that Julian Assange did not acquire what he called the “emails related to Hillary Clinton” via a “hack” by the Russians or anyone else. They found, rather, that he got them from someone with physical access to Democratic National Committee computers who copied the material onto an external storage device — probably a thumb drive. In December 2016 VIPS explained this in some detail in an open Memorandum to President Barack Obama.

      On January 18, 2017 President Obama admitted that the “conclusions” of U.S. intelligence regarding how the alleged Russian hacking got to WikiLeaks were “inconclusive.” Even the vapid FBI/CIA/NSA “Intelligence Community Assessment of Russian Activities and Intentions in Recent U.S. Elections” of January 6, 2017, which tried to blame Russian President Vladimir Putin for election interference, contained no direct evidence of Russian involvement.  That did not prevent the “handpicked” authors of that poor excuse for intelligence analysis from expressing “high confidence” that Russian intelligence “relayed material it acquired from the Democratic National Committee … to WikiLeaks.”  Handpicked analysts, of course, say what they are handpicked to say.

      Never mind. The FBI/CIA/NSA “assessment” became bible truth for partisans like Rep. Adam Schiff (D-CA), ranking member of the House Intelligence Committee, who was among the first off the blocks to blame Russia for interfering to help Trump.  It simply could not have been that Hillary Clinton was quite capable of snatching defeat out of victory all by herself.  No, it had to have been the Russians.

      Five days into the Trump presidency, I had a chance to challenge Schiff personally on the gaping disconnect between the Russians and WikiLeaks. Schiff still “can’t share the evidence” with me … or with anyone else, because it does not exist.

      Schiff: Can’t share evidence

      WikiLeaks

      It was on June 12, 2016, just six weeks before the Democratic National Convention, that Assange announced the pending publication of “emails related to Hillary Clinton,” throwing the Clinton campaign into panic mode, since the emails would document strong bias in favor of Clinton and successful attempts to sabotage the campaign of Bernie Sanders.  When the emails were published on July 22, just three days before the convention began, the campaign decided to create what I call a Magnificent Diversion, drawing attention away from the substance of the emails by blaming Russia for their release.

      Clinton’s PR chief Jennifer Palmieri later admitted that she golf-carted around to various media outlets at the convention with instructions “to get the press to focus on something even we found difficult to process: the prospect that Russia had not only hacked and stolen emails from the DNC, but that it had done so to help Donald Trump and hurt Hillary Clinton.”  The diversion worked like a charm.  Mainstream media kept shouting “The Russians did it,” and gave little, if any, play to the DNC skullduggery revealed in the emails themselves. And like Brer’ Fox, Bernie didn’t say nothin’.

      Meanwhile, highly sophisticated technical experts, were hard at work fabricating “forensic facts” to “prove” the Russians did it.  Here’s how it played out:

      June 12, 2016: Assange announces that WikiLeaks is about to publish “emails related to Hillary Clinton.”

      June 14, 2016: DNC contractor CrowdStrike, (with a dubious professional record and multiple conflicts of interest) announces that malware has been found on the DNC server and claims there is evidence it was injected by Russians.

      June 15, 2016: “Guccifer 2.0” affirms the DNC statement; claims responsibility for the “hack;” claims to be a WikiLeaks source; and posts a document that the forensics show was synthetically tainted with “Russian fingerprints.”

      The June 12, 14, & 15 timing was hardly coincidence. Rather, it was the start of a pre-emptive move to associate Russia with anything WikiLeaks might have been about to publish and to “show” that it came from a Russian hack.

      Enter Independent Investigators

      A year ago independent cyber-investigators completed the kind of forensic work that, for reasons best known to then-FBI Director James Comey, neither he nor the “handpicked analysts” who wrote the Jan. 6, 2017 assessment bothered to do.  The independent investigators found verifiable evidence from metadata found in the record of an alleged Russian hack of July 5, 2016 showing that the “hack” that day of the DNC by Guccifer 2.0 was not a hack, by Russia or anyone else.

      Rather it originated with a copy (onto an external storage device – a thumb drive, for example) by an insider — the same process used by the DNC insider/leaker before June 12, 2016 for an altogether different purpose. (Once the metadata was found and the “fluid dynamics” principle of physics applied, this was not difficult to disprove the validity of the claim that Russia was responsible.)

      One of these independent investigators publishing under the name of The Forensicator on May 31 published new evidence that the Guccifer 2.0 persona uploaded a document from the West Coast of the United States, and not from Russia.

      In our July 24, 2017 Memorandum to President Donald Trump we stated, “We do not know who or what the murky Guccifer 2.0 is. You may wish to ask the FBI.”

      Our July 24 Memorandum continued:

      “Mr. President, the disclosure described below may be related. Even if it is not, it is something we think you should be made aware of in this general connection. On March 7, 2017, WikiLeaks began to publish a trove of original CIA documents that WikiLeaks labeled ‘Vault 7.’ WikiLeaks said it got the trove from a current or former CIA contractor and described it as comparable in scale and significance to the information Edward Snowden gave to reporters in 2013.

      “No one has challenged the authenticity of the original documents of Vault 7, which disclosed a vast array of cyber warfare tools developed, probably with help from NSA, by CIA’s Engineering Development Group. That Group was part of the sprawling CIA Directorate of Digital Innovation – a growth industry established by John Brennan in 2015. [ (VIPS warned President Obama of some of the dangers of that basic CIA reorganization at the time.]

      Marbled

      “Scarcely imaginable digital tools – that can take control of your car and make it race over 100 mph, for example, or can enable remote spying through a TV – were described and duly reported in the New York Times and other media throughout March. But the Vault 7, part 3 release on March 31 that exposed the “Marble Framework” program apparently was judged too delicate to qualify as ‘news fit to print’ and was kept out of the Times at the time, and has never been mentioned since.

      “The Washington Post’s Ellen Nakashima, it seems, ‘did not get the memo’ in time. Her March 31 article bore the catching (and accurate) headline: ‘WikiLeaks’ latest release of CIA cyber-tools could blow the cover on agency hacking operations.’

      “The WikiLeaks release indicated that Marble was designed for flexible and easy-to-use ‘obfuscation,’ and that Marble source code includes a “de-obfuscator” to reverse CIA text obfuscation.

      “More important, the CIA reportedly used Marble during 2016. In her Washington Post report, Nakashima left that out, but did include another significant point made by WikiLeaks; namely, that the obfuscation tool could be used to conduct a ‘forensic attribution double game’ or false-flag operation because it included test samples in Chinese, Russian, Korean, Arabic and Farsi.”

      A few weeks later William Binney, a former NSA technical director, and I commented on Vault 7 Marble, and were able to get a shortened op-ed version published in The Baltimore Sun.

      The CIA’s reaction to the WikiLeaks disclosure of the Marble Framework tool was neuralgic. Then Director Mike Pompeo lashed out two weeks later, calling Assange and his associates “demons,” and insisting; “It’s time to call out WikiLeaks for what it really is, a non-state hostile intelligence service, often abetted by state actors like Russia.”

      Our July 24 Memorandum continued: 

      “Mr. President, we do not know if CIA’s Marble Framework, or tools like it, played some kind of role in the campaign to blame Russia for hacking the DNC. Nor do we know how candid the denizens of CIA’s Digital Innovation Directorate have been with you and with Director Pompeo. These are areas that might profit from early White House review.  [ President Trump then directed Pompeo to invite Binney, one of the authors of the July 24, 2017 VIPS Memorandum to the President, to discuss all this.  Binney and Pompeo spent an hour together at CIA Headquarters on October 24, 2017, during which Binney briefed Pompeo with his customary straightforwardness. ]

      “We also do not know if you have discussed cyber issues in any detail with President Putin. In his interview with NBC’s Megyn Kelly he seemed quite willing – perhaps even eager – to address issues related to the kind of cyber tools revealed in the Vault 7 disclosures, if only to indicate he has been briefed on them. Putin pointed out that today’s technology enables hacking to be ‘masked and camouflaged to an extent that no one can understand the origin’ [of the hack] … And, vice versa, it is possible to set up any entity or any individual that everyone will think that they are the exact source of that attack.

      “‘Hackers may be anywhere,’ he said. ‘There may be hackers, by the way, in the United States who very craftily and professionally passed the buck to Russia. Can’t you imagine such a scenario? … I can.”

      New attention has been drawn to these issues after I discussed them in a widely published 16-minute interview last Friday.

      In view of the highly politicized environment surrounding these issues, I believe I must append here the same notice that VIPS felt compelled to add to our key Memorandum of July 24, 2017:

      “Full Disclosure: Over recent decades the ethos of our intelligence profession has eroded in the public mind to the point that agenda-free analysis is deemed well nigh impossible. Thus, we add this disclaimer, which applies to everything we in VIPS say and do: We have no political agenda; our sole purpose is to spread truth around and, when necessary, hold to account our former intelligence colleagues.

      “We speak and write without fear or favor. Consequently, any resemblance between what we say and what presidents, politicians and pundits say is purely coincidental.”

      The fact we find it is necessary to include that reminder speaks volumes about these highly politicized times.

    • Trump At G-7 Closing Remarks: "We're The Piggy Bank That Everybody's Robbing"

      President Trump’s 24 hours in Quebec while attending the annual G-7 Summit was every bit as confrontational as we imagined they would be. The president has enraged his fellow world leaders, insulted Justin Trudeau, who’s hosting the summit in Quebec and whom Trump repeated referenced as just “Justin”, and skipped a meeting with French President Emmanuel Macron.

      German Chancellor Angela Merkel has attacked him and vowed to challenge his “America First” trade agenda while also confronting him about his climate stance – something that might be difficult to do, since Trump left this morning after he said he would skip  discussions about climate change Saturday night.

      Trump

      Trump also showed up late to a gender-focused breakfast meeting, billed by the event’s Canadian organizers as a chance for leaders to “draft concrete actions for the G-7 to advance gender equality,” according to CBC. Isabelle Hudon, Canada’s ambassador to France, was making opening remarks when Trump and a flood of press pool members arrived and interrupted her.

      As Trump quietly took his place between Christine Lagarde, head of the International Monetary Fund, and Lt.-Gen. Christine Whitecross, the Canadian head of the NATO college in Rome, Trudeau restated his welcome and Hudon repeated her remarks.

      Then there were his controversial remarks. Early on, Trump suggested that the G-7 should consider readmitting Russia, which was kicked out in 2014 for its activities in Crimea. Trump instead blamed those on Obama. Also on Friday, Trump floated the idea of ending all tariffs and trade barriers between the US and its allies – a pitch that wasn’t exactly expected, according to Politico. Trump offered the proposal at the end of a “contentious” meeting on trade disputes. Most G-7 members remain furious with Trump over his decision to impose tariffs on aluminum and steel imports, and his threats to impose more trade restrictions. Merkel responded positively to Trump’s suggestion, saying she would consider it.

      “We should at least consider no tariffs, no barriers — scrapping all of it,” Trump said, according to officials who were listening and taking notes.

      Before leaving for his meeting with Kim Jong Un, Trump provided an update during a live press conference with Larry Kudlow and John Bolton. First he thanked Trudeau and praised Canada as a “beautiful country” before launching into a summary of issues starting with trade. Though he walked away without signing the US on to the traditional post-summit agreement (providing more fodder for critics who sneered about the G-6 + 1), Trump insisted that the G-7 was “tremendously successful” and despite trade tensions “relationships are outstanding.” He adds that the tariff situation is “going to change, 100 percent” as the US is “like the piggy bank that everyone robs”.

      During his talk, Trump alternated between stream-of-conscious rambling about trade, Russia and North Korea and taking questions from reporters.

      On trade:

      “We had productive discussion on having fair and reciprocal” trade and market access.

      “We’re linked in the great effort to create a more just and prosperous world. And from the standpoint of trade and creating more prosperous countries, I think they are starting to be committed to more fair trade. We as a nation lost $870 billion on trade…I blame our leaders and I congratulate leaders of other countries for taking advantage of our leaders.”

      “If they retaliate they’re making a tremendous mistake because you see we have a tremendous trade imbalance…the numbers are so much against them, we win that war 1000 times out of a 1000.”

      “We’re negotiating very hard, tariffs and barriers…the European Union is brutal to the United States….the gig is up…there’s nothing they can say.”

      “We’re like the piggy bank that everybody’s robbing.”

      “I would say the level of relationship is a ten – Angela, Emmanuel and Justin – we have a very good relationship. I won’t blame these people, unless they don’t smarten up and make the trades fair.”

      On eliminating trade barriers:

      “That’s the way it should be. No tariffs, no barriers – no subsidies.”

      “You go tariff free you go barrier-free you go subsidy-free – that’s the way we learned it at the Wharton School of Finance. We can’t have an example where the US is paying fees of 270%.”

      Then “Worst, Fake News” CNN asked President Trump how disastrous his trade policies are and how his actions are hurting relationships… to which he replied very informatively, ending “so you can tell that to your fake friends at CNN…”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      On North Korea:

      “I feel that Kim Jong Un wants to do something great for his people…he’s got an opportunity that, if you look back into history, few people have ever had.”

      “This is a great opportunity for peace and lasting peace and prosperity.”

      “It’s going to be something that’s always spur of the moment…this is an unknown personality many people don’t know.”

      “You know how they say you know whether you’ll like somebody in the first five seconds? I think I’ll know pretty quickly whether we’re going to make a deal.”

      On Russia:

      “Some people like the idea of bringing Russia back in.” 

      Asked if Crimea should be considered Russia now:

      you’d have to ask President Obama because he’s the one who let Crimea get away. He allowed Russia to take Crimea. I may have had a much different attitude.”

      Trump is now making the 20-hour flight to Singapore, where he will attend a historic summit with North Korea leader Kim Jong Un. We’ll now keep our eye out for the finalized communique from the group. The US is typically a leader in the crafting of the statement. But this time, it’s unclear if the US had any input at all into the statement, as only the leaders from Britain, Canada, France, Germany, Italy and Japan as well as the presidents of the European Commission and European Council remain at the meeting. But regardless of who writes it, the statement will probably be of little consequence, as UBS points out:

      Several heads of state will be heading off on a taxpayer-financed “mini-break” in Canada today. In all of its incarnations (over the past four years, we’ve gone from G-8 to G-6+1) the group hasn’t really accomplished much since an initial burst of enthusiasm with the Plaza Accords and Louvre Accords in the 1980s.

      And this meeting likely won’t be any different.

    • Trump Rage-Tweets That Trudeau Lied At G-7, Refuses To Endorse Final Statement

      Update: French Prime Minister Trudeau has responded to President Trump’s tweets.  Trudeau spokeswoman Chantal Gagnon issues statement by email:

      “We are focused on everything we accomplished here at the G-7 summit”

      “The Prime Minister said nothing he hasn’t said before – both in public, and in private conversations with the President”

      *  *  *

      Having been literally ‘squeezed’ by French President Macron while in Quebec for the G-7 Meetings, President Trump has lashed out at another French-speaking leader in a late-Saturday series of rage-tweets.

      As The Hill reports, a handshake between President Trump and French President Emmanuel Macron on Friday has gained widespread attention on social media…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      for the imprint of Macron’s thumb the French leader left on Trump’s hand.

      But after hours of to-ing and fro-ing among various representative of the G-7 nations, a final communique is yet to appear – and now, judging by Trump’s tweet tirade – it will indeed be a G6+1…

      US President Donald Trump says he will not endorse the final G7 communique and will look to impose tariffs on cars, potentially signalling a worsening of relations in a brewing trade war.

      Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau earlier said his country would move ahead with retaliatory measures against the recently imposed US tariffs on allies’ steel and aluminum exports. He said the new tariffs on Canada were “insulting” and said he told Trump directly that Canadians “particularly did not take lightly the fact that it’s based on a national security reason” and held firm to the government’s threat of retaliation.

      “Canadians are polite, we’re reasonable, but we also will not be pushed around.”

      Trump seemed particularly angered by Trudeau’s apparent two-faced comments, tweeting:

      PM Justin Trudeau of Canada acted so meek and mild during our @G7 meetings only to give a news conference after I left saying that, ‘US Tariffs were kind of insulting’ and he ‘will not be pushed around’ Very dishonest & weak. Our Tariffs are in response to his of 270 per cent on dairy!” Trump posted in another tweet.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Based on Justin’s false statements at his news conference, and the fact that Canada is charging massive Tariffs to our U.S. farmers, workers and companies, I have instructed our U.S. Reps not to endorse the Communique as we look at Tariffs on automobiles flooding the U.S. Market!” Trump wrote on Twitter.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The trade wars just escalated as Trump appears to be shifting his attention to autos now.

      It was not immediately clear where the new round of aggression would leave the two leaders and their mercurial attempts to find trade peace.

      Earlier while still in Quebec, Trump said he wants to make a deal on NAFTA, and he’s open to working with the current pact or striking separate agreements with Canada and Mexico — as long as they agree to renegotiate every five years.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 9th June 2018

    • Feeling Isolated?

      Authored by Adam Taggart via PeakProsperity.com,

      • Does anyone else in your life share your concerns for the future?

      • Is there someone you talk with regularly about the unsustainability of our current economic and ecological trajectories?

      • Do you have friends and/or family members who support your efforts to develop a more resilient lifestyle?

      If you answered “no” to these questions, you’re not an outlier. In fact, the #1 most commonly-reported complaint we hear from Peak Prosperity readers is that they feel alone and isolated when it comes to the warnings delivered in The Crash Course.

      The end of economic growth. Declining net energy. Accelerating resource depletion. These are MASSIVE existential threats to our way of life — to our species’ survival, even. Most PPers can’t comprehend why *everyone* isn’t obessively talking about these dangers.

      But very few people are. Truthfully, most don’t want to; for a wide variety of reasons.

      So that leaves us, the conscientious critical thinkers, alone by ourselves to worry and plan.

      Does this sound like you? If so, read on…

      Wired For Connection

      Humans are biologically wired for social connection.

      Until just recently, historically-speaking, humans typically existed in small tribal groups of 30-60 people, where the degree of unity and cohesiveness of the group directly determined its odds of survival. Facing constant adversity from the weather, predators, other tribes, etc — every member of the group had a role and a duty to perform. 

      We’ve delved into this topic deeply in the past, particularly in our podcast with Peabody Award-winning author Sebastian Junger.

      In his book Tribe, Junger observes how far modern life is from the conditions our distant ancestors evolved from. We are so dis-connected from each other now that the lack of community is manifesting in alarming ways in today’s society.

      Junger focuses on the challenges that soldiers, Peace Corps volunteers, war refugees, and others who have similarly banded together under adverse conditions — as our distant ancestors did — face when re-integrating into peaceful, civilian life. Depression, addiction and suicide are all-too common responses as they struggle to find meaning in their daily lives, which now feel unfulfillingly superficial and lonesome compared to the “real-ness” and “alive-ness” they’d experienced before.

      Despite the often-horrible conditions they were subject to, many guiltily admit to Junger that they preferred life under duress — facing threats like bullets, disease, or cancer. What does that reflect about quality of life in our current society?

      In the case of US veterans, they’re committing suicide at the rate of over 20 deaths per day — nearly one every hour. And they’re dying of opioid drug overdoses at twice the rate of the civilian population. While there are many reasons behind this, Junger is convinced from his research that “leaving the tribal closeness of the military and returning to an alienating and bitterly divided modern society” is a root cause.

      An Epidemic Of Loneliness

      This alienation and division isn’t only being felt by veterans.

      In a world of digital devices and social media, our interaction with other humans is becoming increasingly virtual. In the sprawl of suburbia, we live in densly-packed cul-de-sacs yet hardly know our next-door neighbors’ names. The fast-growing wealth gap is forcing the 99% to work harder just to make ends meet, leaving little time left in the week for socializing or family interaction.

      The US is now experiencing an “epidemic” of loneliness, according to a study released by Cigna last month. Perhaps not surprising given that their cohort is the first to grow up with smartphones in hand, those in Generation Z are the worst off:

      Gen Z is the loneliest generation, survey reveals (CNBC)

      Loneliness among Americans has reached “epidemic levels,” according to health service company Cigna’s U.S. Loneliness Index, released Tuesday.

      The index, which surveyed over 20,000 U.S. adults, found that nearly half of survey respondents reported sometimes or always feeling alone (46 percent) or left out (47 percent) and younger generations feel much lonelier than older ones.

      For Cigna’s report, survey respondents were evaluated on their loneliness using the UCLA Loneliness Scale, a 20-item questionnaire that was developed to assess subjective feelings of loneliness and social isolation.

      Gen Z adults surveyed (ages 18 to 22), are the loneliest, according to the report. More than half of Gen Zers identified with 10 of the 11 feelings associated with loneliness, according to the survey, including feeling like people around them are not really with them (69 percent), feeling shy (69 percent) and feeling like no one really knows them well (68 percent).

      “While we know that this is a group that is making life changes, these findings give us a surprising understanding of how this generation perceives themselves,” Douglas Nemecek, M.D., chief medical officer for Behavioral Health at Cigna, tells CNBC Make It in an email. “It’s something that we need to explore to understand how we can address it. And that’s what we’re planning to do.”

      If you’re a parent to any Gen Zers, this photo really hits home:

      The ramifications of living life through the filter of social media are beginning to become clear.

      recent study by Harvard Business Review confirms what most parents have long suspected: the more we use Facebook, the worse our reported physical health, mental health and life satisfaction. Even top former executives from Facebook have gone public with their fears that it’s “ripping apart society” by “exploiting a vulnernability in human psychology”.

      It’s little wonder why Gen Z feels so crummy.

      But it’s not just the youth suffering. According to former Surgeon General Vivek Murthy, at least 40% of all American adults report feeling lonely, with reported loneliness rates doubling since the 1980s:

      There is good reason to be concerned about social connection in our current world. Loneliness is a growing health epidemic. We live in the most technologically connected age in the history of civilization, yet rates of loneliness have doubled since the 1980s. Today, over 40% of adults in America report feeling lonely, and research suggests that the real number may well be higher. Additionally, the number of people who report having a close confidante in their lives has been declining over the past few decades. 

      During my tenure as U.S. surgeon general, I saw firsthand how loneliness affected people of all ages and socioeconomic backgrounds across the country. I met middle and high school students in urban and rural areas who turned to violence, drugs, and gangs to ease the pain of their loneliness. I sat with mothers and fathers who had lost sons and daughters to drug overdoses and were struggling to cope alone because of the unfortunate stigma surrounding addiction. And I met factory workers, doctors, small business owners, and teachers who described feeling alone in their work and on the verge of burnout.

      During my years caring for patients, the most common pathology I saw was not heart disease or diabetes; it was loneliness.

      (Source)

      How concerned should we be about this loneliness epidemic?

      Very.

      Medical research shows a direct and pronounced link between social isolation and early mortality. Here’s a scary set of statistics:

      Living with air pollution increases your odds of dying early by 5%. Living with obesity, 20%. Excessive drinking, 30%. And living with loneliness? It increases our odds of dying early by 45%

      (Source)

      Understanding Loneliness

      In order to improve the situation, it’s important that we understand what our loneliness is trying to tell us.

      Sadly, in our current society, loneliness comes with a lot of shame. That if we’re not popular, if we’re feeling apart from others, then something is wrong with “us” (vs our culture).

      That leaves many of those feeling lonely to suffer in silence and to withdraw further, worsening the situation.

      As popular author and social scientist Brené Brown cautions:

      We feel shame around being lonely (as if feeling lonely means there’s something wrong with us), even when it’s caused by grief, loss, or heartbreak. This isn’t just sad – it’s actually dangerous. We’ve evolved to react to the feeling of being pushed to the social perimeter by going into self-preservation mode: when we feel isolated, disconnected, and lonely, we try to protect ourselves. That means less empathy, more defensiveness, more numbing, and less sleeping. In this state, the brain ramps up the stories we tell ourselves about what’s happening – narratives that often aren’t true and exaggerate our worst fears and insecurities.

      (Source)

      This withdrawal away from the world is exactly what we DON’T need when we experience loneliness, warns University of Chicago neuroscientist John Cacioppo.

      His research supports Junger’s claim that humans are hard-wired for community; that “our neural, hormonal, and genetic makeup support interdependence over independence”.

      To Cacioppo, the feeling of loneliness is simply another way our body tells us we’re becoming deficient in a critical nutrient — just as thirst and hunger do. In his mind, “Denying you feel lonely makes no more sense that denying you feel hunger.”

      So when we feel lonely, we need to recognize that signal for what it is. And just as feeling hungry sends us shuffling off to the pantry, feeling lonely should motivate us to make an effort to engage directly with others. We need to fight past the things that tempt us to retreat inwards —  such as our current culture’s norms of shame and the false sense of connection/relief that digital media offers.

      Creating Connection

      So how can the lonely find connection?

      Well, first, it’s important to understand that when it comes to social connection, quality of relationships matters more than quantity.

      As Susan Pinker details in her book The Village Effect, you don’t have to be a social butterfly to experience the benefits of connection; you just need a few relationships that actually matter. But they have to be face-to-face, in-the-flesh interactions.

      OK, so how does one go about creating these kind of face-to-face interactions?

      Glad you asked. Here are several resources that offer specific guidance for doing just that:

      In addition to the above, Chris and I are continuing to do our best to create opportunities for the like-minded PP crowd to convene in person. Consider coming to our annual Seminar in California next year, or attending one of our 1-day city Summits  — our next one will be in New York City in September (details to be announced on this website soon). Over the years, these gatherings have spawned many great friendships.

      And in the meantime, if you’re feeling weighed down by loneliness, or the angst of being the only one you know who “gets it” when it comes to the material we discuss on this website, we recommend considering seeking the guidance of a professional therapist who understands the Peak Prosperity mindset. We’ve seen it work wonders. If you’re having trouble finding one, here’s a therapist we refer people to (full disclosure: she’s my wife!).

      Lastly, while not “in-the-flesh”, we’ve built a very special online community here at PeakProsperity.com, where truth-seekers and action-oriented people from all over the world gather to exchange ideas and engage constructively with one another. If you’re feeling isolated in your life, lean into this community. Share your thoughts. Reach out.

      We’ll reach back.

    • Information Overload: 7 In 10 Americans Are Overwhelmed By News, More Among Republicans

      n a period in which most Americans feel mentally exhausted by news flow — from Facebook’s trending stories to Twitter’s hashtags to Trump’s spontaneous tweeting — and of course, how could we not forget, the mainstream media’s constant barrage of very fake news, approximately 70 percent of Americans feel “overwhelmed by the amount of news there is,” according to a Pew Research Center survey conducted from Feb. 22 to March 04, 2018.

      Nearly 68 percent of Americans feel mentally exhausted by the high-rate of news in the modern era, compared with just 30 percent of Americans who enjoyed the amount of news they get. Pew said today’s “feelings of information overload” is similar to how Americans felt during the 2016 presidential election.

      While it certainly seems like Americans are consuming too much media, Republicans are experiencing more news fatigue than anyone else. Roughly 77 percent of Republicans and Republican-leaning independents are mentally drained from the constant bombardment of news headlines, compared with just 61 percent of Democrats and Democratic-leaning independents, said Pew.

      The report detailed that avid news watchers were less likely to experience mental fatigue than those who sparingly read headlines. For those who chase headlines “most of the time,” 62 percent reported psychological exhaustion, meanwhile, 78 percent of those who less frequently get news say they are overwhelmed.

      Americans who regularly criticized the mainstream media as fake news were the most “worn out.” About 80 percent of Americans said the mainstream media were doing “not too well” or “not at all well” in factually covering stories — acknowledged the most exhaustion. Americans who said the news media did “fairly well,” 69 percent reported mental fatigue. Only 48 percent of those who claimed news organizations do “very well” said they were worn out by news flow.

      Pew said white people had a higher probability of feeling fatigued from the news than black or Hispanic people. The report also highlighted women generally feel more tired than men from news headlines.

      In a deeply divided nation, when Republicans religiously follow Fox News and Democrats are mindlessly blasted with very fake news from CNN, it is understood that Americans are living in a stressful period.

      Maybe the echoes of the Strauss–Howe generational theory, the Fourth Turning, is alive and well as the awakening and the unraveling of the empire has flung this country into a full-blown crisis — first observed in news headlines and then reflected among its citizens’ mental fatigue.

      The human brain which created this modern world is just not wired to process the vast amounts of information from news networks and social media. Americans are sleepwalking into a period of too much stimulation in tense periods, which could result in irrational decision making. America is stressed — its people are stressed — and there is just too much damn news. What could go wrong from here?

    • DOJ Reneges On Commitment To Provide Trump Russia Docs To Congress

      Authored by Sara Carter,

      • DOJ officials limit a briefing on new documents to a select few Congressional members

      • The briefing is planned to take place during the first two days of the North Korea Summit in Singapore, when all eyes will be on the negotiations

      • Sources worry the documents provided will be heavily redacted

      • A source says during a May 24 Congressional meeting with DOJ, the department argued with congressional members over who would have access to the documents

      The Department of Justice reneged on a commitment to provide access to documents they promised to congressional lawmakers by Thursday morning. Instead, DOJ issued a press release after midnight suggesting they will only meet with a group of select lawmakers to discuss the matter on the same day the North Korea summit opens in Singapore, according to numerous sources and a DOJ statement.

      Moreover, the Justice Department also issued new stipulations for briefing congressional members and limited the meeting with only the Gang of Eight, which is comprised of eight leaders within Congress who are briefed on classified intelligence matters.

      These sources claim that briefing Gang of Eight lawmakers restricts the dissemination and discussion of the documents that will be taken for review. Although the DOJ contends that the documents are highly sensitive material, in reality, these documents are not considered to contain high-level national security information.

      So while it seems that DOJ is complying, congressional sources say it means that the documents provided may be highly redacted.

      A source familiar with the discussions stated that the documents, “…do not rise to Gang of Eight level material requiring such strict rules that would limit those members to discuss the material with other lawmakers.”

      Lawmakers are also questioning the Justice Department’s decision to provide the documents early next week during the highly anticipated start of the North Korea summit. A senior Justice Department official announced the briefing is, “expected on Monday or Tuesday, depending on members’ schedules.”

      On May 24, House Intelligence Committee Chairman Devin Nunes (R-CA), Rep. Trey Gowdy, (R-SC) and Rep. Adam Schiff (D-CA), met with DOJ officials and FBI Director Christopher Wray to discuss Nunes’ demand on April 24, for specific classified documents related to the committee’s investigation into the FBI’s handling of the Russia/Trump investigation. According to a source familiar with the discussions, the DOJ pleaded with the members, “not to say anything about the DOJ having brought the documents to the meeting.”

      In last night’s press release, however, the DOJ admitted to having the documents. A senior Justice Department official accused the committee members of not reviewing the documents provided at the May meeting stating, “The Department and FBI will also provide the documents that were available for review but not inspected by the members at the previous briefing along with some additional material.”

      According to sources with knowledge of the May 24 briefing, the DOJ argued with congressional members over who would have access to the documents during the meeting. The DOJ also limited the distribution of the documents to “only those members in the room” and would not allow investigators to review the documents for their ongoing investigation into the FBI’s handling of the alleged Russia/Trump probe.

      “This request for documents is not at the Gang of Eight level,” said a source familiar with the matter.

      “This is yet another line of obfuscation, stonewalling and delay tactics by the DOJ. They were supposed to deliver the documents to Congress Thursday and then at the last second did what they always do: fail to keep their commitment. Now they are waiting until the opening of the North Korea summit in an attempt to bury it from the public.”

      Rep. Ron DeSantis (R-Fl) told this reporter that the DOJ’s failure to produce documents has put both Congress and the American people in a seemingly never ending predicament that does more harm than good for the nation.

      “It’s the same old games and Congress is facilitating this behavior by continuing this back and forth with the Justice Department,” said DeSantis. The lawmaker noted that Congress has the power of the purse and authority to follow through with the contempt proceedings against DOJ Deputy Attorney General, Rod Rosenstein.

      DeSantis added, Americans are upset about this and have every reason to be. They could’ve turned these documents over more than eight months ago and answered our questions and we wouldn’t be in the mess that we are in now.”

      A senior Justice Department official said in the press release, The Department and FBI are prepared to brief members on certain questions specifically raised by the Speaker and other members… The Department and FBI believe it can provide information that is directly responsive to congressional inquiries in a manner that is consistent with its national security and law enforcement responsibilities, and is pleased to do so.”

      The DOJ official said with regard to not providing the documents on Thursday, “Although the Department and FBI would have liked to provide this information as early as this week, officials have taken a little additional time to provide the most fulsome answers to the members’ questions as possible. The Department and FBI take congressional inquiries seriously and believes that the documents provided next week will be valuable to the Gang of Eight.

    • City Officials Struggle To Fend Off "Unstoppable Juggernaut" Of Chinese Homebuyers

      As we’ve pointed out time and time again, foreign – mainly Chinese – buyers seeking to park their ill-gotten gains beyond the reach of the Communist Party have – in addition to global capitals like New York City and London – favored a handful of cities in the Pacific Northwest, as well as Australia and New Zealand. Many of these cities – for example, Vancouver – have seen property values rise to levels that are unaffordable for local buyers.

      While the influx of capital helped fuel an economic recovery in the aftermath of the crisis, home values soon reached crisis levels that demanded action by local officials. Some places have tried to use taxes to deter foreign buyers. In some instances, the taxes worked – at least temporarily.

      But with the flow of buyers refusing to slow despite efforts by the Chinese government to stop money moving offshore, many of these cities are getting desperate. And after years of occasional headlines, it appears the crisis has finally become dire enough for the mainstream press to start paying attention.

      Vancouver

      To wit, government officials in Canada and Australia who spoke with the Wall Street Journal for a story about how Chinese homebuyers expressed concern that widespread foreign ownership has created bubbles in local real-estate markets. Even as Australia and New Zealand and some Canadian cities have raised taxes on foreign buyers, many are worried that home values will continue to climb, foiling policy makers best efforts to control them. Since it passed an 8% foreign buyers tax last summer, Sydney says foreign buying hasn’t let up.

      Jon Ellis, chief executive of Investorist, an online portal for cross-border property transactions, said Chinese property buyers are an “unstoppable juggernaut”. In some markets with large Mandarin-speaking populations, locals can spot real-estate ads in Mandarin at bus stations and benches in the surrounding area. In response, Vancouver imposed a 15% foreign buyers tax back in 2016. When that didn’t work, city officials worked with the province on something more aggressive.

      China

      The Province of British Columbia has also passed laws to discourage the resale of unfinished condo units.

      After the first Vancouver 15% tax failed to put a lid on foreign buyers, Mr. Robertson worked with the province of British Columbia on more aggressive steps. In February, province officials raised the foreign-buyers tax to 20% and expanded coverage well beyond Vancouver. Officials also imposed a new levy – 0.5% of the property value and climbing to 2% next year – on homeowners who don’t pay income tax in Canada.

      In April, British Columbia also announced measures to deter the resale of condo units before construction was completed, to discourage investors from flipping units before they are occupied.

      At the Beijing expo, Florence Chan said she originally wanted to buy a home in Vancouver but changed her mind. “The taxes are too high,” she said, adding that Melbourne is looking better.

      Officials complain that fending off foreign homebuyers is like squeezing a balloon: No matter where you press, the air moves elsewhere. After New Zealand passed a ban on foreign speculators buying homes (a measure the IMF blasted as “discriminatory”) last year, buyers moved back to Canada. And investors are already looking to Malaysia and Thailand as the next markets ripe for foreign buying.

      Foreign capital is now returning to Canada, driving the latest surge in home prices. Buyers from China and the U.S. have found Victoria, the small capital of British Columbia that sits on an island west of Vancouver.

      Victoria was declared the world’s hottest new housing market last year in Christie’s International Real Estate survey, based on a 29% increase in annual sales of million-dollar-plus homes. Single-family homes in the Victoria area hit a record high of about $570,000 in May, up 9% from a year earlier, according to the Victoria Real Estate Board.

      “Victoria is experiencing the same rapid growth in housing prices and sales volumes that have strengthened Toronto and Vancouver in recent years,” Christie’s International said in its survey last month. “If Toronto and Vancouver can be a measure, it is likely Victoria will continue to perform well despite [new] regulations” targeting foreign buyers.

      Attention has already turned to Malaysia and Thailand, which now tops the list for Chinese buyer inquiries, ahead of the U.S. and Australia, according to Juwai.com. Two years ago, Thailand ranked sixth.

      In Australia, Chinese buyers are believed to be responsible for between 10% and 15% of homes under construction. Chinese buyers prefer newer homes, and will demolish old homes to rebuild from scratch. The share is highest in Melbourne and Sydney, where foreign buyers account for a quarter of newly built apartments. At one swanky new development in Melbourne, Chinese buyers are said to be behind 10% of the sales.

      Officially, Chinese citizens are only allowed to move $50,000 worth of yuan offshore every year, but there are many loopholes, including buying expensive watches and exchanging them for cash offshore, or exercising exceptions for having a child studying at college or living abroad. But unless the Chinese government strengthens its crackdown on money moving offshore and disappearing into foreign towers, it’s difficult to imagine how local governments will stop foreign buyers – after all, taxes also make the problem worse for locals. Over the next decade, some analysts predict Chinese investors could spend as much as $1.5 trillion abroad.

       

    • The Political Significance Of LSD: What You're Not Being Told

      Authored by Vikram Zutshi via Open Democracy,

      The shifts in consciousness brought about by psychedelics could help to dissolve our fear of ‘the other’…

      Microdosing” on psychedelic substances like LSD ingesting just enough to heighten cognitive faculties, enhance creativity, improve concentration and alleviate depressionis currently back in vogue among people not normally associated with anything remotely ‘countercultural’ in the USA.

      The term psychedelic was coined in 1958 by British psychiatrist Humphrey Osmond and is derived from the Greek words psyche (“soul, mind”) and delein(“to manifest”), hence “soul-manifesting,” the implication being that psychedelics can access the soul and develop unused potentials in the human mind. It’s a contention that’s gaining increased acceptance in mainstream universities.

      New York University, for example, is hosting clinical trials using psilocybin to treat alcohol addiction. The Multidisciplinary Association for Psychedelic Studies (MAPS) has been at the forefront of research in treating patients suffering from chronic treatment-resistant PTSD (Post Traumatic Stress Disorder) with MDMA, commonly known as ‘Ecstasy. The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) recently designated its MDMA-assisted psychotherapy project as a ‘breakthrough therapy.’ Apart from MDMA, MAPS also advocates the use of Ayahuasca, Ibogaine and medical marijuana for a variety of conditions ranging from bipolar syndrome and drug addiction to autism-related disorders, ADHD and clinical depression.

      The therapeutic use of psychedelics isn’t new. Between 1953 and 1973, the US federal government funded over a hundred studies on LSD with more than 1,700 subjects participating. Psychedelics were tested on convicts, substance abusers, people suffering from chronic depression and obsessive-compulsive disorder, schizophrenics and terminal cancer patients. LSD was also tested on artists and scientists to explore its effects on creativity, and on divinity students to examine spirituality from a neuroscientific perspective. The empirical data gathered from these tests was largely positive.

      LSD “truly was an acid, dissolving almost everything with which it came into contact, beginning with the hierarchies of the mind… and going on from there to society’s various structures of authority” says author Michael Pollan in his book How To Change Your Mind: The New Science of Psychedelics. And that’s what makes this subject socially and politically interesting.

      “It is curious to me that what I see as the two greatest threats – environmental crisis and [political] tribalism – these drugs directly address both those mindsets” Pollan told the Guardian in a recent interview.

      “They undermine our tendency to objectify nature, to think of ourselves as separate from it. They undermine tribalism in that people tend to emerge from these experiences thinking that we are all more alike, all more connected.

      If this is true, then those of us committed to social transformation must start to take the use of psychedelics much more seriously. But what’s the actual or potential connection between LSD and politics?

      It was a Swiss chemist called Albert Hoffman who discovered the drug by accident in 1938. While conducting research on another pharmaceutical compound he absorbed the drug through his skin and staggered home to lie down on his sofa, where, “in a dreamlike state, with eyes closed”, he wrote later, “I perceived an uninterrupted stream of fantastic pictures, extraordinary shapes with intense, kaleidoscopic play of colours.” Hoffman felt he had been given the keys to unlocking the mysteries of the universe, “the mystical experience of a deeper, comprehensive reality.”

      A few decades later in August 1960, Timothy Leary, a clinical psychologist from Harvard University, traveled to Cuernavaca in Mexico and ingested psilocybin (‘magic’) mushrooms for the first time, an experience that radically altered the course of his life. In 1965, Leary commented  that he had “learned more about … (his) brain and its possibilities…[and] more about psychology in the five hours after taking these mushrooms than…in the preceding 15 years of studying and doing research in psychology.” Leary became a lifelong evangelist for the therapeutic benefits of psychedelics.

      Theoretical physicist Carlos Rovelli, author of The Order of Timesays his romance with quantum theory and the mysteries of the space-time continuum were sparked by his LSD trips as a student radical at the University of Bologna. “It was an extraordinarily strong experience that touched me also intellectually,” he told the Guardian. “Among the strange phenomena was the sense of time stopping. Things were happening in my mind but the clock was not going ahead; the flow of time was not passing any more. It was a total subversion of the structure of reality. How do I know that the usual perception is right, and this is wrong?”

      Rovelli has spent the better part of his life grappling with the relationship between space, time and consciousness, fundamental concepts that underlie existence and how we simultaneously perceive the world and shape it. “If I observe the microscopic state of things,” he writes, “then the difference between past and future vanishes … in the elementary grammar of things, there is no distinction between ‘cause’ and ‘effect.’” The concept of time, he says, “has lost layers one after another, piece by piece.” We are left with “an empty windswept landscape almost devoid of all trace of temporality…a world stripped to its essence, glittering with an arid and troubling beauty.”

      Large parts of the world are being polarized at a rate rarely seen before, helped in no small measure by social media ‘filter bubbles’ and algorithms that divide people sharply along the lines of nationality or ideology, their underlying human connections rendered increasingly irrelevant. Perhaps such deep hatred and suspicion of the other was always there, but now it has taken center stage and is being used as a potent election strategy by populist and hyper-nationalist leaders the world over. Like herds of cattle, large numbers of people are being programmed and deployed as pawns for a larger agenda.

      Therefore, perhaps real change begins with rewiring our perceptual framework. Psychedelic substances have been ingested sacramentally by indigenous cultures to achieve this goal since the dawn of time, and now they’re being validated by the scientific and medical communities. The shifts in consciousness that can be brought about by psychedelics can help in dissolving the man-made boundaries or fear of the other that are implanted in our collective psyche.

      While Silicon Valley bio-hackers microdosing on LSD to enhance their workplace performance may not be looking to bring about tectonic shifts in collective consciousness, there’s no reason to restrict the use of psychedelics to these groups and purposes. They could also work as a potent catalyst to awaken humankind to the dangers of toxic nationalism and rabid nativism that threaten to engulf us.

    • Here Are The Schools With The Best ROI In Each State

      The average US student today is graduating with $39,400 in student-loan debt, an enormous sum, particularly for liberal arts grads with few reliable employment options allowing them to earn more than $30,000 a year right out of school. The aggregate figure is even more egregious: Nationally, students owe more than $1.4 trillion on their loans, nearly 50% more than all credit card debt in the US. Given this enormous sum, Brookings Institute projects that nearly 40% of student loan borrowers will default by 2023. And yet, most Americans still believe that college is a sound investment.

      But students who bother to conduct an ROI analysis will find that the return on a degree varies widely depending on the school. Which is why, in a recent study, HowMuch.com and Payscale decided to calculate the schools with the best 20-year ROI in each state. Many of the names may not be widely familiar to people – and some might be downright surprising (particularly the winner for Connecticut, where the Coast Guard Academy beat out Yale). Indeed, across the US, technical colleges and military academies appear to outrank big-name schools at every turn.

      College

      In its analysis, HowMuch and Payscale factored in the cost of tuition, the average student debt, the typical length of time to graduate and the graduation rate. They then compared the 20-year ROI for the school with the 20-year ROI for somebody who skipped college to start a career out of high school.

      Here’s the full list of schools with the highest ROI in each state:

      ROI

      Two

      Three

      ROIFour

    • Earth In Travail: Hawaii Hammered By Over 12,000 Earthquakes In The Last 30 Days

      Authored by Michael Snyder via The American Dream blog,

      We haven’t seen anything like this since Hawaii first became a state back in 1959. Kilauea began erupting on May 3rd, and it hasn’t stopped rumbling yet. In fact, authorities are telling us that Hawaii has been struck by “over 12,000 earthquakes” during the last 30 days.

      That is an extraordinary amount of shaking, and many are now becoming concerned that fundamental physical changes are happening to the islands. As one USGS official has noted, we have never seen earthquakes happen on the Big Island with this sort of frequency ever before

      While most of the earthquakes have been relatively mild at magnitude 2 or 3, the largest earthquake was a massive 6.9 magnitude tremor on May 4, along with a 5.5 magnitude quake on June 4.

      Brian Shiro, a supervisory geophysicist at the USGS Hawaiian Volcano Observatory, said the island was witnessing the highest rate of quakes ever measured at the summit.

      On Wednesday, the biggest quake was a massive 5.6 magnitude earthquake that accompanied an eruption that shot rock and ash 10,000 feet into the sky. The following comes from the Washington Post

      A magnitude 5.6 earthquake has struck the summit of Hawaii’s Kilauea volcano summit, sending a plume of ash and rock about 10,000 feet into the sky.

      Hawaii County officials said the Wednesday eruption could cause ash to fall over some populated areas, including the towns of Volcano and Pahala.

      The temblor came just hours after U.S. Geological Survey scientist Wendy Stovall said another eruption was imminent.

      Meanwhile, the lava just keeps flowing. There is nothing that authorities can do to redirect or stop the rivers of lava that are coming from the volcano. All they can do is stop and watch the inevitable destruction.

      Over the past few days, lava from the volcano has destroyed hundreds more homes and has completely filled in Kapoho Bay

      On Sunday, the flow crept toward Kapoho Bay, a roughly 1,000-foot-wide ocean retreat. By Tuesday, the lava flow had completely engulfed the bay and surrounding neighborhoods.

      “Kapoho Bay is gone. Wiped out. Completely filled in with lava,” wrote Hawaii News Now. The outlet reported thathundreds of homes have been destroyed, including the second home of the Big Island’s mayor. Official counts peg the loss at about 200 structures demolished by the volcano since May, according to Reuters, though they will undoubtedly rise.

      You can view aerial images of the devastation right here. Needless to say, many of those that once had oceanfront properties along Kapoho Bay no longer do so.

      But there is some potentially promising news. A rainbow was spotted directly over Kilauea, and some are taking that as a good sign.

      We shall see.

      At the same time, the people of Guatemala are calling the latest eruption of the Fuego volcano “one of the biggest in 500 years”. A colossal avalanche of super-heated mud, rock and ash as hot as 1,300 degrees Fahrenheit caught multitudes of local residents completely off guard. And the volcanic gases coming from the volcano alone were capable of causing rapid asphyxiation. You can see footage of the immense devastation here, and one official is telling the media that they are finding some bodies “totally buried, like you saw in Pompeii”

      Otto Mazariegos, president of the Association of Municipal and Departmental Firefighters, said that bodies had been buried on inaccessible sites on the volcano’s south side, which overlooks the city of Antigua.

      “We saw bodies totally, totally buried, like you saw in Pompeii,” he said, according to The New York Times.

      There was another huge explosion that followed the initial eruption of the volcano, and at this point the total death toll has reached “at least 99”. The following comes from NPR

      The death toll from Guatemala’s Fuego volcano rose to at least 99 on Wednesday, with many people still missing, after two strong explosions that scattered ash over a wide area and displaced thousands of residents from their homes.

      The scenes of devastation were accompanied by heartbreaking stories of entire families devastated by the disaster — the biggest eruption from the mountain in four decades.

      Sadly, the death toll will probably end up being much higher.

      Entire families were killed instantly by the mud, ash and rock, and many of the bodies may never be found.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The saddest story that I have come across so far is from a woman named Lilian Hernandez. She told reporters that she is missing a total of 36 family members

      Lilian Hernandez wept as she spoke the names of aunts, uncles, cousins, her grandmother and two great-grandchildren — 36 family members in all — missing and presumed dead in the explosion of Guatemala’s Volcano of Fire.

      “My cousins Ingrid, Yomira, Paola, Jennifer, Michael, Andrea and Silvia, who was just 2-years-old,” the distraught woman said — a litany that brought into sharp relief the scope of a disaster for which the final death toll is far from clear.

      Could you imagine losing 36 members of your family on a single day?

      I couldn’t.

      As I have written about so many times before, something is happening to our planet. Large earthquakes and major volcanic eruptions are happening with increasing frequency, and this could have dramatic implications for our immediate future.

      Despite all of our advanced technology, we are very much at the mercy of these enormous natural disasters, and our best and brightest minds might want to start looking into why our planet is suddenly becoming increasingly unstable.

    • US Suicide Rate Surges 30% Since 1999

      Following the deaths of famous chef, author and TV host Anthony Bourdain  and designer Kate Spade this week, many Americans probably intuitively believe that rates of suicide are increasing. And as it turns out, rates of suicide have climbed by 30% since 1999, with sizable gains seen across age groups and sexes. Furthermore, a study by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention found that only about half of people who commit suicide have a diagnosed mental health condition like depression – even though depression was once believed to be the primary cause, NBC News reports.

      The CDC also notes that relationship stress, financial troubles, substance abuse and other issues contribute to the trends.

      “From 1999 to 2015, suicide rates increased among both sexes, all racial/ethnic groups, and all urbanization levels,” the CDC researchers wrote in their report.

      As NBC News points out, the high-profile suicides of Anthony Bourdain, Kate Spade and other middle-aged men and women have prompted many to wonder if their age group is at higher risk for suicide. The simple answer is yes.

      “Middle-aged adults had the largest number of suicides and a particularly high increase in suicide rates. These findings are disturbing,” said CDC principal deputy director Dr. Anne Schuchat.

      Interestingly enough, the only age group that is exempt are people over the age of 75. Across the US, nearly 45,000 people died by suicide in 2016. Meanwhile, suicide rates have increased in every state since 1999, with the exception of Nevada, which already had one of the highest rates in the country. Western and Midwestern states like Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, North Dakota, South Dakota, Minnesota, Kansas and Oklahoma saw some of the biggest increases in suicide rates.

      Firearms were the most common killing method, used in nearly half of all suicides, and in 55% of suicides where there was no mental health condition diagnosed. Where it could, the CDC dug further to find more data on suicides. Here’s what they found.

      • 42% had a relationship problem

      • 28% had substance abuse issues

      • 16% had job or financial problems

      • 29% had some kind of crisis

      • 22% had a physical health issue

      • 9% had a criminal legal problem

      Infographic: Suicide Rates Have Risen Sharply Across The U.S.  | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      The problem, doctors say, is that finding mental health treatment for people can be difficult even for those with health insurance. Even for those who can afford treatment, it can be difficult to find the correct approach. Researchers noted that suicides saw the largest increases during economic downturns.

      “I have been learning as a nation we have seen increases and decreases over time in suicide,” said CDC principal deputy director Dr. Anne Schuchat. “Increases mostly seem to correlate with economic downturns.” The fact that the economic downturn hit rural states the hardest – and that’s where the biggest increases in suicide rates were found – is hardly a coincidence. The social media era – where people do most of their interacting online – is also leading to an increase in isolation that could be playing into rising suicide rates.

    • If You Think The Water Restrictions In California Are Tough, Check Out Cape Town

      Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

      Remember earlier in the year when the news was abuzz about Day Zero in Cape Town, South Africa?  According to the press at the time, the day was looming when the city of 3.74 million people would run completely out of water. First, the date of Day Zero was heralded as April 16th, then May 11th, then June 4th.

      Calculating Day Zero took into account maximum evaporation (based on temperature and wind) and existing patterns in agricultural and urban use – an equation that considered both natural and man-made conditions. (source)

      Now, they’re saying the disaster has been averted for now, but that it could happen in 2019. And if you think the water restrictions in California are tough, wait until you see what they’re doing in Cape Town.

      So how did Cape Town avoid Day Zero?

      Day Zero was delayed by a combination of things. Fortunately, there was some rainfall, and citizens went to great effort to reduce their water usage.  There was a public campaign to basically scare Capetonians into compliance with conservation efforts.

      Late last year, as the South African government faced the prospect of its largest city running out of water, they took an unprecedented gamble.

      The government announced “day zero” – a moment when dam levels would be so low that they would turn off the taps in Cape Town and send people to communal water collection points.

      This apocalyptic notion prompted water stockpiling and panic, caused a drop in tourism bookings, and raised the spectre of civil unrest.

      It also worked. After years of trying to convince residents to conserve, the aggressive campaign jolted people into action. Water use was (and still is) restricted to 50 litres per person per day. (In 2016, average daily per capita use in California was 321 litres.) Households that exceed the limit face hefty fines, or having a meter installed in their home that shuts off their water once they go over. (source)

      Oh, and then there was the public shaming.

      …The city publicly shamed water offenders, with the now former mayor visiting the homes of water wasters and her office publishing a list of the top 100 offenders. (source)

      There’s even a website where you can check the levels of the water supply.

      The water restrictions there make the water restrictions announced last week in California look like a hedonistic luxury vacation to the folks living in Cape Town.

      How people in Cape Town are cutting their water usage

      I got a friendly email from a Jaco, a reader who lives in Cape Town and he told me, basically, we ain’t seen nothin’ yet. Instead of a luxurious 55 gallons per day per person, Capetonians are limited to 13.5 gallons per day per person.

      Welcome to the new norm.  

      Here in Cape Town, we came VERY close to running dry. We are still not out of the woods by any means, the city can still run out of water in 2019 onwards unless we stop relying on just the rain.

      So we are forced to use 50l pppd = 13.2086 gallons per person per day.

      You can use more water, but then these things happen:

      1) You get billed some serious money for the extra water.

      2) If you continue, your flow can be limited with a device to just 50l pppd.

      3) And if you keep on ignoring the above, they can take legal action.

      We are 6 people using 5000l of water consistently (1320.86 gallons) per month for EVERYTHING.

      There are some seriously clever things we were forced to do.

      I now realise the amount of water we, as a city, wasted before.

      So, obviously, I was dying to know the clever things they were forced to do. There are some fantastic lessons for preppers in all this because if you one day live in a world in which all the water you have has to be procured and carried to your home, you’ll want to conserve or you’ll be hauling water non-stop at our current rates of usage.

      Jaco from Cape Town continued with some comparisons to the restrictions recently launched in California:

      To give you an idea:

      – An 8-minute shower uses about 17 gallons of water

      o We are on 90 second showers if you have to shower per day. People are not showering per day anymore.  

      o Catch all the shower water, use if for the toilet.

      – A load of laundry uses about 40 gallons of water

      o We use rainwater – about 50l (13gal) per wash.

      o Changed the soap, so we don’t have to use the rinse cycle – that is another 50l.

      o ALL the water is pumped into a drum, used for toilets. Use pool HTH to keep the smell at bay.

      o Some people have changed their washing machines, to use <40l per wash with rinsing.

      – A bathtub holds 80 to 100 gallons of water

      o Those days are gone, no really, forget a bath.

      o If you have to bath, better have a sponge bath.

      o Catch the water for the toilets.

      – A dishwasher uses 6 gallons of water

      o Nope, 2.5-5l per wash. Better swap the dishwasher for a German model that saves water.

      o Or, use rainwater.

      And a lot of things are now completely illegal. For example:

      Illegal to water the gardens. Have had to let plants die, rather get local fauna and flora that can grow In the area.

      Illegal to wash your car.

      Illegal to top up your pool. Pool must have a cover. Use rainwater or order grey water from the council.

      The cost of water has gone up dramatically:

      Because the municipality is now earning substantially less due to less water purchased, the rates per kilolitre went up substantially.

      We used to pay +-R90.00 for 25,000 litres of water.

      We now pay R125.00 ($9.83) for 5,000l of water.

      25,000 litres (6604 gallons) or of water could cost about +-R25 000 ($1965.73) today – if you dare. 

      The key is the reuse of gray water, something that very few places in the United States are doing.

      We found that ALL the grey water we generate, not kitchen grey water, can be used for the toilets.

      That is the biggest saving. Not one drop of clean water goes down toilets, as all the taps feeding the toilets are closed off.

      The trick is, ALL greywater must be used for toilets.

      Without toilets flushing, sickness will enter the equation.

      Do not flush clean water down a toilet, ever.

      Invest in portable pools or water tanks, and use that water for like washing clothes, then to toilets.

      Jaco’s excellent suggestions and information could be very valuable for those facing shortages now or in the future.

      Unsurprisingly there was government mismanagement involved.

      When I asked about the postponement of Day Zero, the answer was something we can all relate to. Some corrupt person or persons had mismanaged the utility and all but bankrupted it. And with all the hubbub about Day Zero, tourists were staying away from Cape Town, making a bad problem even worse. Jaco wrote:

      My take?

      #DAyZero went away because it costed the local economy too much due to less tourist.

      AND, it turns out, the National Department of Water and Sanitation, was mismanaged to the tune of millions of Rands, effectively bankrupt, which was THE biggest problem, bar all missing the warning signs the last few years…

      So instead of losing more income and making the ANC look even worse, the politicians “agreed” to suspend DayZero – for now.

      The problem however, is still very real.

      Dam levels are slowly rising, but if the dams are not full by end of the year, DAYZero is looming in 2019.

      Some schemes are online, but in the end, they will not be enough. Need bigger desalination plants.

      And, we have not reached the set 450mil of water per day for the city as a whole.

      So for now, the new norm is fixed on 13.2086 gallons per person per day.

      So the 50 gallons, yes, you are barking up the wrong tree – it is going to get much worse.

      People HAVE to change, not only preppers.

      A global water crisis isn’t that far of a stretch of the imagination.  Michael Snyder of The Economic Collapse Blog has been warning about it for years.

      For generations, we have been able to take our seemingly endless supplies of fresh water completely for granted, but things have now changed.

      We are heading into a horrendous water crisis unlike anything that the world has ever experienced before, and right now there do not seem to be any large scale solutions capable of addressing this crisis.

      Hundreds of millions of people living in North Africa, the Middle East, India and parts of China already deal with severe water shortages as part of their daily lives.

      But this is just the beginning.

      If nothing is done, the lack of fresh water will eventually be deeply felt by nearly everyone on the entire planet. (source)

      The use of water has quadrupled over the past century and with our growing population, shows no sign of slowing down.

      How do you prepare for a global water shortage?

      This will affect us not only with forced restrictions like we’re seeing in California but with escalating water bills. Obviously, that will be much more of a deterrent to the poor, since the wealthy won’t have a problem paying the high prices. Some projections on a government webpage that is no longer available suggested that we could see our water bills as much as triple over the next 25 years.

      Meanwhile, one must ask whether companies like Nestle will be able to drain our lakes for pennies and sell the water back to us for dollars.

      So what can you do to be better prepared for a situation like this? Not only must you worry about hygiene and personal consumption, but if you have gardens, orchards, and livestock, you’ll need more water for producing food.

      A few things to look into:

      • Rainwater Catchment – Depending on your local regulations, you may want to do it anyway and hide it discreetly skip this if it’s against the law

      • Designing a greywater system – As opposed to sending all that water from laundry and showers uselessly down the drain, look into a system that sends all used water to the toilet. Again, this is not legal in some states so do it on the down-low check your regulations

      • Look into desalination – If you live near the coast, you might want to consider setting up a personal desalination system. It would be well worth the investment and is simply mindblowing that the government isn’t using some of those tax dollars they’re collecting to do this on a large scale. If you consider the fact that many people who sail keep these on board to purify ocean water, you’ll see that the technology exists. They’re not cheap but an incredibly worthwhile investment for those near the ocean.

      • Use well water – Again, we run into the issue of this not being legal in some places, but if you are able to get a well drilled on your property “for agricultural use” it would be a good idea to do it before regulations become even more strict.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 8th June 2018

    • Taiwan Holds Massive Live-Firing War Drill Simulating Chinese Invasion

      Earlier this week, Taiwanese newspapers published reports that Taiwan’s military would be conducting a massive five-day live-fire war drill starting Monday. As of Thursday, the military exercise is currently underway and is featuring joint operations of its air force, navy, and ground troops in simulating an attack by China.

      The Han Kuang war drill has been carried out annually since the mid-1980s, and its function is used to prepare the Taiwanese military for an invasion via Beijing.

      Even though the live-fire military drill began with the deadly crash of a General Dynamics F-16 Fighting Falcon jet on the first day, the exercise continued across the island as scheduled throughout the week.

      Taiwan simulated repulsing an invading force on Thursday at the Ching Chuan Kang air force base near the central city of Taichung. The live-fire field training exercise featured soldiers in red helmets playing the role of People’s Liberation Army (PLA) troops invading the airbase with helicopters while Taiwanese special forces were deployed with tanks and clashed on the airfield. There were even reports of fighter jets and attack helicopters overhead while paratroopers jumped from Lockheed C-130 Hercules planes.

      Military tanks take part in the annual Han Kuang exercises at an air base in Taichung County, Taiwan. (Source: Chiang Ying-ying, AP)

      Soldiers from Taiwan’s special forces fight with soldiers simulated invasion from rival China during the annual Han Kuang exercises at an air base in Taichung County, Taiwan. (Source: Chiang Ying-ying, AP)

      Taiwanese Air Force’s F-16 fighters launch flares during the annual Han Kuang exercises at an air base in Taichung County, Taiwan. (Source: Chiang Ying-ying, AP)

      A military tank advances during the annual Han Kuang exercises at an air base in Taichung County, Taiwan. (Source: Chiang Ying-ying, AP)

      Military tanks run from smoke during the annual Han Kuang exercises at an air base in Taichung County, Taiwan. (Source: Chiang Ying-ying, AP)

      Taiwanese airborne soldiers jump off from a C-130 Hercules cargo plane during the annual Han Kuang exercises at an air base in Taichung County, Taiwan. (Source: Chiang Ying-ying, AP)

      A Taiwan’s AH-1W Cobra Attack Helicopter launches flares during the annual Han Kuang exercises at an air base in Taichung County, Taiwan. (Source: Chiang Ying-ying, AP)

      President Tsai Ing-wen arrived at the Jiupeng military base Thursday to watch the air defense missile launches as part of the annual military exercises, reported Taiwan News.

      Local reports said the military fired domestic-manufactured missiles, including the Tien Kung I and II, respectively middle- and long-range surface-to-air missiles, which are critical components to the islands missile shields.

      The firing of a Tien Kung 1 missile during the Han Kuang military exercise.(Source: Ministry of National Defense/ Central News Agency)

      President Tsai also spectated the launch of U.S.-made MIM-104 Patriot missiles and the supersonic anti-ship Hsiung Feng III missiles designed to destroy the People’s Liberation Army Navy’s (PLAN) military vessels.

      The firing of a MIM-104 Patriot missile during the Han Kuang military exercise. (Source: Ministry of National Defense/ Central News Agency)

      The Central News Agency reported that several other exercises Thursday simulated air assaults by the People’s Liberation Army Air Force (PLAAF).

      President Tsai told reporters, “the solid strength of our national army and I am very confident that our military forces have capabilities to fulfill the task of making effective use of deterrence and defense.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “The strength of our national army is the guarantee of national security, the foundation of social prosperity, and the staunch backing of the values of democracy and freedom,” Tsai added.

      The Han Kuang war drill is designed to show the military’s willingness and ability to thwart an invasion from China, which claims the self-governing island democracy as its own territory, and as of recent, China has launched a series of live-fire exercises off Taiwan’s coast. Taiwan and China split amid civil war in 1949, however, it now seems as the region could be the next geopolitical flashpoint

    • Pepe Escobar: How Singapore, Astana, & St.Petersburg Preview A New World Order

      Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

      Key economic forums in cities across Eurasia point the way to new power structures rising to challenge Western dominance…

      Ahead of the crucial Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) summit in Qingdao this coming weekend, three other recent events have offered clues on how the new world order is coming about.

      The Astana Economic Forum in Kazakhstan centered on how mega-partnerships are changing world trade. Participants included the president of the Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank (AIIB) Jin Liqun; Andrew Belyaninov from the Eurasian Development Bank; former Italian Prime Minister and president of the EU Commission Romano Prodi; deputy director-general of the WTO Alan Wolff; and Glenn Diesen from the University of Western Sydney.

      Diesen, a Norwegian who studied in Holland and teaches in Australia, is the author of a must-read book, Russia’s Geoeconomic Strategy for a Greater Eurasia, in which he analyzes in excruciating detail how Moscow is planning “to manage the continent from the heartland by enhancing collective autonomy and influence, and thus evict US hegemony directed from the periphery.”

      In parallel, as Diesen argues, Moscow aims “to ensure the sustainability of an integrated Eurasia by establishing a balance of power or ‘balance of dependence’ to prevent the continent from being dominated by one power, with China being the most plausible candidate.”

      In a nutshell; this New Great Game installment revolves around “Russia’s strategy to enhance its bargaining power with the West by pivoting to the East.”

      Concerning Astana, Diesen told me that the AIIB’s Liqun “took the hardest stance in defense of diversifying financial instruments, while Belyaninov was very critical of anti-Russian sanctions.”

      Diesen argues that:The emergence of economic mega-blocks actually improves economic relations by creating more symmetry. For example, China’s CIPS (Cross-Border Interbank Payment System) undermined the ability of SWIFT (Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication) to be used for economic coercion, while CIPS and SWIFT still cooperate. Similarly, the EAEU [Eurasia Economic Union] gets its strength from the ability to integrate with other regions as opposed to isolating itself.”

      And here’s the clincher: “China’s cooperation with the EAEU mitigates Russian concerns about asymmetries, and enables greater EAEU-BRI [Belt and Road Initiative] integration under the stewardship of the SCO. Also, unlike the EU, the EAEU provides great benefit to non-members (non-zero sum) by creating an effective transportation corridor with harmonized tariffs, standards, etc.”

      Diesen remarked how Liqun, a key character in the whole game, “is very positive about the Eurasian Economic Union and insistent on the positive-sum game of integration of regions.” Liqun is “direct, honest and forceful” and does not refrain from criticizing the Trump administration, arguing “there is not a trade war between the US and China, it is a US trade war against the world.”

      Add to the debate the crucial Astana headline, ignored by Western corporate media: Iran signed a provisional free-trade-zone agreement with the EAEU, lowering or abolishing customs duties, and opening the way for a final deal in 2021. For Iran, that will be a golden ticket to do business way beyond Southwest Asia, integrating it further with Russia and also Kazakhstan, which happens to be a key member of the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).

      All about Eurasian integration

      The St. Petersburg International Economic Forum (SPIEF) is the annual Russian equivalent of Davos. Predictably, coverage on Western media was appalling – at best rehashing bits and pieces of the joint press conference held by presidents Vladimir Putin and Emmanuel Macron.

      There was no mention, as Asia Times previously reported, of how Moscow was instrumental in ironing out differences between North and South Korea at the Far East summit in Vladivostok last September, impressing the need for a win-win regional business plan; the integration of the Trans-Siberian with a future Trans-Korean railway, a key plank of Eurasia integration.

      When it comes to tracking Eurasia integration, SPIEF is invaluable. The St Petersburg get-together has also been a traditional forum for key SCO discussions. One panel illustrated how the Shanghai forum is fast advancing on the trade and economic front; new members India and Pakistan are now very much active in the SCO Business Council. The discussion of the business, industrial and technological agenda for observer states was also important; that’s where Iran, a future full SCO member, fits in.

      Eurasia integration also featured on another panel about new logistical routes opened by international transport corridors – very much the stuff BRI and the EAEU are made of.

      And the BRICS revival was also part of the picture, as attested by this panel on the BRICS in Africa “leveraging the Fourth Industrial Revolution” for economic development, featuring the president of the BRICS’s New Development Bank (NDB), Kundapur Kamath, and Jiakang Sun, the executive vice-president of Chinese giant COSCO Shipping Corp.

      Yet the clincher in terms of possible game-changing relations between Russia and Europe came from Finance Minister and first deputy Prime Minister Anton Siluanov: “As we see, restrictions imposed by the American partners are of an extraterritorial nature. The possibility of switching from the US dollar to the euro in settlements depends on Europe’s stance toward Washington’s position.”

      So once again the EU was on the spot – on both crucial fronts, Iran and Russia. Siluanov left the door wide open: “If our European partners declare their position unequivocally, we could definitely see a way to use the European common currency for financial settlements, such as payments for goods and services, which today are often subject to restrictions.”

      Siluanov did not fail to mention that Russia, as much as China and Iran, is already bypassing the US dollar. That accounts for three crucial nodes of Eurasian integration, and that’s the way to go for BRI, EAEU, SCO and BRICS.

      The Indo-Pacific enigma

      Meanwhile, the Shangri-La Dialogue in Singapore has been the top venue for defense diplomacy debate in the Asia-Pacific since 2001.

      With the “Indo-Pacific” concept is hyped to the extreme, it was up to Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi, the keynote speaker, to strike a deft balancing act.

      Even as Modi said the Indo-Pacific should not develop as an exclusive club, he took pains to stress that “Asia and the world will have a better future when India and China work together in trust and confidence. No other relationship of India has as many layers as our relationship with China.”

      China’s Foreign Minister Wang Yi dismissed the “Indo-Pacific” push as an “attention-grabbing idea” that will “dissipate like ocean foam,” as he hopes that the Quad – US, India, Japan, Australia – does not focus on targeting China, like the previous Obama administration “pivot to Asia.”

      The problem is the Indo-Pacific focus, in practice, amounts to a military counterpunch to BRI, with no wide-ranging economic cooperation dimension apart from sketchy plans for a “new global infrastructure.” Compare it, for instance, with China financing over 130 projects within the Lancang-Mekong Cooperation framework, integrating Cambodia, Laos, Myanmar, Thailand and Vietnam into the Chinese economy.

      BRI is a multi-trillion-dollar, multinational, decades-long, inclusive project. As Wang Yiwei, a senior research fellow at the Chongyang Institute for Financial Studies of the Renmin University of China, said “All SCO members are participating in BRI, and this organization [SCO] is the initiative’s security guarantee.”

      Yet when it comes to the Indo-Pacific sphere, the US, Japan and Australia are not SCO members. And India still refuses to acknowledge the SCO is interlinked with BRI.

      Moreover, everything about BRI cannot but clash front-on with the depth and reach of the US across Asia. So the security stress is inevitable. The 10-nation ASEAN, caught in the middle, is adopting at best a “wait and see” strategy. Indonesia at least is venturing a step ahead, promoting a non-confrontational “Indo-Pacific cooperation concept.”

      The bottom line is that China’s relentless drive to multiply Chinese-organized solutions in international relations is unstoppable. As in Wang Yi’s discreet but forceful diplomacy leading to Kim Jong-un’s first visit to China; President Xi solidifying his role as the go-to leader of globalization 2.0; and the Chinese leadership as a whole arguing that the future of Asia-Pacific security cannot be hostage to a Cold War 2.0 mentality.

      US Defense Secretary James Mattis’ warning to China in Singapore of “much larger consequences” if its sovereignty expansion across virtually the whole South China Sea is not contained may be an idle threat. Beijing has no intention to restrict freedom of navigation in the South China Sea; for a mercantile giant, that would be counter-productive. The whole game is about high-stakes geopolitical control. Even the new head of the renamed US Indo-Pacific Command, Admiral Philip Davidson, had to admit to the US Senate that short of war between China and the US, Beijing will prevail in the South China Sea.

      Welcome to the post-Westphalian world

      In his latest, avowedly “provocative” slim volume, Has the West Lost It?former Singaporean ambassador to the UN and current Professor in the Practice of Public Policy at the National University, Kishore Mahbubani frames the key question: “Viewed against the backdrop of the past 1,800 years, the recent period of Western relative over-performance against other civilizations is a major historical aberration. All such aberrations come to a natural end, and that is happening now.”

      It is enlightening to remember that at the Shangri-la Dialogue two years ago, Professor Xiang Lanxin, director of the Centre of One Belt and One Road Studies at the China National Institute for SCO International Exchange and Judicial Cooperation, described BRI as an avenue to a ‘post-Westphalian world.’

      That’s where we are now.

      Western elites cannot but worry when central banks in China, Russia, India and Turkey actively increase their physical gold stash; when Moscow and Beijing discuss launching a gold-backed currency system to replace the US dollar; when the IMF warns that the debt burden of the global economy has reached $237 trillion; when the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) warns that, on top of that there is also an ungraspable $750 trillion in additional debt outstanding in derivatives.

      Mahbubani states the obvious: “The era of Western domination is coming to an end.” Western elites, he adds, “should lift their sights from their domestic civil wars and focus on the larger global challenges. Instead, they are, in various ways, accelerating their irrelevance and disintegration.”

      Meanwhile, Eurasian integration, as depicted in Diesen’s book, is slowly but surely redefining the future.

    • Pre-Dossier Carter Page: Russian Spy … or FBI Honor Scout?

      Authored by Paul Sperry via RealClearInvestigations.com,

      The FBI’s interview with Carter Page in March 2016 is one of the seminal events of the Trump-Russia probe. Democrats have long pointed to it as evidence of the bureau’s longstanding fears that Page might be a Russian spy and to downplay the role of the Clinton-financed dossier compiled by ex-British spy Christopher Steele in securing a FISA surveillance warrant against Page. 

      Carter Page at a Moscow press conference in December 2016.

      “The FBI interviewed Page multiple times about his Russian intelligence contacts, including in March 2016,” Rep. Adam Schiff and other Democrats on the House Intelligence Committee argued in their 10-page memo defending the Obama Justice Department’s monitoring of Page. “The FBI’s concern about and knowledge of Page’s activities therefore long predate the FBI’s receipt of Steele’s information.” 

      Rep. Adam Schiff of California, ranking Democrat on the House intelligence panel.

      But new information challenges that account.

      In an interview with RealClearInvestigations, Page insists that the interview in question – held at then-U.S. attorney Preet Bharara’s office in New York — had “absolutely nothing” to do with the Trump campaign or Russian collusion. Instead of being grilled about shadowy ties, he says he answered questions “related to events in 2013, in a case where I had served as a witness in support of the FBI.” 

      In 2013, a Russian national working as an unregistered foreign agent at a Russian bank in Manhattan sought information from Page, a longtime energy consultant, related to U.S. efforts to develop alternative energy resources, according to court papers filed by the FBI. Although Page thought the man was a legitimate banker after meeting him at an energy symposium in New York City, he was a Russian agent under federal investigation. He was later caught on surveillance dismissing Page as an “idiot.” 

      The FBI informed Page in 2013 that the Russians might be trying to recruit him.

      Evgeny Buryakov, center, in a sketch of the 2016 courtroom proceeding where he pleaded guilty. Carter Page helped convict him.

      A U.S. Naval Academy alumnus, Page cooperated as a witness in that case, which was coordinated with the bureau’s Counterespionage Section Chief Peter Strzok in Washington, and he helped the government convict the Russian spy. Evgeny Buryakov pleaded guilty to espionage-related charges on March 11, 2016. FBI agents, as well as federal prosecutors, huddled with Page around that time to tie up loose ends, he said.

      “It had absolutely nothing to do with the election interference story, which surfaced months later,” Page said. 

      Court records appear to back him up. Buryakov was sentenced in May 2016 and deported to Russia early last year. Schiff maintains that Page “remained on the radar of Russian intelligence and the FBI” due to the prior case, which gave them grounds to spy on him “independent” of the dossier.

      “In order to understand the context in which the FBI sought a FISA warrant for Carter Page, it is necessary to understand … what the FBI knew about Page prior to making application to the court — including Page’s previous interaction with Russian intelligence operatives,” Schiff said. 

      The Democrat’s narrative, which hinges on the suggestion that the bureau interviewed Page because of his role in Trump’s campaign, is also challenged by the fact that the meeting took place several days before Trump publicly named Page as an adviser, on March 21, 2016.

      Records indicate the FBI never viewed him as a potential foreign intelligence agent for Moscow. Court documents also show that Page fully cooperated with the FBI as soon as he learned he had been duped by Russian agents. In his sworn 2015 complaint against Buryakov, FBI special agent Gregory Monaghan portrays Page — referring to him as “Male-1” — as a guileless victim, and described how Buryakov and other Russian agents tried to take advantage of the American businessman, who was unaware he was dealing with foreign spies.

      The FBI agent further attested that the Russians never told Page they were “connected to the Russian government,” and that Page was only “interested in business opportunities in Russia,” where he had worked for years for Merrill Lynch and as an independent energy consultant.

      In the end, the Russians were unable to recruit Page and never received any state secrets from him. Monaghan did not recommend espionage or any other charges against Page, who by all accounts acted as a reliable and trusted witness in the case. Far from being a Russian spy, Page was characterized to the court as someone who helped the FBI catch Russian spies.

      But the government’s attitude toward Page turned cold after Trump publicly announced his name along with other members of his foreign policy team. Only then was Page treated as a possible national security threat. Not long after Trump’s March 21, 2016, announcement, FBI Director James Comey and his deputy, Andrew McCabe, held a meeting with Attorney General Loretta Lynch to discuss the news of Page joining the Trump campaign and how he may be “compromised” by the Russians, according to a recently declassified memo.

      Then, sometime in the “late spring” of 2016, Comey held an unusual briefing concerning Page, and the alleged risk he posed, with the Obama administration’s highest-ranking national-security officials, who, in addition to Lynch, included National Security Adviser Susan Rice, CIA Director John Brennan, and National Intelligence Director James Clapper.

      By autumn, in the heat of the presidential election campaign, the FBI had Page under constant surveillance, vacuuming up all his text messages and emails and listening in on his phone calls, including communications with Trump officials. The surveillance was predicated chiefly on an unverified allegation in the dossier, quoting third-hand sources claiming that Page traveled to Moscow in July 2016 to hatch an election plot with Kremlin officials.

      Page has denied under oath ever meeting with the two Kremlin officials named in the dossier, and says he was in Moscow at the time to give a commencement address at a university, the New Economic School, where President Obama had previously spoken. The charge, attributed to anonymous sources, was written in the dossier by ex-British intelligence officer Steele, who was paid $168,000 by the Clinton camp to gather derogatory information on Trump from Russian sources.

      Former FBI director James Comey. Carter Page says Comey never replied to his letter of complaint of a “witch hunt.”

      After the still-unsubstantiated rumor was leaked to the press in September 2016, along with reports the FBI was taking it seriously, Page wrote a letter to Comey complaining he was the subject of a “witch hunt” and demanding he “look into this matter.”

      He also volunteered to meet with FBI agents to put the rumors to rest.

      “Although I have not been contacted by any member of your team in recent months, I would eagerly await their call to discuss any final questions they might possibly have in the interest of helping them put these outrageous allegations to rest,” Page wrote. Comey never responded to his Sept. 25, 2016, letter.

      “I didn’t hear from the FBI again until over five months later, in March 2017 — after the FISA warrant application and first renewal had already been submitted,” he said. He said the “dodgy dossier was the foundation of their questions.” Page noted that the FBI agents who contacted him then were not the same ones he worked with earlier on the Buryakov case.

      In April 2017, as the Justice Department was renewing its FISA warrant on Page for a second time, it publicly identified Page as the anonymous witness in the 2013-2015 Russian case involving Buryakov.

      “On April 3, 2017,” Page said, “reporters at ABC News and BuzzFeed requested to meet in order to inform me that U.S. government operatives had unlawfully disclosed my identity as Male-1 in this 2015 case.”

      The media leak came just weeks after Bharara, an Obama appointee, was fired by Attorney General Jeff Sessions. Bharara, who formerly served as Democratic Sen. Chuck Schumer’s aide, could not be reached for comment.

      As surveillance warrants on Page continued to be renewed, the FBI also shadowed him using a confidential human source. The informant, Stefan Halper – who reportedly reached out to other Trump campaign figures including George Papadopoulos and Sam Clovis — befriended Page. They struck up a relationship that lasted, Page said, until September 2017 — the same month the fourth and final FISA spy warrant against the former Trump aide expired.

      In their rebuttal, Democrats stated that the FBI and Justice Department “cited multiple sources to support the case for surveilling Page.” It’s not immediately clear if Halper is named in any of the four FISA warrant applications submitted on Page. The documents remain classified.

      Page disagrees.

      “There was no basis for their FISA warrants,” he asserted, adding that the Obama Justice Department “abused” its authority to obtain such warrants, which are the most intrusive means of collecting information on U.S. citizens.

      Schiff’s office said it would have no comment beyond the “minority memo” defending the monitoring of Page.

      Some former federal prosecutors and FBI investigators who have worked counterintelligence cases say Page has a valid grievance. They argue that the FISA warrants lacked the requisite “probable cause” to spy on an American citizen like Page, which requires the Justice Department to not only show the citizen is knowingly engaging in clandestine activities on behalf of a foreign power, but it must also demonstrate probable cause that such activities involve a violation of federal criminal law. 

      Page filed a Freedom of Information Act request with the Justice Department on May 21, 2017 seeking the FISA applications and “all information gathered pursuant to the warrants” authorizing his electronic surveillance issued by the FISA court, as well as the warrants themselves. He also seeks all communications between Justice Department officials and employees of the Clinton campaign related to him. 

      He says he has received no relevant documents in the year since he sent the FOIA request by certified mail.

      Page can only speculate about how political forces seem to have transformed him from a cooperating witness into a possible Russian spy. But he says he is firmly convinced that “until DOJ discloses full information about the dodgy dossier, amends their court filings that led to extensive abuse of process, and discloses details on the other sources of their lies, it will be impossible for Americans to fully trust them again.”

    • More Than Half Of American Homes Are Overvalued, CoreLogic Warns

      A history of economic cycles dating back to the mid-1800s reveals a troubling outlook for today’s Central Bank induced bull market of hopes and dreams, which could be in the later innings.

      It is quite evident that Americans have quit saving as their gig-economy jobs have left them in financial ruin – now being squeezed by the higher cost of living.

      The charades of economic stability could continue for a little longer, with President Trump’s stealth quantitative easing program to Wall Street via debt-financed tax reform, which has induced a massive wave of more than $2.5 trillion in stock buybacks — a gift to corporate America.

      No matter where one looks, the valuation of many financial assets are overextended, and new evidence today from CoreLogicshows this troubling picture very late into an economic cycle: More than half of U.S. residential real estate markets were overvalued in April.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      CoreLogic reports that residential real estate prices nationwide increased 6.9 percent year over year from April 2017 to April 2018. The firm’s Home Price Index (HPI) also shows a 1.2 percent rise on the month-over-month basis from March to April 2018. This has certainly sparked the debate of housing affordability across the nation with many millennials struggling to achieve the American dream.

      CoreLogic Market Condition Indicators showed that 40 percent of the 100 largest metropolitan areas were overvalued in April, compared to 28 percent undervalued, and 32 percent in line with valuations.

      The report uncovers a shocking discovery that of the nation’s top 50 largest residential real estate markets, 52 percent were overvalued in April.

      CoreLogic’s methodology behind overvalued housing markets “as one in which home prices are at least 10 percent higher than the long-term, sustainable level, while an undervalued housing market is one in which home prices are at least 10 percent below the sustainable level.”

      “Affordability” must increase ASAP or housing is in big trouble up here. It will happen, but not thru a wholesale credit easing like 2003. (Source: @MrMarkHanson)

      Home Price to Income Ratio Near 2008 Bubble Levels

      Historically a house in the US cost around 3 to 4 times the median annual income. During the housing bubble of 2007 the ratio surpassed 5 – in other words, the median price for a single-family home in the United States cost more than 5 times the US median annual household income. According to Mikey Maloney, this ratio is heavily influenced by interest rates. When interest rates go down the affordability of a house goes up, so people spend more money on a house. Interest rates have now been falling since 1981 when they peaked at 15.32% (for a 10-year US treasury bond).

      “The best antidote for rising home prices is additional supply,” said Dr. Frank Nothaft, chief economist for CoreLogic.

      “New construction has failed to keep up with and meet new housing growth or replace existing inventory. More construction of for-sale and rental housing will alleviate housing cost pressures,” Nothaft added.

      In a recent op-ed piece via The Wall Street Journal, Paul Kupiec and Edward Pinto place the blame on the government for creating another real estate bubble through “loose mortgage terms pushing home prices up.” They claim that mortgage underwriters need to tighten standards.

      Home prices are booming. So far, 2018 has posted the strongest growth since 2005. “About 60% of all U.S. metros saw an acceleration in the rate of price increases through February this year,” according to Housing Wire. Since mid-2012, real home prices have increased 28%, according to data from the American Enterprise Institute. Entry-level home prices are up about double that rate. In contrast, over the same period household income has barely kept pace with inflation. The current pace of home-price inflation is increasing the risk of another housing bubble.

      The root of the problem is declining underwriting standards. In April Freddie Macannounced an expansion of its 3% down-payment mortgage, the better to compete with the Federal Housing Administration and Fannie Mae . Such moves propel home prices upward. Because government agencies guarantee about 80% of all home-purchase mortgages, their underwriting standards guide the market.

      Making lending even more dangerous, CNBC recently reported that “credit scores may go up” because new regulatory guidance allows delinquent taxes to be excluded when calculating credit scores. These are only some of the measures that “expand the credit box” and qualify ever-shakier borrowers for mortgages.

      During the last crisis, easy credit led home prices to rise at an unsustainable pace, leading marginally qualified borrowers to stretch themselves thin. Millions of Americans’ dreams became nightmares when the housing market turned. The lax underwriting terms that helped borrowers qualify for a mortgage haunted many households for the next decade.

      To sum up, the current unsustainable pace of overvalued home-price appreciation throughout more than half of the nation’s top real estate markets could soon hit serious resistance, as affordability becomes a more significant concern and the overall central bank induced bull market nears its later innings. So what does this mean for millennials who have recently purchased a home? You likely bought near the top.

    • Yellowstone Eruption Fears Spike As Largest Geyser Erupts For The 8th Time

      Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

      Yellowstone caldera eruption fears have spiked as the supervolcano’s largest geyser erupted for the eight time.  So far, scientists aren’t certain why the Steamboat geyser continues to erupt, adding to the fears.

      After years of silence, Yellowstone’s Steamboat geyser, a better show than Old Faithful, has spewed boiling water hundreds of feet in the air eight times since March.  Steamboat, the tallest geyser in the vast Yellowstone National Park, isn’t reliable at all, unlike the more famous Old Faithful that belches steam with regularity. But the fact is, Steamboat has been more faithful, at least lately, spewing eight times since March 14, after being silent for nearly four years. But that regularity is terrifying and puzzling scientists.

      Until this recent series of eruptions, the last time Steamboat blew was in September 2014. Steamboat’s latest eruption was Monday morning when the geyser shot boiling hot water hundreds of feet into the air. Steam billowed from the geyser for hours longer. Steamboat is located in the Norris Geyser Basin, known to have the hottest and most changeable thermal area in nearly 3,500-square-mile wilderness park that sits on a volcanic hot spot called a caldera. That accounts for the geyser’s towering columns of steam (it’s very, very hot underground) but leaves a major fear-provoking question unanswered: Why now, and is it a sign the giant volcano is waking up?

      Scientists don’t know why the Steamboat geyser has become more active, but they still insist that no major eruption is on the horizon. “It is a spectacular geyser,” Michael Poland, the U.S. Geological Survey’s scientist in charge of the Yellowstone Volcano Observatory, wrote to CNN in an email. “When it erupts, it generally has very big eruptions.”

      Data collected so far suggests a pattern to the eruptions within the series. If it all “proves out,” the days surrounding June 11-12 are good dates to potentially see the Steamboat geyser eruptForbes reported. “Most geysers erupt infrequently, unlike Old Faithful, so Steamboat is not enigmatic in that regard. But Steamboat has a mystique about it because it is the tallest active geyser in the world. It gets attention because of this, and rightly so,” Poland said.

      The day of the first eruption, park staff detected activity on nearby seismometers, thermal gauges, and water discharge on a US Geological Survey stream gauge. Yellowstone National Park staff arrived in time to observe steam from the geyser but no water column. According to the Geological Survey, this is a usual occurrence after a vigorous water eruption. The steam phase can last several hours.

      Scientists consider Yellowstone to be a “‘supervolcano,” which refers to volcano capable of an eruption of more than 240 cubic miles of magma,” according to the National Park Service. This distinction is based on massive eruptions over 600,000 years ago. Although the caldera is considered active, scientists believe that it is unlikely to erupt in the next thousand years.

      There doesn’t seem to be a direct relationship between these eruptions and the supervolcano, Poland wrote. “The geyser is reflecting processes that are occurring in the shallowest part of the system — tens to perhaps a few hundreds of meters deep, whereas the magmatic system starts about 5 km down. Geysers are supposed to erupt, and so what we’re seeing is normal behavior.” So once again, we are being told this is all normal abnormal activity.

    • Top Senate Intel Staffer Arrested In Leak Probe; NYT Journo's Records Seized

      Longtime former director of security for the Senate Intelligence Committee, James A. Wolfe, was indicted and arrested Thursday night on charges of giving false statements to FBI agents in 2017 about repeated contacts with three reporters, according to the Washington Examiner.

      Jim Wolfe, a longtime former director of security at the Senate Intelligence Committee, was indicted and arrested Thursday night for giving false statements to F.B.I. agents during their investigation into leaks of classified information to the media.

      According to the Department of Justice, Wolfe lied to F.B.I. agents back in 2017 “about his repeated contacts with three reporters, including through his use of encrypted messaging applications.”

      Wolfe is also accused of making false statements about providing “non-public information related to matters occurring before the [Senate Intelligence Committee]” to two additional reporters. –Washington Examiner

      Wolfe, 57, is a former Army intelligence analyst who worked for the Senate for over 30 years. He stopped performing work for the committee in December and retired last month. More from the NYT:

      Court documents describe Mr. Wolfe’s communications with four reporters, using encrypted messaging applications. It appeared that the F.B.I. was investigating how Ms. Watkins learned that Russian spies in 2013 had tried to recruit Carter Page, a former Trump foreign policy adviser. She published an article for BuzzFeed News on April 3, 2017, about the attempted recruitment of Mr. Page in which he confirmed the contacts.

      In another case, the indictment said, Mr. Wolfe used an encrypted messaging app to alert another reporter in October 2017 that he had served Mr. Page with a subpoena to testify before the committee. The reporter, who was not named, published an article disclosing that Mr. Page had been compelled to appear. After it was published, Mr. Wolfe wrote to the journalist to say, “Good job!” and, “I’m glad you got the scoop,” according to court papers.

      The same month, Mr. Wolfe reached out to a third reporter on the same unidentified app to offer to serve as an unnamed source, the documents said.

      Mr. Wolfe also communicated with a fourth reporter, using his Senate email account, from 2015 to 2017, prosecutors said. They said he denied those contacts.

      Mr. Wolfe’s alleged conduct is a betrayal of the extraordinary public trust that had been placed in him. It is hoped that these charges will be a warning to those who might lie to law enforcement to the detriment of the United States,” said Assistant Attorney General John. Demers

      See the indictment here: 

      Ex-girlfriend’s communications seized

      News of Wolfe’s arrest follows an article by the New York Times which claims that the Department of Justice “secretly seized years’ worth of a New York Times reporter’s phone and email records,” in connection with an investigation into classified leaks.

      NYT national security reporter Ali Watkins – formerly of Buzzfeed and Politico, came under investigation as part of a DOJ inquiry into Wolfe. FBI agents approached Watkins about her relationship with Wolfe while investigating unauthorized leaks – the first known instance of the Justice Department seizing a reporter’s data under President Trump. 

      Ali Watkins

      Watkins claims that Wolfe was not a source of classified information during their relationship. 

      A prosecutor notified Ms. Watkins on Feb. 13 that the Justice Department had years of customer records and subscriber information from telecommunications companies, including Google and Verizon, for two email accounts and a phone number of hers. Investigators did not obtain the content of the messages themselves. The Times learned on Thursday of the letter, which came from the national security division of the United States attorney’s office in Washington. –New York Times

      Attorney General Jeff Sessions said last year that the DOJ was aggressively pursuing around three timx as many leak investigations as were open at the end of Obama’s second term – while Obama’s DOJ prosecuted more leaks than all previous administrations combined

      The seizure — disclosed in a letter to the reporter, Ali Watkins — suggested that prosecutors under the Trump administration will continue the aggressive tactics employed under President Barack Obama.

      When law enforcement officials obtained journalists’ records during the Obama administration, members of Congress in both parties sounded alarms, and the moves touched off such a firestorm among advocates for press freedom that helped prompt the Justice Department to rewrite its relevant guidelines. -NYT

      In early 2013, for example, the Obama DOJ led by Attorney General Eric Holder secretly obtained the home and cell phone numbers of individual AP journalists, in what the news agency called a “serious interference with AP’s constitutional rights to gather and report the news.” 

      “It’s always disconcerting when a journalist’s telephone records are obtained by the Justice Department — through a grand jury subpoena or other legal process,” said Ms. Watkins’s personal lawyer, Mark J. MacDougall to The Times. “Whether it was really necessary here will depend on the nature of the investigation and the scope of any charges.”

      The Senate Intelligence Committee hinted at the leak investigations on Wednesday, noting that it was cooperating with the DOJ “in a pending investigation,” while the Senate had earlier voted unanimously to adopt a resolution to share committee information with the DOJ in connection with a pending investigation arising out of the unauthorized disclosure of information.” 

      Press advocates have long considered the idea of mining a journalist’s records to be an intrusion of First Amendment freedoms – one which federal prosecutors at the DOJ acknowledge must be dealt with delicately. “Freedom of the press is a cornerstone of democracy, and communications between journalists and their sources demand protection,” said Eileen Murphy, a Times spokeswoman.

      Developing…

    • Trump Lashes Out At Macron, Trudeau Ahead Of "G6+1" Summit

      Tomorrow’s G7, or rather G6+1 meeting, is shaping up to be one for the ages.

      As we reported previously, chancellor Merkel already was setting the ground for the Toronto showdown among the world’s top political leaders, vowing to challenge Donald Trump on virtually every issue, from trade to climate, and warning that the lack of room for compromise means leaders may fail to agree on a final statement, an unprecedented event at a summit of the world’s 7 most advanced nations.

      Then, earlier today, in comments made alongside Canada PM Justin Trudeau in Ottawa, French President Emmanuel Macron said that no head of state is “eternal” and that he stands ready to work with the six other Group of Seven members if U.S. wants to stand alone.

      You say President Trump doesn’t care. Maybe. But none of us are eternal and our countries, the commitments taken, go beyond us. None of us who have been elected by the people can say ‘all prior commitments disappear.’ It’s just not true, there is a continuity in state affairs at the heart of international laws. Sometimes we’ve inherited some commitments that weren’t core to our beliefs, but we stuck to them, because that is how it works for nations. And that will be the case for the United States – like for every great democracy”, Macron said quoted by Bloomberg.

      The common theme: the rest of the world is desperate to show just how united it is again Trump, perhaps in hopes of subduing him and quashing his opposition.

      Good luck with that.

      Shortly after the constant barrage of anti-Trump rhetoric out of the G6, Trump on Thursday was quick to take even more jabs at Canada and France on the eve of the G-7 summit.

      In a tweet, Trump accused the U.S. allies of levying “massive tariffs” and creating “non-monetary barriers.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Trump’s comment was in response to French President Emmanuel Macron’s tweet in which he echoed Merkel’s threat to exclude U.S. from a joint statement issued every year at the G-7 summit.

      “The American President may not mind being isolated, but neither do we mind signing a 6 country agreement if need be. Because these 6 countries represent values, they represent an economic market which has the weight of history behind it and which is now a true international force,” Macron tweeted.

      Later on Thursday, Trump attacked Trudeau over Canada’s dairy industry, claiming that Canada is “killing” U.S. agriculture.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      As CNBC notes, Canada bought 31% of U.S. milk exports and 5.3% of its cheese exports in 2016, according to data from MIT’s Observatory of Economic Complexity.

      Trump then pivoted back the EU, asking its progressive, liberal leaders “Why isn’t the European Union and Canada informing the public that for years they have used massive Trade Tariffs and non-monetary Trade Barriers against the U.S. Totally unfair to our farmers, workers & companies. Take down your tariffs & barriers or we will more than match you!”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Tensions between the U.S. and many of its allies were already high after the Trump administration decided late last month to impose tariffs on imports from Canada, Mexico and the European Union, citing national security concerns. Trudeau responded that it’s offensive for the Trump administration to claim that Canada poses a security threat to the United States, given the “the thousands of Canadians who have fought and died alongside their American brothers in arms.”

      Later it emerged that in a phone conversation, Trump blamed Canada for burning down the White House in 1812, an escalation which Larry Kudlow said was nothing more than a “family quarrel.”

      Over the weekend, in the G7 meeting for finance ministers, the world’s top economic leaders asked Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin to relay their “unanimous concern and disappointment” over the tariffs on steel and aluminum imports.

      It appears the relaying had no impact, and what’s more there is no desire on either side to spend more time in Toronto than is absolutely required. According to Bloomberg’s Jennifer Epstein, Trump is getting to the G-7 summit late (11:15 tomorrow morning, while other leaders are already in Charlevoix) and leaving early (roughly 23 hours after his arrival, ahead of an afternoon of meetings).

      Commenting on what to expect tomorrow, Eurasia’s Ian Bremmer said “the meeting this week will be by far the most dysfunctional G-7. The old order is over. What we are fighting over now, as the new order emerges, is whether the U.S. wants to have the most important seat at the table or not. Right now the answer is no.”

      Perhaps: for the full answer tune in tomorrow for what promises to be the most exciting G6+1 meeting ever.

    • How To Reduce Your Risk Of Death By Gun Violence

      Authored by Jim Cox via The Foundation for Economic Education,

      Do you want to reduce your risk of death by gun violence?

      If so, consider these 10 common sense ways to do so. These are things one can implement fully and immediately with no permission or agreement from anyone else but are entirely in the control of any individual.

      Marching to persuade politicians is a very indirect way of reducing anyone’s risk from gun violence. And considering their track record on so many issues, politicians may end up putting us all at further risk when all is said and done.

      1. Don’t commit suicide. This is the most common gun-related death, being about 63% of all firearm deaths in the US.

      2. Adopt a policy of not escalating any road rage situations. If someone does something offensive on the highways have it pre-settled in your mind to react by de-escalating the situation (refrain from responding in kind) and back off to allow the heat of the moment to cool.

      3. Do not join a gang. Violence is the accepted norm among gang members, resulting in many becoming victims of gun violence.

      4. Do not buy or sell illegal drugs. Yes, I do know that it’s the drug laws more than the drugs themselves that leads to gun violence among drug buyers and sellers. But, people already on the wrong side of the law are more likely to commit gun violence than the law-abiding population.

      5. Do not get involved with abusive people. Someone who previously has physically abused a partner is more likely to do so than are those who have never engaged in such abuse.

      6. Implement a personal curfew. The safest place anyone can be at 2am is at home in bed. Roaming the streets in the middle of the night exposes one to gangs, drug sellers, and other dangerous people.

      7. Stay away from Gun-Free Zones. One study showed that 98% of all mass shootings happen in these places. Gun Free Zone signs tell violent people this is a spot where the picking will be easy. As for everywhere else, these predators may be deterred since they have to wonder if there’s already a good guy with a gun on the property.

      8. Do not associate with convicted criminals. Like the abuser, violent criminals out of prison are likely to continue their habits.

      9. Be aware of your surroundings. Make it a habit to look around and assess any situation you are in. Most victims of gun violence have no warning of the impending danger, the old saying “to be forewarned is to be forearmed” is pertinent here. So, no staring at your cell phone!

      10. Avoid people who handle guns in an irresponsible manner. Anyone who casually or even unknowingly points a gun at someone or who does not exercise good gun safety such as carefully checking to see that a gun is unloaded is someone to be avoided.

      11. Bonus Suggestion: Do not be a predator. A significant number (about 700 each year) of gun deaths are justifiable homicide wherein a victim successfully defends themselves from criminal assault.

      Thankfully, the odds of anyone in the U.S. dying from gun violence each year is exceedingly low. Implementing the suggestions here will reduce those odds even further.

    • George Soros Wastes Millions Backing Losing Candidates In California DA Races

      George Soros-backed candidates for district attorney in Sacramento, San Diego and Alameda counties lost to their conservative opponents in midterm elections on Tuesday, handing the “Open Society” billionaire a handful of embarrassing defeats in the most progressive state in the US.

      Soros and several other like-minded donors – the American Civil Liberties Union, for example – poured millions into four DA races across California in hopes of electing reform-minded DAs. Instead, the judges running against Soros’s candidates won by comfortable margins.

      Soros

      Conservative Sacramento incumbent Anne Marie Schubert won with 64% of the vote.

      Incumbent Republican Summer Stephan received 64% of the vote in San Diego.

      And Alameda County incumbent District Attorney Nancy O’Malley also won her race with 60% of the vote.

      In each case, Soros’s team had thought the incumbents were vulnerable to a challenge given the supposed anti-Republican backlash caused by Trump.

      Another Soros-backed candidate, Contra Costa County District Attorney Diana Becton, won, but may face a runoff in the November general election if she fails to win more than 50% of the votes in a recount that is ongoing, according to the Daily Caller

      Since 2014, Soros has spent more than $2.7 million in DA races in California alone, helping more liberal candidates catch up with their conservative counterparts. And since 2014, he has spent some $16 million in 17 races in other states, with his candidates winning 13 of them.

      The losses in this cycle were so bracing, that Michael Smolens, a columnist with the San Diego Tribune, questioned whether “these are mere speed bumps or is the political pendulum swinging against Soros and his progressive coalition?”

    Digest powered by RSS Digest